E-CFR

US Electronic Code of Federal Regulations Reading Aid

Title 49 – Transportation–Volume 7

Last updated on December 6th, 2021 at 10:18 pm

Contents hide

Title 49 – Transportation–Volume 7



SUBTITLE B – Other Regulations Relating to Transportation (Continued)

Part


chapter v – National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation (Continued)

572

chapter vi – Federal Transit Administration, Department of Transportation

601

chapter vii – National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK)

700

chapter viii – National Transportation Safety Board

800


Subtitle B – Other Regulations Relating to Transportation (Continued)

CHAPTER V – NATIONAL HIGHWAY TRAFFIC SAFETY ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CONTINUED)

PART 572 – ANTHROPOMORPHIC TEST DEVICES


Authority:49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117 and 30166; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95


Editorial Notes:1. For compliance provisions relating to a vehicle’s conformance with the performance requirements of Standard No. 208 (§ 571.208) relating to the part 572 test dummy, see the “Effective Date Note” at subpart E of this part.

2. Nomenclature changes to part 572 appear at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004.

Subpart A – General

§ 572.1 Scope.

This part describes the anthropomorphic test devices that are to be used for compliance testing of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment with motor vehicle safety standards.


[60 FR 43058, Aug. 18, 1995]


§ 572.2 Purpose.

The design and performance criteria specified in this part are intended to describe measuring tools with sufficient precision to give repetitive and correlative results under similar test conditions and to reflect adequately the protective performance of a vehicle or item of motor vehicle equipment with respect to human occupants.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7151, Feb. 7, 1977]


§ 572.3 Application.

This part does not in itself impose duties or liabilities on any person. It is a description of tools that measure the performance of occupant protection systems required by the safety standards that incorporate it. It is designed to be referenced by, and become a part of, the test procedures specified in motor vehicle safety standards such as Standard No. 208, Occupant Crash Protection.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]


§ 572.4 Terminology.

(a) The term dummy, when used in this subpart A, refers to any test device described by this part. The term dummy, when used in any other subpart of this part, refers to the particular dummy described in that part.


(b) Terms describing parts of the dummy, such as head, are the same as names for corresponding parts of the human body.


(c) The term unimodal, when used in subparts C and I, refers to an acceleration-time curve which has only one prominent peak.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977; 44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991]


Subpart B – 50th Percentile Male

§ 572.5 General description.

(a) The dummy consists of the component assemblies specified in Figure 1, which are described in their entirety by means of approximately 250 drawings and specifications that are grouped by component assemblies under the following nine headings:



SA 150 M070 – Right arm assembly

SA 150 M071 – Left arm assembly

SA 150 M050 – Lumbar spine assembly

SA 150 M060 – Pelvis and abdomen assembly

SA 150 M080 – Right leg assembly

SA 150 M081 – Left leg assembly

SA 150 M010 – Head assembly

SA 150 M020 – Neck assembly

SA 150 M030 – Shoulder-thorax assembly.

(b) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.


(c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for examination in Docket 73-08, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Room 5109, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC, 20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The drawings and specifications are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.


(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout the range of motion and also under crash impact conditions there is no contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under static conditions.


(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 208 of this chapter (571.208).


(f) A specimen of the dummy is available for surface measurements and access can be arranged by contacting: Office of Vehicle Safety Standards, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.


[50 FR 25423, June 19, 1985]


§ 572.6 Head.

(a) The head consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M010 in Figure 1 and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150 M010.


(b) When the head is dropped from a height of 10 inches in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head form in accordance with § 572.11(b) shall be not less than 210g, and not more than 260g. The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal and shall lie at or above the 100g level for an interval not less than 0.9 milliseconds and not more than 1.5 milliseconds. The lateral acceleration vector shall not exceed 10g.


(c) Test procedure:


(1) Suspend the head as shown in Figure 2, so that the lowest point on the forehead is 0.5 inches below the lowest point on the dummy’s nose when the midsagittal plane is vertical.


(2) Drop the head from the specified height by means that ensures instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, 2 inches thick and 2 feet square, which has a clean, dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches (rms) and not more than 80 microinches (rms).


(3) Allow a time period of at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same head.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]


§ 572.7 Neck.

(a) The neck consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M020 in Figure 1 and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150 M020.


(b) When the neck is tested with the head in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the head shall rotate in reference to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline a total of 68° ±5° about its center of gravity, rotating to the extent specified in the following table at each indicated point in time, measured from impact, with a chordal displacement measured at its center of gravity that is within the limits specified. The chordal displacement at time T is defined as the straight line distance between (1) the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at time zero, and (2) the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at time T as illustrated by Figure 3. The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head form in accordance with § 572.11(b) shall not exceed 26g. The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the head’s center of gravity returns to the original zero time position relative to the pendulum arm.


Rotation (degrees)
Time (ms) ±(2 + .08T)
Chordal Displacement (inches ±0.5)
000.0
30302.6
60464.8
Maximum605.5
60754.8
30952.6
01120.0

(c) Test procedure: (1) Mount the head and neck on a rigid pendulum as specified in Figure 4, so that the head’s midsagittal plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline. Mount the neck directly to the pendulum as shown in Figure 4.


(2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height such that the velocity at impact is 23.5 ±2.0 feet per second (fps), measured at the center of the accelerometer specified in Figure 4.


(3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time pulse described as follows:


(i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.


(ii) Establish t1 at the point where the rising a-t curve first crosses the 5g level, t2 at the point where the rising a-t curve first crosses the 20g level, t2 at the point where the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level, and t4 at the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.


(iii) t2-t1 shall be not more than 3 milliseconds.


(iv) t3-t2 shall be not less than 25 milliseconds and not more than 30 milliseconds.


(v) t4-t3 shall be not more than 10 milliseconds.


(vi) The average deceleration between t2 and t3 shall be not less than 20g and not more than 24g.


(4) Allow the neck to flex without impact of the head or neck with any object other than the pendulum arm.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977; 42 FR 12176, Mar. 3, 1977; 45 FR 40596, June 16, 1980]


§ 572.8 Thorax.

(a) The thorax consists of the assembly shown as number SA 150 M030 in Figure 1, and conforms to each of the drawings subtended by number SA 150 M030.


(b) The thorax contains enough unobstructed interior space behind the rib cage to permit the midpoint of the sternum to be depressed 2 inches without contact between the rib cage and other parts of the dummy or its instrumentation, except for instruments specified in paragraph (d)(7) of this section.


(c) When impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.11(a) at 14 fps and at 22 fps in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section, the thorax shall resist with forces measured by the test probe of not more than 1450 pounds and 2250 pounds, respectively, and shall deflect by amounts not greater than 1.1 inches and 1.7 inches, respectively. The internal hysteresis in each impact shall not be less than 50 percent and not more than 70 percent.


(d) Test procedure: (1) With the dummy seated without back support on a surface as specified in § 572.11(i) and in the orientation specified in § 572.11(i), adjust the dummy arms and legs until they are extended horizontally forward parallel to the midsagittal plane.


(2) Place the longitudinal center line of the test probe so that it is 17.7 ±0.1 inches above the seating surface at impact.


(3) Align the test probe specified in § 572.11(a) so that at impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(4) Adjust the dummy so that the surface area on the thorax immediately adjacent to the projected longitudinal center line of the test probe is vertical. Limb support, as needed to achieve and maintain this orientation, may be provided by placement of a steel rod of any diameter not less than one-quarter of an inch and not more than three-eighths of an inch, with hemispherical ends, vertically under the limb at its projected geometric center.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane at the moment of impact.


(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(7) Measure the horizontal deflection of the sternum relative to the thoracic spine along the line established by the longitudinal centerline of the probe at the moment of impact, using a potentiometer mounted inside the sternum.


(8) Measure hysteresis by determining the ratio of the area between the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the area under the loading portion of the curve.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]


§ 572.9 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis.

(a) The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the assemblies designated as numbers SA 150 M050 and SA 150 M060 in Figure 1 and conform to the drawings subtended by these numbers.


(b) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from its initial position in accordance with Figure 11 by the number of degrees shown below at each specified force level, and straighten upon removal of the force to within 12 degrees of its initial position in accordance with Figure 11.


Flexion (degrees)
Force (±6 pounds)
00
2028
3040
4052

(c) Test procedure: (1) Assemble the thorax, lumbar spine, pelvic, and upper leg assemblies (above the femur force transducers), ensuring that all component surfaces are clean, dry, and untreated unless otherwise specified, and attach them to the horizontal fixture shown in Figure 5 at the two link rod pins and with the mounting brackets for the lumbar test fixtures illustrated in Figures 6 to 9.


(2) Attach the rear mounting of the pelvis to the pelvic instrument cavity rear face at the four
1/4″ cap screw holes and attach the front mounting at the femur axial rotation joint. Tighten the mountings so that the pelvic-lumbar adapter is horizontal and adjust the femur friction plungers at each hip socket joint to 240 inch-pounds torque.


(3) Flex the thorax forward 50° and then rearward as necessary to return it to its initial position in accordance with Figure 11 unsupported by external means.


(4) Apply a forward force perpendicular to the thorax instrument cavity rear face in the midsagittal plane 15 inches above the top surface of the pelvic-lumbar adapter. Apply the force at any torso deflection rate between .5 and 1.5 degrees per second up to 40° of flexion but no further, continue to apply for 10 seconds that force necessary to maintain 40° of flexion, and record the force with an instrument mounted to the thorax as shown in Figure 5. Release all force as rapidly as possible and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the release.


(d) When the abdomen is subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section, the abdominal force-deflection curve shall be within the two curves plotted in Figure 10.


(e) Test procedure: (1) Place the assembled thorax, lumbar spine and pelvic assemblies in a supine position on a flat, rigid, smooth, dry, clean horizontal surface, ensuring that all component surfaces are clean, dry, and untreated unless otherwise specified.


(2) Place a rigid cylinder 6 inches in diameter and 18 inches long transversely across the abdomen, so that the cylinder is symmetrical about the midsagittal plane, with its longitudinal centerline horizontal and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane at a point 9.2 inches above the bottom line of the buttocks, measured with the dummy positioned in accordance with Figure 11.


(3) Establish the zero deflection point as the point at which a force of 10 pounds has been reached.


(4) Apply a vertical downward force through the cylinder at any rate between 0.25 and 0.35 inches per second.


(5) Guide the cylinder so that it moves without significant lateral or rotational movement.


[42 FR 7152, Feb. 7, 1977]


§ 572.10 Limbs.

(a) The limbs consist of the assemblies shown as numbers SA 150 M070, SA 150 M071, SA 150 M080, and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and conform to the drawings subtended by these numbers.


(b) When each knee is impacted at 6.9 ft/sec. in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the maximum force on the femur shall be not more than 2500 pounds and not less than 1850 pounds, with a duration above 1000 pounds of not less than 1.7 milliseconds.


(c) Test procedure: (1) Seat the dummy without back support on a surface as specified in § 572.11(i) that is 17.3 ±0.2 inches above a horizontal surface, oriented as specified in § 572.11(i), and with the hip joint adjustment at any setting between 1g and 2g. Place the dummy legs in planes parallel to its midsagittal plane (knee pivot centerline perpendicular to the midsagittal plane) and with the feet flat on the horizontal surface. Adjust the feet and lower legs until the lines between the midpoints of the knee pivots and the ankle pivots are at any angle not less than 2 degrees and not more than 4 degrees rear of the vertical, measured at the centerline of the knee pivots.


(2) Reposition the dummy if necessary so that the rearmost point of the lower legs at the level one inch below the seating surface remains at any distance not less than 5 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the forward edge of the seat.


(3) Align the test probe specified in § 572.11(a) so that at impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within ±2° with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.


(4) Impact the knee with the test probe moving horizontally and parallel to the midsagittal plane at the specified velocity.


(5) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7153, Feb. 7, 1977]


§ 572.11 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The test probe used for thoracic and knee impact tests is a cylinder 6 inches in diameter that weighs 51.5 pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right face that is rigid and that has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.


(b) Accelerometers are mounted in the head on the horizontal transverse bulkhead shown in the drawings subreferenced under assembly No. SA 150 M010 in Figure 1, so that their sensitive axes intersect at a point in the midsagittal plane 0.5 inches above the horizontal bulkhead and 1.9 inches ventral of the vertical mating surface of the skull with the skull cover. One accelerometer is aligned with its sensitive axis perpendicular to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane and with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 0.3 inches superior to the axial intersection point. Another accelerometer is aligned with its sensitive axis parallel to the horizontal bulkhead and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, and with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 1.3 inches to the left of the axial intersection point (left side of dummy is the same as that of man). A third accelerometer is aligned with its sensitive axis parallel to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane, and with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 1.3 inches dorsal to the axial intersection point.


(c) Accelerometers are mounted in the thorax by means of a bracket attached to the rear vertical surface (hereafter “attachment surface”) of the thoracic spine so that their sensitive axes intersect at a point in the midsagittal plane 0.8 inches below the upper surface of the plate to which the neck mounting bracket is attached and 3.2 inches perpendicularly forward of the surface to which the accelerometer bracket is attached. One accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented parallel to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane, with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 1.3 inches inferior to the intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. Another accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented parallel to the attachment surface and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 0.2 inches to the right of the intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. A third accelerometer has its sensitive axis oriented perpendicular to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane, with its seismic mass center at any distance up to 1.3 inches dorsal to the intersection of the sensitive axes specified above. Accelerometers are oriented with the dummy in the position specified in § 572.11(i).


(d) A force-sensing device is mounted axially in each femur shaft so that the transverse centerline of the sensing element is 4.25 inches from the knee’s center of rotation.


(e) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211a, December 1971, with channel classes as follows:


(1) Head acceleration – Class 1000.


(2) Pendulum acceleration – Class 60.


(3) Thorax acceleration – Class 180.


(4) Thorax compression – Class 180.


(5) Femur force – Class 600.


(f) The mountings for sensing devices have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(g) Limb joints are set at 1g, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.


(h) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 °F to 78 °F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.


(i) For the performance tests specified in §§ 572.8, 572.9, and 572.10, the dummy is positioned in accordance with Figure 11 as follows:


(1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, smooth, clean, dry, horizontal, steel test surface whose length and width dimensions are not less than 16 inches, so that the dummy’s midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the test surface and the rearmost points on its lower legs at the level of the test surface are at any distance not less than 5 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the forward edge of the test surface.


(2) The pelvis is adjusted so that the upper surface of the lumbar-pelvic adapter is horizontal.


(3) The shoulder yokes are adjusted so that they are at the midpoint of their anterior-posterior travel with their upper surfaces horizontal.


(4) The dummy is adjusted so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a transverse vertical plane.


(5) The upper legs are positioned symmetrically about the midsagittal plane so that the distance between the knee pivot bolt heads is 11.6 inches.


(6) The lower legs are positioned in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane so that the lines between the midpoint of the knee pivots and the ankle pivots are vertical.


(j) The dummy’s dimensions, as specified in drawing number SA 150 M002, are determined as follows:


(1) With the dummy seated as specified in paragraph (i) of this section, the head is adjusted and secured so that its occiput is 1.7 inches forward of the transverse vertical plane with the vertical mating surface of the skull with its cover parallel to the transverse vertical plane.


(2) The thorax is adjusted and secured so that the rear surface of the chest accelerometer mounting cavity is inclined 3° forward of vertical.


(3) Chest and waist circumference and chest depth measurements are taken with the dummy positioned in accordance with paragraphs (j) (1) and (2) of this section.


(4) The chest skin and abdominal sac are removed and all following measurements are made without them.


(5) Seated height is measured from the seating surface to the uppermost point on the head-skin surface.


(6) Shoulder pivot height is measured from the seating surface to the center of the arm elevation pivot.


(7) H-point locations are measured from the seating surface to the center of the holes in the pelvis flesh covering in line with the hip motion ball.


(8) Knee pivot distance from the backline is measured to the center of the knee pivot bolt head.


(9) Knee pivot distance from floor is measured from the center of the knee pivot bolt head to the bottom of the heel when the foot is horizontal and pointing forward.


(10) Shoulder width measurement is taken at arm elevation pivot center height with the centerlines between the elbow pivots and the shoulder pivots vertical.


(11) Hip width measurement is taken at widest point of pelvic section.


(k) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(l) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.








[38 FR 20451, Aug. 1, 1973, as amended at 42 FR 7153, Feb. 7, 1977]


Subpart C – 3-Year-Old Child


Source:44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.15 General description.

(a) The dummy consists of the component assemblies specified in drawing SA 103C 001, which are described in their entirety by means of approximately 122 drawings and specifications and an Operation and Maintenance Manual, dated May 28, 1976. The drawings and specifications are grouped by component assemblies under the following thirteen headings:



SA 103C 010 Head Assembly

SA 103C 020 Neck Assembly

SA 103C 030 Torso Assembly

SA 103C 041 Upper Arm Assembly Left

SA 103C 042 Upper Arm Assembly Right

SA 103C 051 Forearm Hand Assembly Left

SA 103C 052 Forearm Hand Assembly Right

SA 103C 061Upper Leg Assembly Left

SA 103C 062 Upper Leg Assembly Right

SA 103C 071 Lower Leg Assembly Left

SA 103C 072 Lower Leg Assembly Right

SA 103C 081 Foot Assembly left

SA 103C 082 Foot Assembly Right.

(b) The drawings, specifications, and operation and maintenance manual referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.


(c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for examination in Docket 78-09, Room 5109, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The materials are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.


(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout the range of motion and also under simulated crash-impact conditions there is no contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under static conditions.


(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (§ 571.213).


(f) The patterns of all cast and molded parts for reproduction of the molds needed in manufacturing of the dummies can be obtained on a loan basis by manufacturers of the testes dummies, or others if need is shown, from: Office of Vehicle Safety Standards, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC 20590.


[50 FR 25423, June 19, 1985]


§ 572.16 Head.

(a) The head consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 010 on drawing No. SA 103C 001, and conforms to either –


(1) Each item specified on drawing SA 103C 002(B), sheet 8; or


(2) Each item specified on drawing SA 103C 002, sheet 8.


(b) When the head is impacted by a test probe specified in § 572.21(a)(1) at 7 fps, then the peak resultant acceleration measured at the location of the accelerometer mounted in the headform according to § 572.21(b) is not less than 95g and not more than 118g.


(1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test is unimodal at or above the 50g level, and lies at or above that level for intervals:


(i) In the case of the head assembly specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, not less than 1.3 milliseconds and not more than 2.0 milliseconds;


(ii) In the case of the head assembly specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, not less than 2.0 milliseconds and not more than 3.0 milliseconds.


(2) The lateral acceleration vector does not exceed 7g.


(c) Test procedure. (1) Seat the dummy on a seating surface having a back support as specified in § 572.21(h) and orient the dummy in accordance with § 572.21(h) and adjust the joints of the limbs at any setting between 1g and 2g, which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward.


(2) Adjust the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline is at the forehead at the point of orthogonal intersection of the head midsagittal plane and the transverse plane which is perpendicular to the “Z” axis of the head (longitudinal centerline of the skull anchor) and is located 0.6 ±0.1 inches above the centers of the head center of gravity reference pins and coincides within 2 degrees with the line made by the intersection of horizontal and midsagittal planes passing through this point.


(3) Adjust the dummy so that the surface area on the forehead immediately adjacent to the projected longitudinal centerline of the test probe is vertical.


(4) Impact the head with the test probe so that at the moment of impact the probe’s longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(5) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(6) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive tests of the head.


[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 45 FR 43353, June 26, 1980, as amended at 45 FR 82267, Dec. 15, 1980; 55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]


§ 572.17 Neck.

(a)(1) The neck for use with the head assembly described in § 572.16(a)(1) consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 020 on drawing No. SA 103C 001, conforms to each item specified on drawing No. SA 103C 002(B), sheet 9.


(2) The neck for use with the head assembly described in § 572.16(a)(2) consists of the assembly designated as SA 103C 020 on drawing No. SA 103C 001, and conforms to each item specified on drawing No. SA 103C 002, sheet 9.


(b) When the head-neck assembly is tested in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the head shall rotate in reference to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline a total of 84 degrees ±8 degrees about its center of gravity, rotating to the extent specified in the following table at each indicated point in time, measured from impact, with the chordal displacement measured at its center of gravity. The chordal displacement at time T is defined as the straight line distance between (1) the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at time zero, and (2) the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head center of gravity at time T as illustrated by figure 3. The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the headform in accordance with § 572.21(b) shall not exceed 30g. The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the head’s center of gravity returns to the original zero time position relative to the pendulum arm.


Rotation (degrees)
Time (ms) ±(2 + .08T)
Chordal displacement (inches ±0.8)
000
30212.2
60364.3
Maximum625.8
60914.3
301082.2
01230

(c) Test procedure. (1) Mount the head and neck on a rigid pendulum as specified in Figure 4, so that the head’s midsagittal plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline. Mount the neck directly to the pendulum as shown in Figure 15.


(2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height such that the velocity at impact is 17.00 ±1.0 feet per second (fps), measured at the center of the accelerometer specified in figure 4.


(3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time pulse described as follows:


(i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.


(ii) Establish t1 at the point where the a-t curve first crosses the 5g level, t2 at the point where the rising a-t curve first crosses the 20g level, t3 at the point where the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level, and t4 at the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.


(iii) t2-t1, shall be not more than 4 milliseconds.


(iv) t3-t2, shall be not less than 18 and not more than 21 milliseconds.


(v) t4-t3, shall be not more than 5 milliseconds.


(vi) The average deceleration between t2 and t3 shall be not less than 20g and not more then 34g.


(4) Allow the neck to flex without contact of the head or neck with any object other than the pendulum arm.


(5) Allow a time period of at least 1 hour between successive tests of the head and neck.


[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979; 45 FR 43353, June 26, 1980, as amended at 55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]


§ 572.18 Thorax.

(a) The thorax consists of the part of the torso shown in assembly drawing SA 103C 001 by number SA 103C 030 and conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed under this number on drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 10 and 11.


(b) When impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.21(a) at 13 fps in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the chest cavity in accordance with § 572.21(c) shall be not less than 50g and not more than 70g. The acceleration-time curve for the test shall be unimodal at or above the 30g level and shall lie at or above the 30g level for an interval not less than 2.5 milliseconds and not more than 4.0 milliseconds. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 5g.


(c) Test procedure. (1) With the dummy seated without back support on a surface as specified in § 572.21(h) and oriented as specified in § 572.21(h), adjust the dummy arms and legs until they are extended horizontally forward parallel to the midsagittal plane. The joints of the limbs are adjusted at any setting between 1g and 2g, which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward.


(2) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that it is 1.5 inches below the longitudinal centerline of the bolt that attaches the top of the ribcage sternum to the thoracic spine box.


(3) Adjust the dummy so that the tangent plane at the surface on the thorax immediately adjacent to the designated impact point is vertical and parallel to the face of the test probe.


(4) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe to coincide with the designated impact point and align the test probe so that at impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within 2 degrees with the line formed by intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes passing through the designated impact point.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of impact the probe’s longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy midsagittal plane.


(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(7) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive tests of the chest.


§ 572.19 Lumbar spine, abdomen and pelvis.

(a) The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the part of the torso assembly shown by number SA 103C 030 on drawing SA 103C 001 and conform to each of the applicable drawings listed under this number on drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 10 and 11.


(b) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from its initial position in accordance with Figure 18 of this subpart by 40 degrees at a force level of not less than 34 pounds and not more than 47 pounds, and straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of its initial position.


(c) Test procedure. (1) The dummy with lower legs removed is positioned in an upright seated position on a seat as indicated in Figure 18, ensuring that all dummy component surfaces are clean, dry and untreated unless otherwise specified.


(2) Attach the pelvis to the seating surface by a bolt C/328, modified as shown in Figure 18, and the upper legs at the knee axial rotation joints by the attachments shown in Figure 18. Tighten the mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal and adjust the femur ball-flange screws at each hip socket joint to 50 inch pounds torque. Remove the head and the neck and install a cylindrical aluminum adapter 2.0 inches in diameter and 2.80 inches long in place of the neck.


(3) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as necessary to return to its initial position in accordance with Figure 18 unsupported by external means.


(4) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top of the neck adapter, so that at 40 degrees of the lumbar spine flexion the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box. Apply the force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second up to 40 degrees of flexion but no further; continue to apply for 10 seconds the force necessary to maintain 40 degrees of flexion, and record the highest applied force at that time. Release all force as rapidly as possible and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the release.


§ 572.20 Limbs.

The limbs consist of the assemblies shown on drawing SA 103C 001 as Nos. SA 103C 041, SA 103C 042, SA 103C 051, SA 103C 052, SA 103C 061, SA 103C 062, SA 103C 071, SA 103C 072, SA 103C 081, SA 103C 082, and conform to each of the applicable drawings listed under their respective numbers of the drawing SA 103C 002, sheets 12 through 21.


§ 572.21 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a)(1) The test probe used for head and thoracic impact tests is a cylinder 3 inches in diameter, 13.8 inches long, and weighing 10 lbs., 6 ozs. Its impacting end has a flat right face that is rigid and that has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.


(2) The head and thorax assembly may be instrumented with a Type A or Type C accelerometer.


(i) Type A accelerometer is defined in drawing SA-572 S1.


(ii) Type C accelerometer is defined in drawing SA-572 S2.


(b) Head accelerometers. Install one of the triaxial accelerometers specified in § 572.21(a)(2) on a mounting block located on the horizontal transverse bulkhead as shown in the drawings subreferenced under assembly SA 103C 010 so that the seismic mass centers of each sensing element are positioned as specified in this paragraph, relative to the head accelerometer reference point located at the intersection of a line connecting the longitudinal centerlines of the transfer pins in the side of the dummy head with the midsagittal plane of the dummy head.


(1) The sensing elements of the Type C triaxial accelerometer are aligned as follows:


(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and coincident with the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center located 0.2 inches dorsal to, and 0.1 inches inferior to the head accelerometer reference point.


(ii) Align the second sensitive axis with the horizontal plane, perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center located 0.1 inches inferior, 0.4 inches to the right of, and 0.9 inches dorsal to the head accelerometer reference point.


(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.1 inches inferior to, 0.6 inches dorsal to, and 0.4 inches to the right of the head accelerometer reference point.


(iv) All seismic mass centers are positioned with ±0.05 inches of the specified locations.


(2) The sensing elements of the Type A triaxial accelerometer are aligned as follows:


(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and coincident with midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located from 0.2 to 0.47 inches dorsal to, from 0.01 inches inferior to 0.21 inches superior, and from 0.0 to 0.17 inches left of the head accelerometer reference point.


(ii) Align the second sensitive axis with the horizontal plane, perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center located 0.1 to 0.13 inches inferior to, 0.17 to 0.4 inches to the right of, and 0.47 to 0.9 inches dorsal of the head accelerometer reference point.


(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.1 to 0.13 inches inferior to, 0.6 to 0.81 inches dorsal to, and from 0.17 inches left to 0.4 inches right of the head accelerometer reference point.


(c) Thorax accelerometers. Install one of the triaxial accelerometers specified in § 572.21(a)(2) on a mounting plate attached to the vertical transverse bulkhead shown in the drawing subreferenced under assembly No. SA 103C 030 in drawing SA 103C 001, so that the seismic mass centers of each sensing element are positioned as specified in this paragraph, relative to the thorax accelerometer reference point located in the midsagital plane 3 inches above the top surface of the lumbar spine, and 0.3 inches dorsal to the accelerometer mounting plate surface.


(1) The sensing elements of the Type C triaxial accelerometer are aligned as follows:


(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.2 inches to the left of, 0.1 inches inferior to, and 0.2 inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference point.


(ii) Align the second sensitive axis so that it is in the horizontal transverse plane, and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane, with the seismic mass center located 0.2 inches to the right of, 0.1 inches inferior to, and 0.2 inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference point.


(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the midsagittal and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.2 inches superior to, 0.5 inches to the right of, and 0.1 inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference points.


(iv) All seismic mass centers shall be positioned within ±0.05 inches of the specified locations.


(2) The sensing elements of the Type A triaxial accelerometer are aligned as follows:


(i) Align one sensitive axis parallel to the vertical bulkhead and midsagittal planes, with the seismic mass center located from 0.2 inches left to 0.28 inches right, from 0.5 to 0.15 inches inferior to, and from 0.15 to 0.25 inches ventral of the thorax accelerometer reference point.


(ii) Align the second sensitive axis so that it is in the horizontal transverse plane and perpendicular to the midsagital plane, with the seismic mass center located from 0.06 inches left to 0.2 inches right of, from 0.1 inches inferior to 0.24 inches superior, and 0.15 to 0.25 inches ventral to the thorax accelerometer reference point.


(iii) Align the third sensitive axis so that it is parallel to the midsagital and horizontal planes, with the seismic mass center located 0.15 to 0.25 inches superior to, 0.28 to 0.5 inches to the right of, and from 0.1 inches ventral to 0.19 inches dorsal to the thorax accelerometer reference point.


(d) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the dummy, and of test apparatus specified by this part, are recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211a, December 1971, with channel classes as follows:


(1) Head acceleration – Class 1000.


(2) Pendulum acceleration – Class 60.


(3) Thorax acceleration – Class 180.


(e) The mountings for accelerometers have no resonance frequency less than cut-off 3 times the cut-off frequency of the applicable channel class.


(f) Limb joints are set at the force between 1-2g, which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.


(g) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 °F to 78 °F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.


(h) For the performance tests specified in §§ 572.16, 572.18, and 572.19, the dummy is positioned in accordance with Figures 16, 17, and 18 as follows:


(1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, clean, dry, horizontal surface of teflon sheeting with a smoothness of 40 microinches and whose length and width dimensions are not less than 16 inches, so that the dummy’s midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the test surface. For head tests, the seat has a vertical back support whose top is 12.4 ±0.2 inches above the seating surface. The rear surfaces of the dummy’s shoulders and buttocks are touching the back support as shown in Figure 16. For thorax and lumbar spine tests, the seating surface is without the back support as shown in Figures 17 and 18, respectively.


(2) The shoulder yokes are adjusted so that they are at the midpoint of their anterior-posterior travel with their upper surfaces horizontal.


(3) The dummy is adjusted for head impact and lumbar flexion tests so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a transverse vertical plane.


(4) The arms and legs are positioned so that their centerlines are in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.


(i) The dummy’s dimensions are specified in drawings No. SA 103C 002, sheets 22 through 26.


(j) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 20 minutes unless otherwise specified.


(k) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.






[44 FR 76530, Dec. 27, 1979, as amended at 45 FR 82267, Dec. 15, 1980; 55 FR 30468, July 26, 1990]


Subpart D – 6-Month-Old Infant

§ 572.25 General description.

(a) The infant dummy is specified in its entirety by means of 5 drawings (No. SA 1001) and a construction manual, dated July 2, 1974, which describe in detail the materials and the procedures involved in the manufacturing of this dummy.


(b) The drawings, specifications, and construction manual referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.


(c) The materials incorporated by reference are available for examination in Docket 78-09, Room 5109, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street SW., Washington, DC, 20590. Copies may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 1216 K Street NW., Washington, DC 20005 ((202) 628-6667). The materials are also on file in the reference library of the Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC.


(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (§ 571.213).


[50 FR 25424, June 19, 1985]


Subpart E – Hybrid III Test Dummy


Source:51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.30 Incorporated materials.

(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by reference. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aid Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.


(b) The materials incorporated by reference are available for examination in the general reference section of docket 74-14, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Room 5109, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Copies may be obtained from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 20705, Telephone (301) 210-5600, Facsimile (301) 419-5069, Attn. Mr. Jay Wall. Drawings and specifications are also on file at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1996]


§ 572.31 General description.

(a) The Hybrid III 50th percentile size dummy consists of components and assemblies specified in the Anthropomorphic Test Dummy drawing and specifications package which consists of the following six items:


(1) The Anthropomorphic Test Dummy Parts List, dated June 26, 1998, and containing 16 pages, and a Parts List Index, dated June 26, 1998, containing 8 pages.


(2) A listing of Hybrid III Dummy Transducers-reference document AGARD-AR-330, “Anthropomorphic Dummies for Crash and Escape System Testing”, Chapter 6, Table 6-2, North Atlantic Treaty Organization, July, 1996.


(3) A General Motors Drawing Package identified by GM Drawing No. 78051-218, revision U, titled “Hybrid III Anthropomorphic Test Dummy,” dated August 30, 1998, the following component assemblies, and subordinate drawings:


Drawing No.
Revision
78051-61X head assembly-complete, (May 20, 1978)(T)
78051-90 neck assembly-complete, dated May 20, 1978(A)
78051-89 upper torso assembly-complete, dated May 20, 1978(K)
78051-70 lower torso assembly-complete, dated June 30, 1998, except for drawing No. 78051-55, “Instrumentation Assembly-Pelvic Accelerometer,” dated August 2, 1979(F)
86-5001-001 leg assembly-complete (LH), dated March 26, 1996(A)
86-5001-002 leg assembly-complete (RH), dated March 26, 1996(A)
78051-123 arm assembly-complete (LH), dated May 20, 1996(D)
78051-124 arm assembly-complete (RH), dated May 20, 1978(D)
78051-59 pelvic assembly-complete, dated June 30, 1998(G)
78051-60 pelvic structure-molded, dated June 30, 1998(E)

(4) Disassembly, Inspection, Assembly and Limbs Adjustment Procedures for the Hybrid III dummy, dated June 1998.


(5) Sign Convention for signal outputs – reference document SAE J1733 Information Report, titled “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing”, dated 1994-12.


(6) Exterior dimensions of the Hybrid III dummy, dated July 15, 1986.


(b) [Reserved]


(c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that throughout the range of motion and also under crash-impact conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under static conditions.


(d) The weights, inertial properties and centers of gravity location of component assemblies shall conform to those listed in drawing 78051-338, revision S, titled “Segment Weights, Inertial Properties, Center of Gravity Location – Hybrid III,” dated May 20, 1978 of drawing No. 78051-218.


(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in vehicle test specified in Standard No. 208 of this chapter (§ 571.208).


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8764, Mar. 17, 1988; 57 FR 47010, Oct. 14, 1992; 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1996; 62 FR 27514, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 5747, Feb. 4, 1998; 63 FR 53851, Oct. 7, 1998]


§ 572.32 Head.

(a) The head consists of the assembly shown in drawing 78051-61X, revision C, and conforms to each of the drawings subtended therein.


(b) When the head (Drawing number 78051-61X, titled “head assembly – complete,” dated March 28, 1997 (Revision C) with six axis neck transducer structural replacement (Drawing number 78051-383X, Revision P, titled “Neck Transducer Structural Replacement,” dated November 1, 1995) is dropped from a height of 14.8 inches in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the head in accordance with § 572.36(c) shall not be less than 225g, and not more than 275g. The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal to the extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse are less than ten percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The lateral acceleration vector shall not exceed 15g (zero to peak).


(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head assembly in a test environment at any temperature between 66 degrees F to 78 degrees F and at a relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours prior to its application in a test.


(2) Clean the head’s skin surface and the surface of the impact plate with 1,1,1 Trichlorethane or equivalent.


(3) Suspend the head, as shown in Figure 19, so that the lowest point on the forehead is 0.5 inches below the lowest point on the dummy’s nose when the midsagittal plane is vertical.



(4) Drop the head from the specified height by means that ensure instant release into a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, which is 2 inches thick and 2 feet square. The plate shall have a clean, dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches (rms) and not more than 80 microinches (rms).


(5) Allow at least 3 hours between successive tests on the same head.


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 62 FR 27514, May 20, 1997]


§ 572.33 Neck.

(a) The neck consists of the assembly shown in drawing 78051-90, revision A and conforms to each of the drawings subtended therein.


(b) When the head and neck assembly (consisting of the parts 78051-61X, revision C; -90, revision A; -84; -94; -98; -104, revision F; -303, revision E; -305; -306; -307, revision X) which has a six axis neck transducer (Drawing number C-1709, Revision D, titled “Neck transducer,” dated February 1, 1993.) installed in conformance with § 572.36(d), is tested in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure 20, shall rotate between 64 degrees and 78 degrees, which shall occur between 57 milliseconds (ms) and 64 ms from time zero. In first rebound, the rotation of Plane D shall cross 0 degrees between 113 ms and 128 ms.


(ii) The moment measured by the six axis neck transducer (drawing C-1709, revision D) about the occipital condyles, referenced in Figure 20, shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (lbs-ft) = My−0.058 × Fx, where My is the moment measured in lbs-ft by the “Y” axis moment sensor of the six axis neck transducer and Fx is the force measured in lbs by the “X” axis force sensor (Channel Class 600) of the six axis neck transducer. The moment shall have a maximum value between 65 lbs-ft and 80 lbs-ft occurring between 47ms and 58 ms, and the positive moment shall decay for the first time to 0 lb-ft between 97 ms and 107 ms.


(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure 21, shall rotate between 81 degrees and 106 degrees, which shall occur between 72 ms and 82 ms from time zero. In first rebound, rotation of Plane D shall cross 0 degrees between 147 ms and 174 ms.


(ii) The moment measured by the six axis neck transducer (drawing C-1709, revision D) about the occipital condyles, referenced in Figure 21, shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (lbs-ft) = My−0.058 × Fx, where My is the moment measured in lbs-ft by the “Y” axis moment sensor of the six axis neck transducer and Fx is the force measured in lbs by the “X” axis force sensor (Channel Class 600) of the six axis neck transducer. The moment shall have a maximum value between – 39 lbs-ft and -59 lbs-ft, occurring between 65 ms and 79 ms, and the negative moment shall decay for the first time to 0 lb-ft between 120 ms and 148 ms.




(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the test material in a test environment at any temperature between 69 degrees F to 72 degrees F and at a relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours prior to its application in a test.


(2) Torque the jamnut (78051-64) on the neck cable (78051-301, revision E) to 1.0 lbs-ft ±.2 lbs-ft.


(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this section, on a rigid pendulum as shown in Figure 22 so that the head’s midsagittal plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum’s longitudinal axis.



(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height such that the tangential velocity at the pendulum accelerometer centerline at the instance of contact with the honeycomb is 23.0 ft/sec ±0.4 ft/sec. for flexion testing and 19.9 ft/sec. ±0.4 ft/sec. for extension testing. The pendulum deceleration vs. time pulse for flexion testing shall conform to the characteristics shown in Table A and the decaying deceleration-time curve shall first cross 5g between 34 ms and 42 ms. The pendulum deceleration vs. time pulse for extension testing shall conform to the characteristics shown in Table B and the decaying deceleration-time curve shall cross 5g between 38 ms and 46 ms.


Table A – Flexion Pendulum Deceleration vs. Time Pulse

Time (ms)
Flexion deceleration level (g)
1022.50-27.50
2017.60-22.60
3012.50-18.50
Any other time above 30 ms29 maximum.

Table B – Extension Pendulum Deceleration vs. Time Pulse

Time (ms)
Extension deceleration level (g)
1017.20-21.20
2014.00-19.00
3011.00-16.00
Any other time above 30 ms22 maximum.

(5) Allow the neck to flex without impact of the head or neck with any object during the test.


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62 FR 27514, May 20, 1997; 76 FR 31864, June 2, 2011]


§ 572.34 Thorax.

(a) The thorax consists of the upper torso assembly in drawing 78051-89, revision K and shall conform to each of the drawings subtended therein.


(b) When impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.36(a) at 22 fps ±0.40 fps in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the thorax of a complete dummy assembly (78051-218, revision U, without shoes, shall resist with a force of 1242.5 pounds ±82.5 pounds measured by the test probe and shall have a sternum displacement measured relative to spine of 2.68 inches ±0.18 inches. The internal hysteresis in each impact shall be more than 69% but less than 85%. The force measured is the product of pendulum mass and deceleration.


(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the test dummy in an environment with a relative humidity from 10% to 70% until the temperature of the ribs of the test dummy have stabilized at a temperature between 69 degrees F and 72 degrees F.


(2) Seat the dummy without back and arm supports on a surface as shown in Figure 23, and set the angle of the pelvic bone at 13 degrees plus or minus 2 degrees, using the procedure described in S11.4.3.2 of Standard No. 208 (§ 571.208 of this chapter).



(3) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe so that it is .5 ±.04 in. below the horizontal centerline of the No. 3 Rib (reference drawing number 79051-64, revision A-M) as shown in Figure 23.


(4) Align the test probe specified in § 572.36(a) so that at impact its longitudinal centerline coincides within .5 degree of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that the longitudinal centerline of the test probe falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy midsagittal plane at the moment of impact.


(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(7) Measure the horizontal deflection of the sternum relative to the thoracic spine along the line established by the longitudinal centerline of the probe at the moment of impact, using a potentiometer (ref. drawing 78051-317, revision A) mounted inside the sternum as shown in drawing 78051-89, revision I.


(8) Measure hysteresis by determining the ratio of the area between the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the area under the loading portion of the curve.


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62 FR 27518, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 53851, Oct. 7, 1998]


§ 572.35 Limbs.

(a) The limbs consist of the following assemblies: leg assemblies 86-5001-001, revision A and -002, revision A, and arm assemblies 78051-123, revision D and -124, revision D, and shall conform to the drawings subtended therein.


(b) Femur impact response. (1) When each knee of the leg assemblies is impacted in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, at 6.9 ft/sec ±0.10 ft/sec by the pendulum defined in § 572.36(b), the peak knee impact force, which is a product of pendulum mass and acceleration, shall have a minimum value of not less than 1060 pounds and a maximum value of not more than 1300 pounds.


(2) Test procedure. (i) The test material consists of leg assemblies (86-5001-001, revision A) left and (-002, revision A) right with upper leg assemblies (78051-46) left and (78051-47) right removed. The load cell simulator (78051-319, revision A) is used to secure the knee cap assemblies (79051-16, revision B) as shown in Figure 24.


(ii) Soak the test material in a test environment at any temperature between 66 degrees F to 78 degrees F and at a relative humidity from 10% to 70% for a period of at least four hours prior to its application in a test.


(iii) Mount the test material with the leg assembly secured through the load cell simulator to a rigid surface as shown in Figure 24. No contact is permitted between the foot and any other exterior surfaces.


(iv) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe so that at contact with the knee it is collinear within 2 degrees with the longitudinal centerline of the femur load cell simulator.


(v) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement at time zero.


(vi) Impact the knee with the test probe so that the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the instant of impact falls within .5 degrees of a horizontal line parallel to the femur load cell simulator at time zero.


(vii) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the test probe and the knee.


(c) Hip joint-femur flexion. (1) When each femur is rotated in the flexion direction in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the femur torque at 30 deg. rotation from its initial horizontal orientation will not be more than 70 ft-lbf, and at 150 ft-lbf of torque will not be less than 40 deg. or more than 50 deg.


(2) Test procedure. (i) The test material consists of the assembled dummy, part No. 78051-218 (revision S) except that (1) leg assemblies (86-5001-001 and 002) are separated from the dummy by removing the 3/8-16 Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) (78051-99) but retaining the structural assembly of the upper legs (78051-43 and -44), (2) the abdominal insert (78051-52) is removed and (3) the instrument cover plate (78051-13) in the pelvic bone is replaced by a rigid pelvic bone stabilizer insert (Figure 25a) and firmly secured.


(ii) Seat the dummy on a rigid seat fixture (Figure 25) and firmly secure it to the seat back by bolting the stabilizer insert and the rigid support device (Figure 25b) to the seat back of the test fixture (Figures 26 and 27) while maintaining the pelvis (78051-58) “B” plane horizontal.


(iii) Insert a lever arm into the femur shaft opening of the upper leg structure assembly (78051-43/44) and firmly secure it using the 3/8-16 socket head cap screws.


(iv) Lift the lever arm parallel to the midsagittal plane at a rotation rate of 5 to 10 deg. per second while maintaining the
1/2 in. shoulder bolt longitudinal centerline horizontal throughout the range of motion until the 150 ft-lbf torque level is reached. Record the torque and angle of rotation of the femur.


(v) Operating environment and temperature are the same as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section.








[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 61 FR 67955, Dec. 26, 1997; 63 FR 5748, Feb. 4, 1998]


§ 572.36 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The test probe used for thoracic impact tests is a 6 inch diameter cylinder that weighs 51.5 pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge radius of 0.5 inches. The test probe has an accelerometer mounted on the end opposite from impact with its sensitive axis colinear to the longitudinal centerline of the cylinder.


(b) Test probe used for the knee impact tests is a 3 inch diameter cylinder that weights 11 pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge radius of 0.02 inches. The test probe has an accelerometer mounted on the end opposite from impact with its sensitive axis colinear to the longitudinal centerline of the cylinder.


(c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing 78051-136, revision A, or its equivalent, and the location of their seismic mass as mounted in the skull are shown in drawing C-1709, revision D.


(d) The six axis neck transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing C-1709, revision D and be mounted for testing as shown in Figures 20 and 21 of § 572.33, and in the assembly drawing 78051-218, revision T.


(e) The chest accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing 78051-136, revision A or its equivalent and be mounted as shown with adaptor assembly 78051-116, revision D for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.


(f) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing 78051-342, revision A or its equivalent and be mounted in the chest deflection transducer assembly 78051-317, revision A for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.


(g) The thorax and knee impactor accelerometers shall have the dimensions and characteristics of Endevco Model 7231c or equivalent. Each accelerometer shall be mounted with its sensitive axis colinear with the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline.


(h) The femur load cell shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing 78051-265 or its equivalent and be mounted in assemblies 78051-46 and -47 for assembly into 78051-218, revision T.


(i) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are recorded in individual data channels that conform to requirements of Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211 Mar95, Instrumentation for Impact Tests, Parts 1 and 2. SAE J211 Mar95 sets forth the following channel classes:


(1) Head acceleration – Class 1000


(2) Neck forces – Class 1000


(3) Neck moments – Class 600


(4) Neck pendulum acceleration – Class 60


(5) Thorax and thorax pendulum acceleration – Class 180


(6) Thorax deflection – Class 180


(7) Knee pendulum acceleration – Class 600


(8) Femur force – Class 600


(j) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity conform to the sign convention shown in the document incorporated by § 572.31(a)(5).


(k) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency within range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(l) Limb joints are set at lg, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb segment shall not exceed 2g throughout the range of limb motion.


(m) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by period of not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(n) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.


[51 FR 26701, July 25, 1986, as amended at 53 FR 8765, Mar. 17, 1988; 62 FR 27518, May 20, 1997; 63 FR 45965, Aug. 28, 1998]


Subpart F – Side Impact Dummy 50th Percentile Male


Source:55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.40 Incorporated materials.

(a) The drawings, specifications, manual, and computer program referred to in this regulation that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register has approved the materials incorporated by reference. For materials subject to change, only the specific version approved by the Director of the Federal Register and specified in the regulation are incorporated. A notice of any change will be published in the Federal Register. As a convenience to the reader, the materials incorporated by reference are listed in the Finding Aids Table found at the end of this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations.


(b) The materials incorporated in this part by reference are available for examination in the general reference section of Docket 79-04, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, room 5109, 400 Seventh St., S.W., Washington, D.C., 20590, telephone (202) 366-4949. Copies may be obtained from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Rd., Suite 210, Beltsville, MD, 20705, Telephone (301) 419-5070, Fax (301) 419-5069.


[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]


§ 572.41 General description.

(a) The dummy consists of component parts and component assemblies (SA-SID-M001, revision C, dated September 12, 1996, and SA-SID-M001A, revision B, dated September 12, 1996), which are described in approximately 250 drawings and specifications that are set forth in § 572.5(a) of this chapter with the following changes and additions which are described in approximately 85 drawings and specifications (incorporated by reference; see § 572.40):


(1) The head assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart B (§ 572.6(a)) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under drawing SA 150 M010 and drawings specified in SA-SID-M010, dated August 13, 1987.


(2) The neck assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart B (§ 572.7(a)) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under drawing SA 150 M020 and drawings shown in SA-SID-M010, dated August 13, 1987.


(3) The thorax assembly consists of the assembly shown as number SID-053 and conforms to each applicable drawing subtended by number SA-SID-M030 revision A, dated May 18, 1994.


(4) The lumbar spine consists of the assembly specified in subpart B (§ 572.9(a)) and conforms to drawing SA 150 M050 and drawings subtended by SA-SID-M050 revision B, dated September 12, 1996, including the addition of Lumbar Spacers-Lower SID-SM-001 and Lumbar Spacers-Upper SID-SM-002 (both dated May 12, 1994), and Washer 78051-243.


(5) The abdomen and pelvis consist of the assembly specified in subpart B of this part (§ 572.9) and conform to the drawings subtended by SA 150 M060, the drawings subtended by SA-SID-M060 revision A, dated May 18, 1994, and the drawings subtended by SA-SID-087 sheet 1 revision H, dated May 18, 1994, and SA-SID-087 sheet 2 revision H.


(6) The lower limbs consist of the assemblies specified in subpart B (§ 572.10) shown as SA 150 M080 and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and SA-SID-M080 and SA-SID-M081, both dated August 13, 1987, and conform to the drawings subtended by those numbers.


(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to the requirements of this subpart in every respect both before and after being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard No 214 § 571.214 of this chapter.


(c) Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures; external dimensions and weight; and a dummy drawing list are set forth in the Side Impact Dummy (SID) User’s Manual, dated May 1994 except for pages 7, 20 and 23, and appendix A (consisting of replacement pages 7, 20 and 23) dated January 20, 1998 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.40).


[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994; 63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]


§ 572.42 Thorax.

(a) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see § 572.40), appropriately assembled for right or left side impact, is impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.44(a) at 14 fps in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted on the thorax in accordance with § 572.44(b) shall be:


(1) For the accelerometer at the top of the Rib Bar on the struck side (LUR or RUR) not less than 37 g’s and not more than 46 g’s.


(2) For the accelerometer at the bottom of the Rib Bar on the struck side (LLR or RLR) not less than 37 g’s and not more than 46 g’s.


(3) For the lower thoracic spine (T12) not less than 15 g’s and not more than 22 g’s.


(b) Test Procedure. (1) Adjust the dummy legs as specified in § 572.44(f). Seat the dummy on a seating surface as specified in § 572.44(h) with the limbs extended horizontally forward.


(2) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the lateral side of the chest at the intersection of the centerlines of the third rib and the Rib Bar on the desired side of impact. This is the left side if the dummy is to be used on the driver’s side of the vehicle and the right side if the dummy is to be used on the passenger side of the vehicle. The probe’s centerline is perpendicular to thorax’s midsagittal plane.


(3) Align the test probe so that its longitudinal centerline coincides with the line formed by the intersection of the transverse and frontal planes perpendicular to the chest’s midsagittal plane passing through the designated impact point.


(4) Position the dummy as specified in § 572.44(h), so that the thorax’s midsagittal plane and tangential plane to the Hinge Mounting Block (Drawing SID-034) are vertical.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of impact at the designated impact point, the probe’s longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line perpendicular to the dummy’s midsagittal plane and passing through the designated impact point.


(6) Guide the probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(7) Allow a time period of at least 20 minutes between successive tests of the chest.


[59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994]


§ 572.43 Lumbar spine and pelvis.

(a) When the pelvis of a fully assembled dummy (SA-SID-M001A revision B, dated September 12, 1996, (incorporated by reference; see § 572.40) is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to § 572.44(a) at 14 fps in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak acceleration at the location of the accelerometer mounted in the pelvis cavity in accordance with § 572.44(c) shall be not less than 40g and not more than 60g. The acceleration-time curve for the test shall be unimodal and shall lie at or above the + 20g level for an interval not less than 3 milliseconds and not more than 7 milliseconds.


(b) Test Procedure. (1) Adjust the dummy legs as specified in § 572.44(f). Seat the dummy on a seating surface as specified in § 572.44(h) with the limbs extended horizontally forward.


(2) Place the longitudinal centerline of the test probe at the lateral side of the pelvis at a point 3.9 inches vertical from the seating surface and 4.8 inches ventral to a transverse vertical plane which is tangent to the back of the dummy’s buttocks.


(3) Align the test probe so that at impact its longitudinal centerline coincides with the line formed by intersection of the horizontal and vertical planes perpendicular to the midsagittal plane passing through the designated impact point.


(4) Adjust the dummy so that its midsagittal plane is vertical and the rear surfaces of the thorax and buttocks are tangent to a transverse vertical plane.


(5) Impact the pelvis with the test probe so that at the moment of impact the probe’s longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of the line specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.


(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that it moves with no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(7) Allow a time period of at least 2 hours between successive tests of the pelvis.


[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994; 63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998]


§ 572.44 Instrumentation and test conditions.

(a) The test probe used for lateral thoracic and pelvis impact tests is a 6 inch diameter cylinder that weighs 51.5 pounds including instrumentation. Its impacting end has a flat right angle face that is rigid and has an edge radius of 0.5 inches.


(b) Three accelerometers are mounted in the thorax for measurement of lateral accelerations with each accelerometer’s sensitive axis aligned to be closely perpendicular to the thorax’s midsagittal plane. The accelerometers are mounted in the following locations:


(1) One accelerometer is mounted on the thorax to lumbar adaptor (SID-005 revision F, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see § 572.40) with seismic mass center located 0.5 inches toward the impact side, 0.1 inches upward and 1.86 inches rearward from the reference point shown in Figure 30 in appendix A to subpart F of part 572. Maximum permissible variation of the seismic location must not exceed 0.2 inches spherical radius.


(2) Two accelerometers are mounted, one on the top and the other at the bottom part of the Rib Bar (SID-024) on the struck side. Their seismic mass centers are at any distance up to .4 inches from a point on the Rib Bar surface located on its longitudinal center line .75 inches from the top for the top accelerometer and .75 inches from the bottom, for the bottom accelerometer.


(c) One accelerometer is mounted in the pelvis for measurement of the lateral acceleration with its sensitive axis perpendicular to the pelvic midsagittal plane. The accelerometer is mounted on the rear wall of the instrumentation cavity of the pelvis (SID-087 revision H, dated May 18, 1994, incorporated by reference; see § 572.40). The accelerometer’s seismic mass with respect to the mounting bolt center line is 0.9 inches up, 0.7 inches to the left for left side impact and 0.03 inches to the left for right side impact, and 0.5 inches rearward from the rear wall mounting surface as shown in Figure 31 in appendix A to subpart F of part 572. Maximum permissible variation of the seismic location must not exceed 0.2 inches spherical radius.


(d) Instrumentation and sensors used must conform to the SAE J-211 (1980) recommended practice requirements (incorporated by reference; see § 572.40). The outputs of the accelerometers installed in the dummy are then processed with the software for the Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filter (FIR 100 software). The FORTRAN program for this FIR 100 software (FIR100 Filter Program, Version 1.0, July 16, 1990) is incorporated by reference in this part (see § 572.40). The data are processed in the following manner:


(1) Analog data recorded in accordance with SAE J-211 (1980) recommended practice channel class 1000 specification.


(2) Filter the data with a 300 Hz, SAE Class 180 filter;


(3) Subsample the data to a 1600 Hz sampling rate;


(4) Remove the bias from the subsampled data, and


(5) Filter the data with the FIR100 Filter Program (Version 1.0, July 16, 1990), which has the following characteristics –


(i) Passband frequency, 100 Hz.


(ii) Stopband frequency, 189 Hz.


(iii) Stopband gain, −50 db.


(iv) Passband ripple, 0.0225 db.


(e) The mountings for the spine, rib and pelvis accelerometers shall have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(f) Limb joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1-2 g’s, which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2 g’s throughout the range of limb motion.


(g) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 °F to 78 °F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.


(h) For the performance of tests specified in §§ 572.42 and 572.43, the dummy is positioned as follows:


(1) The dummy is placed on a flat, rigid, clean, dry, horizontal smooth aluminum surface whose length and width dimensions are not less than 16 inches, so that the dummy’s midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the test surface. The dummy’s torso is positioned to meet the requirements of § 572.42 and § 572.43. The seating surface is without the back support and the test dummy is positioned so that the dummy’s midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the seat surface.


(2) The legs are positioned so that their centerlines are in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.


(3) Performance pre-tests of the assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 20 minutes unless otherwise specified.


(4) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.


[55 FR 45766, Oct. 30, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 47011, Sept. 17, 1991; 59 FR 52091, Oct. 14, 1994]


Appendix A to Subpart F of Part 572 – Figures



[59 FR 52092, Oct. 14, 1994]


Subparts G-H [Reserved]

Subpart I – 6-Year-Old Child


Source:56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.70 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in §§ 572.71(a) and 572.71(b) are hereby incorporated in subpart I by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(b) The incorporated material is available as follows:


(1) Drawing number SA 106 C001 sheets 1 through 18, and the drawings listed in the parts lists described on sheets 8 through 17, are available from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Rd., Beltsville, MD 20705, Telephone (301) 210-5600, Fax (301) 210-5607.


(2) A User’s Manual entitled, “Six-Year-Old Size Child Test Dummy SA106C,” October 28, 1991, is available from Reprographic Technologies at the address in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.


(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211, Instrumentation for Impact Test, June 1988, is available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.


[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44226, Aug. 20, 1997]


§ 572.71 General description.

(a) The representative 6-year-old dummy consists of a drawings and specifications package that contains the following materials:


(1) Technical drawings, specifications, and the parts list package shown in SA 106C 001, sheets 1 through 18, rereleased July 11, 1997;


(2) A user’s manual entitled, “Six-Year-Old Size Child Test Dummy SA106C,” October 28, 1991.


(b) The dummy is made up of the component assemblies set out in Table A:


Table A

Assembly drawing No.
Drawing title
Listed on drawing No.
Revision
SA 106C 010Head AssemblySA 106C 001, sheet 8A
SA 106C 020Neck AssemblySA 106C 001, sheet 9A
SA 106C 030Thorax AssemblySA 106C 001, sheet 10C
SA 106C 030Thorax AssemblySA 106C 001, sheet 11D
SA 106C 041Arm Assembly (right)SA 106C 001, sheet 14A
SA 106C 042Arm Assembly (left)SA 106C 001, sheet 15A
SA 106C 050Lumbar Spine AssemblySA 106C 001, sheet 12A
SA 106C 060Pelvis AssemblySA 106C 001, sheet 13A
SA 106C 071Leg Assembly (right)SA 106C 001, sheet 16A
SA 106C 072Leg Assembly (left)SA 106C 001, sheet 17A

(c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash-impact conditions.


(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after its use in any test similar to those specified in Standard 213, Child Restraint Systems.


[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44226, Aug. 20, 1997]


§ 572.72 Head assembly and test procedure.

(a) Head assembly. The head consists of the assembly designated as SA 106 010 on drawing No. SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conforms to each drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheet 8.


(b) Head assembly impact response requirements. When the head is impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.77(a)(1) at 7 feet per second (fps) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, then the resultant head acceleration measured at the location of the accelerometer installed in the headform according to § 577.77(b) is not less than 130g and not more than 160g.


(1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test is unimodal at or above the 50g level, and lies at or above that level for an interval not less than 1.0 and not more than 2.0 milliseconds.


(2) The lateral acceleration vector does not exceed 5g.


(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as follows:


(1) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface having a back support as specified in § 572.78(c), and adjust the joints of the limbs at any setting (between 1g and 2g) which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally and forward.


(2) Adjust the test probe so that its longitudinal center line is –


(i) At the forehead at the point of orthogonal intersection of the head midsagittal plane and the transverse plane which is perpendicular to the Z axis of the head as shown in Figure 40;


(ii) Located 2.7 ±0.1 inches below the top of the head measured along the Z axis, and;


(iii) Coincides within 2 degrees with the line made by the intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes passing through this point.


(3) Impact the head with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(4) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(5) Allow at least 60 minutes between successive head tests.


§ 572.73 Neck assembly and test procedure.

(a) Neck assembly. The neck consists of the assembly designated as SA 106C 020 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conforms to each drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheet 9.


(b) Neck assembly impact response requirements. When the head-neck assembly (SA 106C 010 and SA 106C 020) is tested according to the test procedure in § 572.73(c), the head:


(1) Shall rotate, while translating in the direction of the pendulum preimpact flight, in reference to the pendulum’s longitudinal center line a total of 78 degrees ±6 degrees about the head’s center of gravity; and


(2) Shall rotate to the extent specified in Table B at each indicated point in time, measured from time of impact, with the chordal displacement measured at the head’s center of gravity.


(i) Chordal displacement at time “T” is defined as the straight line distance between the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head’s center of gravity at time “zero;” and the position relative to the pendulum arm of the head’s center of gravity at time T as illustrated by Figure 3 in § 572.11.


(ii) The peak resultant acceleration recorded at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the headform according to § 572.77(b) shall not exceed 30g.


Table B

Rotation (degrees)
Time (ms) ±(2 + .08T)
Chordal displacement (inches) ±0.8
000
30262.7
60444.3
Maximum685.8
601014.4
301212.4
01400

(3) The pendulum shall not reverse direction until the head’s center of gravity returns to the original “zero” time position relative to the pendulum arm.


(c) Neck test procedure. The test procedure for the neck is as follows:


(1) Mount the head and neck assembly on a rigid pendulum as specified in § 572.21, Figure 15, so that the head’s midsagittal plane is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum’s longitudinal center line. Attach the neck directly to the pendulum as shown in § 572.21, Figure 15.


(2) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height such that the velocity at impact is 17.00 ±1.0 fps, measured at the center of the accelerometer specified in § 572.21, Figure 15.


(3) Decelerate the pendulum to a stop with an acceleration-time pulse described as follows:


(i) Establish 5g and 20g levels on the a-t curve.


(ii) Establish t1 at the point where the rising a-t curve first crosses the 5g level; t2 at the point where the rising a-t curve first crosses the 20g level; t3 at the point where the decaying a-t curve last crosses the 20g level; and t4 at the point where the decaying a-t curve first crosses the 5g level.


(iii) t2−t1 shall not be more than 3 milliseconds.


(iv) t3−t2 shall not be more than 22 milliseconds, and not less than 19 milliseconds.


(v) t4−t3 shall not be more than 6 milliseconds.


(vi) The average deceleration between t2 and t3 shall not be more than 26g, or less than 22g.


(4) Allow the neck to flex without the head or neck contacting any object other than the pendulum arm.


(5) Allow at least 60 minutes between successive tests.


[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 4086, Feb. 3, 1992]


§ 572.74 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) Thorax assembly. The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly designated as SA 106C 030 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, Revision A, and conforms to each applicable drawing on SA 106C 001 sheet 10, Revision C (including Drawing number 6C-1610-1 thru -4, Revision A, titled “Screw Button Head Socket”, dated September 30, 1996, and Drawing number 6C-1021, Revision B, titled “Ballast, 6 Yr. Thoraxc (for 7267A)”, dated September 24, 1996), and sheet 11, Revision D (including Drawing number SA 6C-909, Revision A, titled “Cover-chest Accelerometer”, dated September 21, 1996, and Drawing number 6C-1000-1, Revision C, titled “Sternum Thoracic Weld Ass’y.”, dated September 24, 1996).


(b) Thorax assembly requirements. When the thorax is impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.77(a) to 20 ±0.3 fps according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at the accelerometers mounted in the chest cavity according to § 572.77(c) shall not be less than 43g and not more than 53g.


(1) The recorded acceleration-time curve for this test shall be unimodal at or above the 30g level, and shall lie at or above that level for an interval not less than 4 milliseconds and not more than 6 milliseconds.


(2) The lateral accelerations shall not exceed 5g.


(c) Thorax test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax is as follows:


(1) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back support as specified in § 572.78(c), and adjust the joints of the limbs at any setting (between 1g and 2g) which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane.


(2) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that the impact point is 2.25 inches below the longitudinal center of the clavicle retainer screw, and adjust the dummy so that the plane that bisects the No. 3 rib into upper and lower halves is horizontal ±1 degree.


(3) Place the longitudinal center line of the test probe so that it coincides with the designated impact point, and align the test probe so that at impact, the probe’s longitudinal center line coincides (within 2 degrees) with the line formed at the intersection of the horizontal and midsagittal planes and passing through the designated impact point.


(4) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(6) Allow at least 30 minutes between successive tests.


[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 60 FR 2897, Jan. 12, 1995, 62 FR 44227, Aug. 20, 1997]


§ 572.75 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly and test procedure.

(a) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly. The lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis consist of the part of the torso assembly designated as SA 106C 50 and 60 on drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conform to each applicable drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheets 12 and 13.


(b) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis assembly response requirements. When the lumbar spine is subjected to a force continuously applied according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall –


(1) Flex by an amount that permits the rigid thoracic spine to rotate from the torso’s initial position, as defined in (c)(3), by 40 degrees at a force level of not less that 46 pounds and not more than 52 pounds, and


(2) Straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of its initial position when the force is removed.


(c) Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis test procedure. The test procedure for the lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis is as follows:


(1) Remove the dummy’s head-neck assembly, arms, and lower legs, clean and dry all component surfaces, and seat the dummy upright on a seat as specified in Figure 42.


(2) Adjust the dummy by –


(i) Tightening the femur ballflange screws at each hip socket joint to 50 inch-pounds torque;


(ii) Attaching the pelvis to the seating surface by a bolt D/605 as shown in Figure 42.


(iii) Attaching the upper legs at the knee joints by the attachments shown in drawing Figure 42.


(iv) Tightening the mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal; and


(v) Removing the head and neck, and installing a cylindrical aluminum adapter (neck adapter) of 2.0 inches diameter and 2.60 inches length as shown in Figure 42.


(3) The initial position of the dummy’s torso is defined by the plane formed by the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks which is three to seven degrees forward of the transverse vertical plane.


(4) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as necessary to return the dummy to its initial torso position, unsupported by external means.


(5) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top of the neck adapter so that when the lumbar spine flexion is 40 degrees, the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box.


(i) Apply the force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second, up to 40 degrees of flexion.


(ii) For 10 seconds, continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 40 degrees of flexion, and record the highest applied force during the 10 second period.


(iii) Release all force as rapidly as possible, and measure the return angle 3 minutes after the release.


§ 572.76 Limbs assembly and test procedure.

(a) Limbs assembly. The limbs consist of the assemblies designated as SA 106C 041, SA 106C 042, SA 106C 071, and SA 106C 072, on drawing No. SA 106C 001, sheet 2, and conform to each applicable drawing listed on SA 106C 001, sheets 14 through 17.


(b) Limbs assembly impact response requirement. When each knee is impacted at 7.0 ±0.1 fps, according to paragraph (c) of this section, the maximum force on the femur shall not be more than 1060 pounds and not less than 780 pounds, with a duration above 400 pounds of not less than 0.8 milliseconds.


(c) Limbs test procedure. The test procedure for the limbs is as follows:


(1) Seat and orient the dummy without back support on a seating surface that is 11 ±0.2 inches above a horizontal (floor) surface as specified in § 572.78(c).


(i) Orient the dummy as specified in Figure 43 with the hip joint adjustment at any setting between 1g and 2g.


(ii) Place the dummy legs in a plane parallel to the dummy’s midsagittal plane with the knee pivot center line perpendicular to the dummy’s midsagittal plane, and with the feet flat on the horizontal (floor) surface.


(iii) Adjust the feet and lower legs until the line between the midpoint of each knee pivot and each ankle pivot is within 2 degrees of the vertical.


(2) If necessary, reposition the dummy so that at the level one inch below the seating surface, the rearmost point of the dummy’s lower legs remains not less than 3 inches and not more than 6 inches forward of the forward edge of the seat.


(3) Align the test probe specified in § 572.77(a) with the longitudinal center line of the femur force gauge, so that at impact, the probe’s longitudinal center line coincides with the sensor’s longitudinal center line within ±2 degrees.


(4) Impact the knee with the test probe moving horizontally and parallel to the midsagittal plane at the specified velocity.


(5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


§ 572.77 Instrumentation.

(a)(1) Test probe. For the head, thorax, and knee impact test, use a test probe that is rigid, of uniform density and weighs 10 pounds and 6 ounces, with a diameter of 3 inches; a length of 13.8 inches; and an impacting end that has a rigid flat right face and edge radius of 0.5 inches.


(2) The head and thorax assembly may be instrumented either with a Type A or Type B accelerometer.


(i) Type A accelerometer is defined in drawing SA 572 S1.


(ii) Type B accelerometer is defined in drawing SA 572 S2.


(b) Head accelerometers. (1) Install accelerometers in the head as shown in drawing SA 106C 001 sheet 1 using suitable spacers or adaptors as needed to affix them to the horizontal transverse bulkhead so that the sensitive axes of the three accelerometers intersect at the point in the midsagittal plane located 0.4 inches below the intersection of a line connecting the longitudinal center lines of the roll pins in either side of the dummy’s head with the head’s midsagittal plane.


(2) The head has three orthogonally mounted accelerometers aligned as follows:


(i) Align one accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is perpendicular to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane.


(ii) Align the second accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is parallel to the horizontal bulkhead, and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane.


(iii) Align the third accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is parallel to the horizontal bulkhead in the midsagittal plane.


(iv) The seismic mass center for any of these accelerometers may be at any distance up to 0.4 inches from the axial intersection point.


(c) Thoracic accelerometers. (1) Install accelerometers in the thoracic assembly as shown in drawing SA 106C 001, sheet 1, using suitable spacers and adaptors to affix them to the frontal surface of the spine assembly so that the sensitive axes of the three accelerometers intersect at a point in the midsagittal plane located 0.95 inches posterior of the spine mounting surface, and 0.55 inches below the horizontal centerline of the two upper accelerometer mount attachment hole centers.


(2) The sternum-thoracic assembly has three orthogonally mounted accelerometers aligned as follows:


(i) Align one accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is parallel to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane.


(ii) Align the second accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is parallel to the attachment surface, and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane.


(iii) Align the third accelerometer so that its sensitive axis is perpendicular to the attachment surface in the midsagittal plane.


(iv) The seismic mass center for any of these accelerometers may be at any distance up to 0.4 inches of the axial intersection point.


(d) Femur-sensing device. Install a force-sensing device SA 572-S10 axially in each femur shaft as shown in drawing SA 106C 072 and secure it to the femur assembly so that the distance measured between the center lines of two attachment bolts is 3.00 inches.


(e) Limb joints. Set the limb joints at lg, barely restraining the limb’s weight when the limb is extended horizontally, and ensure that the force required to move the limb segment does not exceed 2g throughout the limb’s range of motion.


(f) Recording outputs. Record the outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified in this part, in individual channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211, October 1988, with channel classes as set out in the following table C.


Table C

Device
Channel
Head accelerationClass 1000
Pendulum accelerationClass 60
Thorax accelerationClass 180
Femur-forceClass 600

The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


§ 572.78 Performance test conditions.

(a) Conduct performance tests at any temperature from 66 °F to 78 °F, and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent, but only after having first exposed the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.


(b) For the performance tests specified in § 572.72 (head), § 572.74 (thorax), § 572.75 (lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis), and § 572.76 (limbs), position the dummy as set out in paragraph (c) of this section.


(c) Place the dummy on a horizontal seating surface covered by teflon sheeting so that the dummy’s midsagittal plane is vertical and centered on the test surface.


(1) The seating surface is flat, rigid, clean, and dry, with a smoothness not exceeding 40 microinches, a length of at least 16 inches, and a width of at least 16 inches.


(2) For head impact tests, the seating surface has a vertical back support whose top is 12.4 ±0.2 inches above the horizontal surface, and the rear surfaces of the dummy’s back and buttocks touch the back support as shown in Figure 40.


(3) For the thorax, lumbar spine, and knee tests, the horizontal surface is without a back support as shown in Figure 41 (for the thorax); Figure 42 (for the lumbar spine); and Figure 43 (for the knee).


(4) Position the dummy’s arms and legs so that their center lines are in planes parallel to the midsagittal plane.


(5) Adjust each shoulder yoke so that with its upper surface horizontal, a yoke is at the midpoint of its anterior-posterior travel.


(6) Adjust the dummy for head and knee impact tests so that the rear surfaces of the shoulders and buttocks are tangent to a transverse vertical plane.


(d) The dummy’s dimensions are specified in drawings SA 106C 001, sheet 3, Revision A, July 11, 1997, and sheets 4 through 6.


(e) Unless otherwise specified in this regulation, performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 20 minutes.


(f) Unless otherwise specified in this regulation, the surfaces of the dummy components are not painted.


[56 FR 57836, Nov. 14, 1991, as amended at 62 FR 44227, Aug. 20, 1997]


Figures to Subpart I of Part 572



[60 FR 2898, Jan. 12, 1995]




Subpart J – 9-Month Old Child


Source:56 FR 41080, Aug. 19, 1991, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.80 Incorporated materials.

The drawings and specifications referred to in § 572.81(a) that are not set forth in full are hereby incorporated in this part by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be obtained from Rowley-Scher Reprographics, Inc., 1216 K Street, NW., Washington, DC 20002, telephone (202) 628-6667. Copies are available for inspection in the general reference section of Docket 89-11, Docket Section, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, room 5109, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


§ 572.81 General description.

(a) The dummy consists of: (1) The assembly specified in drawing LP 1049/A, March 1979, which is described in its entirety by means of approximately 54 separate drawings and specifications, 1049/1 through 1049/54; and (2) a parts list LP 1049/0 (5 sheets); and (3) a report entitled, “The TNO P3/4 Child Dummy Users Manual,” January 1979, published by Instituut voor Wegtransportmiddelen TNO.


(b) Adjacent dummy segments are joined in a manner such that throughout the range of motion and also under simulated crash-impact conditions there is no contact between metallic elements except for contacts that exist under static conditions.


(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in dynamic tests such as that specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (§ 571.213).


§ 572.82 Head.

The head consists of the assembly shown in drawing LP 1049/A and conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed under LP 1049/0 through 54.


§ 572.83 Head-neck.

The head-neck assembly shown in drawing 1049/A consists of parts specified as items 1 through 16 and in item 56.


§ 572.84 Thorax.

The thorax consists of the part of the torso shown in assembly drawing LP 1049/A and conforms to each of the applicable drawings listed under LP 1049/0 through 54.


§ 572.85 Lumbar spine flexure.

(a) When subjected to continuously applied force in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the lumbar spine assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the thoracic spine to rotate from its initial position in accordance with Figure No. 18 of § 572.21 (49 CFR part 572) by 40 degrees at a force level of not less than 18 pounds and not more than 22 pounds, and straighten upon removal of the force to within 5 degrees of its initial position.


(b) Test procedure. (1) The lumbar spine flexure test is conducted on a dummy assembly as shown in drawing LP 1049/A, but with the arms (which consist of parts identified as items 17 through 30) and all head-neck parts (identified as items 1 through 13 and 59 through 63), removed.


(2) With the torso assembled in an upright position, adjust the lumbar cable by tightening the adjustment nut for the lumbar vertebrae until the spring is compressed to
2/3 of its unloaded length.


(3) Position the dummy in an upright seated position on a seat as indicated in Figure No. 18 of § 572.21 (lower legs do not need to be removed, but must be clamped firmly to the seating surface), ensuring that all dummy component surfaces are clean, dry and untreated unless otherwise specified.


(4) Firmly affix the dummy to the seating surface through the pelvis at the hip joints by suitable clamps that also prevent any relative motion with respect to the upper legs during the test in § 572.65(c)(3) of this part. Install a pull attachment at the neck to torso juncture as shown in Figure 18 of § 572.21.


(5) Flex the thorax forward 50 degrees and then rearward as necessary to return it to its initial position.


(6) Apply a forward pull force in the midsagittal plane at the top of the neck adapter so that at 40 degrees of the lumbar spine flexion the applied force is perpendicular to the thoracic spine box. Apply the force at any torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second up to 40 degrees of flexion but no further; maintain 40 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during that time. Release all force as rapidly as possible and measure the return angle three minutes after release.


§ 572.86 Test conditions and dummy adjustment.

(a) With the complete torso on its back lying on a horizontal surface and the neck assembly mounted and shoulders on the edge of the surface, adjust the neck such that the head bolt is lowered 0.40 ±0.05 inches (10 ±1 mm) after a vertically applied load of 11.25 pounds (50 N) applied to the head bolt is released.


(b) With the complete torso on its back with the adjusted neck assembly as specified in § 572.66(a), and lying on a horizontal surface with the shoulders on the edge of the surface, mount the head and tighten the head bolt and nut firmly, with the head in horizontal position. Adjust the head joint at the force between 1-2g, which just supports the head’s weight.


(c) Using the procedures described below, limb joints are set at the force between 1-2g, which just supports the limbs’ weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward:


(1) With the complete torso lying with its front down on a horizontal surface, with the hip joint just over the edge of the surface, mount the upper leg and tighten hip joint nut firmly. Adjust the hip joint by releasing the hip joint nut until the upper leg just starts moving.


(2) With the complete torso and upper leg lying with its front up on a horizontal surface, with the knee joint just over the edge of the surface, mount the lower leg and tighten knee joint firmly. Adjust the knee joint by releasing the knee joint nut until the lower leg just starts moving.


(3) With the torso in an upright position, mount the upper arm and tighten firmly the adjustment bolts for the shoulder joint with the upper arm placed in a horizontal position. Adjust the shoulder joint by releasing the shoulder joint nut until the upper arm just starts moving.


(4) With the complete torso in an upright position and upper arm in a vertical position, mount the forearm in a horizontal position and tighten the elbow hinge bolt and nut firmly. Adjust the elbow joint nut until the forearm just starts moving.


(d) With the torso assembled in an upright position, the adjustment nut for the lumbar vertebrae is tightened until the spring is compressed to
2/3 of its unloaded length.


(e) Performance tests are conducted at any temperature from 66 to 78 degrees F and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of the dummy to these conditions for a period of not less than four hours.


(f) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by a period of not less than 20 minutes unless otherwise specified.


(g) Surfaces of the dummy components are not painted except as specified in the part or in drawings incorporated by this part.


Subpart K – Newborn Infant


Source:58 FR 3232, Jan. 8, 1993, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.90 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in § 572.91(a) are hereby incorporated in subpart K by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register approved that materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(b) The incorporated material is available as follows:


(1) Drawing numbers 126-0000 through 126-0015 (sheets 1 through 3), 126-0017 through 126-0027, and a parts list entitled “Parts List for CAMI Newborn Dummy,” are available from Reprographic Technologies, 1111 14th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20005. (202) 628-6667.


(2) A construction manual entitled, “Construction of the Newborn Infant Dummy” (July 1992) is available from Reprographic Technologies at the address in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.


§ 572.91 General description.

(a) The representative newborn infant dummy consists of a drawings and specifications package that contains the following materials:


(1) Drawing numbers 126-0000 through 126-0015 (sheets 1 through 3), 126-0017 through 126-0027, and a parts list entitled “Parts List for CAMI Newborn Dummy”; and,


(2) A construction manual entitled, “Construction of the Newborn Infant Dummy” (July 1992).


(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in dynamic tests specified in Standard No. 213 of this chapter (§ 571.213).


Subpart L – Free Motion Headform


Source:60 FR 43058, Aug. 18, 1995, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.100 Incorporation by Reference.

(a) The drawings and specifications referred to in § 572.101 are hereby incorporated in subpart L by reference. These materials are thereby made part of this regulation. The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street, S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(b) The incorporated material is available as follows:


(1) Drawing number 92041-001, “Head Form Assembly,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-002, “Skull Assembly,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-003, “Skull Cap Plate Assembly,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-004, “Skull Cap Plate,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-005, “Threaded Pin,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-006, “Hex Nut,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-008, “Head Skin without Nose,” (November 30, 1992, as amended March 6, 1995); drawing number 92041-009, “Six-Axis Load Cell Simulator Assembly,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-011, “Head Ballast Weight,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 92041-018, “Head Form Bill of Materials,” (November 30, 1992); drawing number 78051-148, “Skull-Head (cast) Hybrid III,” (May 20, 1978, as amended August 17, 1978); drawing number 78051-228/78051-229, “Skin- Hybrid III,” (May 20, 1978, as amended through September 24, 1979); drawing number 78051-339, “Pivot Pin-Neck Transducer,” (May 20, 1978, as amended May 14, 1986); drawing number 78051-372, “Vinyl Skin Formulation Hybrid III,” (May 20, 1978); and drawing number C-1797, “Neck Blank, (August 1, 1989); drawing number SA572-S4, “Accelerometer Specification,” (November 30, 1992), are available from Reprographic Technologies, 1111 14th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005.


(2) A user’s manual entitled “Free-Motion Headform User’s Manual,” version 2, March 1995, is available from NHTSA’s Docket Section at the address in paragraph (a) of this section.


(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests,” Class 1000, is available from The Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.


§ 572.101 General description.

(a) The free motion headform consists of the component assembly which is shown in drawings 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-002 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-003 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-004 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-005 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-006 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-008 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-009 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 92041-011 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 78051-148 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 78051-228/78051-229 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 78051-339 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), 78051-372 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), C-1797 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100), and SA572-S4 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100).


(b) Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures, and sign convention for the signal outputs of the free motion headform accelerometers, are set forth in the Free-Motion Headform User’s Manual (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100).


(c) The structural properties of the headform are such that it conforms to this part in every respect both before and after being used in the test specified in Standard No. 201 of this chapter (§ 571.201).


(d) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the headform are recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests,” Class 1000 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100).


§ 572.102 Drop test.

(a) When the headform is dropped from a height of 14.8 inches in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, the peak resultant accelerations at the location of the accelerometers mounted in the headform as shown in drawing 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100) shall not be less than 225g, and not more than 275g. The acceleration/time curve for the test shall be unimodal to the extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse are less than ten percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The lateral acceleration vector shall not exceed 15g (zero to peak).


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the headform in a test environment at any temperature between 19 degrees C. to 26 degrees C. and at a relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent for a period of at least four hours prior to its use in a test.


(2) Clean the headform’s skin surface and the surface of the impact plate with 1,1,1 Trichloroethane or equivalent.


(3) Suspend the headform, as shown in Figure 50. Position the forehead below the chin such that the skull cap plate is at an angle of 28.5 ±0.5 degrees with the impact surface when the midsagittal plane is vertical.


(4) Drop the headform from the specified height by means that ensure instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, which is 2 inches thick and 2 feet square. The plate shall have a clean, dry surface and any microfinish of not less than 8 microinches 203.2 × 10−6 mm (rms) and not more than 80 microinches 2032 × 10−6 mm (rms).


(5) Allow at least 3 hours between successive tests on the same headform.


§ 572.103 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) Headform accelerometers shall have dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100) and be mounted in the headform as shown in drawing 92041-001 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100).


(b) The outputs of accelerometers installed in the headform are recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211, OCT 1988, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests,” Class 1000 (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100).


(c) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity conform to the sign convention shown in the Free-Motion Headform User’s Manual (incorporated by reference; see § 572.100).


(d) The mountings for accelerometers shall have no resonant frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.



[60 FR 43060, Aug. 18, 1995]


Subpart M – Side Impact Hybrid Dummy 50th Percentile Male


Source:63 FR 41470, Aug. 4, 1998, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.110 Materials incorporated by reference.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated by reference in Subpart M:


(1) The Anthropomorphic Test Dummy Parts List, SID/Hybrid III part 572, subpart M, dated May 10, 1997.


(2) The SID/Hybrid III Part 572 Subpart M User’s Manual, dated May 1997.


(3) Drawing number 96-SIDH3-001, titled, “Head-Neck Bracket,” dated August 30, 1996.


(4) Drawing number 96-SIDH3-006, titled, “Upper and Middle Shoulder Foam,” dated May 10, 1997.


(5) Drawing number SA-SIDH3-M001, titled, “Complete Assembly SIDH3,” dated April 19, 1997.


(6) Drawing number 78051-61X, Revision C, titled “Head Assembly – complete,” dated March 28, 1997


(7) Drawing number 78051-90, Revision A, titled “Neck Assembly – complete,” dated May 20, 1978.


(8) Dummy assembly drawing number SA-SID-M030, Revision A, titled “Thorax Assembly – complete,” dated May 18, 1994.


(9) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M050, revision A, titled “Lumbar Spine Assembly,” dated May 18, 1994.


(10) Dummy assembly drawing SA-150 M060, revision A, titled “Pelvis and Abdomen Assembly,” dated May 18, 1994.


(11) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-053, revision A, titled “Lumbar Spine Assembly,” dated May 18, 1994.


(12) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M080, titled “Leg Assembly, Right,” dated August 13, 1987.


(13) Dummy assembly drawing SA-SID-M081, titled “Leg Assembly, Left,” dated August 13, 1987.


(14) Drawing number 78051-383X, Revision P, titled “Neck Transducer Structural Replacement,” dated November 1, 1995.


(15) The Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J1733 Information Report, titled “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,” dated December 1994.


(16) SAE Recommended Practice J211, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests,” Parts 1 and 2, dated March 1995.


(b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(2) The parts lists, user’s manual and drawings referred to in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(14) of this section are available from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 20705 (301) 419-5070.


(3) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(15) and (a)(16) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.


§ 572.111 General description.

(a) The dummy consists of component parts and component assemblies defined in drawing SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19, 1997, which are described in approximately 200 drawings and specifications that are set forth in §§ 572.32, 572.33 and 572.41(a)(3),(4),(5) and (6) of this part, and in the drawing of the Adaptor Bracket 96-SIDH3-001.


(1) The head assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart E (§ 572.32) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under drawing 78051-61X rev. C.


(2) The neck assembly consists of the assembly specified in subpart E (§ 572.33) and conforms to each of the drawings subtended under drawing 78051-90 rev. A.


(3) The thorax assembly consists of the assembly shown as number SID 053 and conforms to each applicable drawing subtended by number SA-SID M030 rev. A.


(4) The lumbar spine consists of the assembly specified in subpart B (§ 572.9(a)) and conforms to drawing SA 150 M050 and drawings subtended by SA-SID M050 rev. A.


(5) The abdomen and pelvis consist of the assembly and conform to the drawings subtended by SA 150 M060, the drawings subtended by SA 150 M060 rev. A and the drawings subtended by SA-SID-087 sheet 1 rev. H, and SA-SID-87 sheet 2 rev. H.


(6) The lower limbs consist of the assemblies specified in Subpart B (§ 572.10) shown as SA 150 M080 and SA 150 M081 in Figure 1 and SA-SID-M080 and SA-SID-M081 and conform to the drawings subtended by those numbers.


(7) The neck mounting adaptor bracket conforms to drawing 96-SIDH3-001.


(8) Upper and middle shoulder foams conform to drawing 96-SIDH3-006.


(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to the specifications of this subpart in every respect before being used in vehicle tests specified in Standard 201.


(c) Disassembly, inspection and assembly procedures, external dimensions, weight and drawing list are set forth in the SIDH3 User’s Manual, dated May 1997.


(d) Sign convention for signal outputs is given in the reference document SAE J1733 of 1994-12, “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing.”


§ 572.112 Head assembly.

The head assembly consists of the head (drawing 78051-61X, rev. C) with the neck transducer structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X, rev. P) and three (3) accelerometers that are mounted in conformance to § 572.36 (c).


(a) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head assembly in a test environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 degrees C. (66 to 78 degrees F.) and at a relative humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent for a period of at least four (4) hours prior to its application in a test.


(2) Clean the impact surface of the head skin and impact plate surface, described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, with 1,1,1 trichloroethane or equivalent prior to the test.


(3) Suspend the head, as shown in Figure 51, so that the midsagittal plane makes an angle of 35 ±1 degrees with the impact surface and its anterior-posterior axis is horizontal ±1 degree.


(4) Drop the head from a height of 200 ±0.25 mm (7.87 ±0.01 inches), measured from the lowest point on the head, by a means that ensures a smooth, clean release into a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate, which is 51 ±2 mm (2.0 ±0.01 in.) thick and 610 ±10 mm (24.0 ±0.4 in) square. The plate shall have a dry surface and shall have a microfinish of 0.2 microns (8 microinches) to 2.0 microns (80 microinches).


(5) Allow at least two (2) hours between successive tests on the same head.


(b) Performance criteria. (1) When the head assembly is dropped in accordance with § 572.112(a), the measured peak resultant acceleration shall be between 120 and 150 G’s.


(2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse shall not exceed 15 percent (zero to peak) of the main pulse. The longitudinal acceleration vector shall not exceed 15 G’s.



§ 572.113 Neck assembly.

The head/neck assembly consists of the parts 78051-61X, rev. C; -84; -90, rev. A; -94; -98; -104, revision F; -303, rev. E; – 305; -306; -307, rev. X and has a six axis neck transducer (drawing C-1709, revision D) installed in conformance with § 572.36(d).


(a) Test procedure. (1) Soak the head and neck assembly in a test environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and at any relative humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent for a period of at least four (4) hours prior to its application in a test.


(2) Torque the jamnut (78051-64) on the neck cable (78051-301, rev. E) to 1.35 ±0.27 Nm (1.0 ±0.2 ft-lb) before each test.


(3) Using neck brackets 78051-303 and -307, mount the head/neck assembly to the part 572 pendulum test fixture (see § 572.33, Figure 22,) so that the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline (see § 572.33, Figure 20, except that the direction of the head/neck assembly is rotated around the superior-inferior axis by an angle of 90 degrees). Install suitable transducers or other devices necessary for measuring the “D” plane (horizontal surface at the base of the skull) rotation with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline. The rotation can be measured by placing a transducer at the occipital condyles and another at the intersection of the centerline of the neck and the line extending from the base of the neck as shown in figure 52.


(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height to achieve an impact velocity of 6.89 to 7.13 m/s (22.6 to 23.4 ft/sec) measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer.


(5) Allow the neck to flex without the head or neck contacting any object during the test.


(6) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the striker plate and the pendulum deceleration medium.


(7) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between successive tests on the same neck assembly.


(b) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as obtained by integrating the pendulum acceleration output.


Time (ms)
Pendulum Delta-V (m/s)
101.96 to 2.55.
204.12 to 5.10.
305.73 to 7.01.
40 to 706.27 to 7.64.

(2) The maximum rotation of the midsagittal plane of the head shall be 66 to 82 degrees with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline. The decaying head rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle between 58 to 67 ms after reaching its peak value.


(3) The moment about the x-axis which coincides with the midsagittal plane of the head at the level of the occipital condyles shall have a maximum value between 73 and 88 Nm. The decaying moment vs. time curve shall first cross zero moment between 49 and 64 ms after reaching its peak value. The following formula is to be used to calculate the moment about the occipital condyles when using the six-axis neck transducer:


M = Mx + 0.01778 Fy


Where Mx and Fy are the moment and force measured by the transducer and expressed in terms of Nm and N, respectively.

(4) The maximum rotation of the head with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline shall occur between 2 and 16 ms after peak moment.


[63 FR 41470, Aug. 4, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 51882, Oct. 11, 2001]


§ 572.114 Thorax.

The specifications and test procedure for the thorax for the SID/HIII dummy are identical to those applicable to the SID dummy as set forth in § 572.42 except that the reference to the SID device found in § 572.42(a), (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994) does not apply and the reference to the SID/HIII (SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19, 1997) is applied in its place.



§ 572.115 Lumbar spine and pelvis.

The specifications and test procedure for the lumbar spine and pelvis are identical to those for the SID dummy as set forth in § 572.42 except that the reference to the SID device found in § 572.42(a), (SA-SID-M001A revision A, dated May 18, 1994) does not apply and the reference to the SID/HIII (SA-SIDH3-M001, dated April 19, 1997) is applied in its place.


§ 572.116 Instrumentation and test conditions.

(a) The test probe for lateral thoracic and pelvis impact tests are the same as those specified in § 572.44(a).


(b) Accelerometer mounting in the thorax is the same as specified in § 572.44(b).


(c) Accelerometer mounting in the pelvis is the same as specified in § 572.44(c).


(d) Head accelerometer mounting is the same as specified in § 572.36(c).


(e) Neck transducer mounting is the same as specified in § 572.36(d).


(f) Instrumentation and sensors used must conform to SAE Recommended Practice J211, March 1995, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests.”


(g) The mountings for the spine, rib and pelvis accelerometers shall have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(h) Limb joints of the test dummy shall be set at the force between 1 to 2 g’s, which just supports the limb’s weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2 g’s throughout the range of the limb motion.


(i) Performance tests must be conducted at a temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and at a relative humidity between 10 percent and 70 percent after exposure of the dummy to those conditions for a period of at least four (4) hours.


(j) For the performance of tests specified in § 572.114 and § 572.115, the dummy is positioned the same as specified in § 572.44(h).


Subpart N – Six-year-old Child Test Dummy, Beta Version


Source:65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.120 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this subpart by reference:


(1) A drawings and inspection package entitled, “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart N, Hybrid III Six-Year Old Child Crash Test Dummy (H-III6C, Beta Version), June 2009,” consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 127-1000, 6-year H3 Head Complete, incorporated by reference in § 572.122,


(ii) Drawing No. 127-1015, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference in § 572.123,


(iii) Drawing No. 127-2000, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in § 572.124,


(iv) Drawing No. 127-3000, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in § 572.125,


(v) Drawing No. 127-4000-1 and 4000-2, Leg Assembly, incorporated by reference in § 572.126,


(vi) Drawing No. 127-5000-1 and 5000-2, Arm Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.121, 572.124, and 572.125 as part of a complete dummy assembly, and,


(vii) Parts List and Drawings, Hybrid III Six-year-old Child Test Dummy (H-III6C, Beta Version), dated June 1, 2009, incorporated by reference in § 572.121;


(2) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 6-year-old Child Crash Test Dummy (H-III6C), Beta Version, June 1, 2009,” incorporated by reference in § 572.121;


(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211-1995, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Parts 1 and 2, dated March, 1995,” incorporated by reference in § 572.127;


(4) SAE J1733 Information Report, titled “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,” dated December 1994, incorporated by reference in § 572.127.


(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to: http://www.regulations.gov.


(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The drawings and specifications package, the parts list, and the PADI document referred to in paragraphs (a)(1), and (a)(2) of this section, are available in electronic format through www.Regulations.gov and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.


(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.


[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47327, July 18, 2002; 75 FR 76645, Dec. 9, 2010]


§ 572.121 General description.

(a) The Hybrid III type 6-year-old dummy is defined by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:


(1) Technical drawings and specifications package P/N 127-0000, the titles of which are listed in Table A;


(2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 6-year-old child crash test dummy (H-III6C), Beta version, dated June 1, 2009, incorporated by reference in § 572.120.


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing number
Head assembly127-1000
Neck assembly127-1015
Upper torso assembly127-2000
Lower torso assembly127-3000
Leg assembly127-4000
Arm assembly127-5000

(b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash impact conditions.


(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy must conform to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar to those specified in Standard 208, “Occupant Crash Protection”, and Standard 213, “Child Restraint Systems”.


[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 75 FR 76645, Dec. 9, 2010]


§ 572.122 Head assembly and test procedure.

(a) The head assembly for this test consists of the complete head (drawing 127-1000), a six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) or its structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X), a head to neck-to-pivot pin (drawing 78051-339), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).


(b) When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is dropped from a height of 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG may not be less than 245 G or more than 300 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 g’s (zero to peak).


(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as follows:


(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.


(3) Suspend the head assembly as shown in Figure N1. The lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) from the impact surface and the head must be oriented to an incline of 62 ±1 deg. between the “D” plane as shown in Figure N1 and the plane of the impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on either side of the dummy’s head shall be used to ensure that the head is level with respect to the impact surface.


(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish of not less than 203.2. × 10−6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not more than 2032.0 × 10−6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).


(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same head.


§ 572.123 Neck assembly and test procedure.

(a) The neck assembly for the purposes of this test consists of the assembly of components shown in drawing 127-1015.


(b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 127-1000), neck (drawing 127-1015), pivot pin (drawing 78051-339), bib simulator (drawing TE127-1025, neck bracket assembly (drawing 127-8221), six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), neck mounting adaptor (drawing TE-2208-001), and three accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4) installed in the head assembly as specified in § 572.122, is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure N2, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 74 degrees and 92 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyles shall be not less than 27 N-m (19.9 ft-lbf) and not more than 33 N-m (24.3 ft-lbf).


(ii) The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 5 N-m (3.7 ft-lbf) between 103 ms and 123 ms.


(iii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My−(0.01778m) × (FX).


(iv) My is the moment about the y-axis and FX is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) and 0.01778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.


(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure N3, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 85 degrees and 103 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyles shall be not more than −19 N-m (−14 ft-lbf) and not less than −24 N-m (−17.7ft-lbf).


(ii) The negative moment shall decay for the first time to −5 N-m (−3.7 ft-lbf) between 123 ms and 147 ms.


(iii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My−(0.01778m) × (FX).


(iv) My is the moment about the y-axis and FX is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) and 0.017778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.


(3) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9000341) on the neck cable (drawing 127-1016) to 0.23 ±0.02 N-m (2.0 ±0.2 in-lbs).


(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as shown in Figure N2 for flexion tests and Figure N3 for extension tests.


(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height to achieve an impact velocity of 4.95 ±0.12 m/s (16.2 ±0.4 ft/s) for flexion tests and 4.3 ±0.12 m/s (14.10 ±0.40 ft/s) for extension tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 at the instant of contact with the honey comb.


(i) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels should be at the zero level at this time.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve:


Table B

Time
Pendulum pulse
ms
Flexion
Extension
m/s
ft/s
m/s
ft/s
101.2-1.63.9-5.31.0-1.43.3-4.6
202.4-3.47.9-11.22.2-3.07.2-9.8
303.8-5.012.5-16.43.2-4.210.5-13.8

§ 572.124 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly. The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 127-2000.


(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 127-0000) is impacted by a test probe conforming to section 572.127(a) at 6.71 ±0.12 m/s (22.0 ±0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) The maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-S50), must be not less than 38.0 mm (1.50 in) and not more than 46.0 mm (1.80 in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the probe in accordance with section 572.127, shall not be less than 1150 N (259 lbf) and not more than 1380 N (310 lbf). The peak force after 12.5 mm (0.5 in) of sternum displacement but before reaching the minimum required 38.0 mm (1.5 in) sternum displacement limit shall not exceed 1500 N (337.2 lbf).


(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be not less than 65 percent but not more than 85 percent.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6° and 22.2 °C (69° and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Seat and orient the dummy, wearing tight-fitting underwear or equivalent consisting of a size 5 short-sleeved shirt having a weight less than 0.090 kg (0.2 lb) and an opening at the top just large enough to permit the passage of the head with a tight fit, and a size 4 pair of long pants having a weight of less than 0.090 kg (0.2 lb) with the legs cut off sufficiently above the knee to allow the knee target to be visible, on a seating surface without back support as shown in Figure N4, with the limbs extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane vertical within ±1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior and lateral directions within ±0.5 degrees.


(3) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within ±2.5 mm (0.1 in) and is 12.7 ±1.1 mm (0.5 ±0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(4) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(5) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47327, July 18, 2002]


§ 572.125 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test procedure.

(a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (drawing 127-3002), including cable (drawing 127-8095), mounting plate insert (drawing 910420-048), nylon shoulder bushing (drawing 9001373), nut (drawing 9001336), and abdominal insert (drawing 127-8210), on resistance to articulation between upper torso assembly (drawing 127-2000) and lower torso assembly (drawing 127-3000).


(b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure N5 according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular motion until the machined rear surface of the instrument cavity at the back of the thoracic spine box is at 45 ±0.5 degrees relative to the vertical transverse plane, at which time the force applied as shown in Figure N5 must be not less than 147 N (33 lbf) and not more than 200 N (45 lbf), and


(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to within 8 degrees of its initial position.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the torso assemblies is as follows:


(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Attach the dummy (with or without the legs below the femurs) to the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure N5.


(3) Secure the pelvis at the pelvis instrument cavity rear face by threading four
1/4 in cap screws into the available threaded attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test material is rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar joining surface is horizontal.


(4) Flex the thorax forward three times between vertical and until the torso reference plane, as shown in figure N5, reaches 30 ±2 degrees from vertical. Bring the torso to vertical orientation, remove all externally applied flexion forces, and wait 30 minutes before conducting the test. During the 30-minute waiting period, the dummy’s upper torso shall be externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to prevent sagging.


(5) Remove the external support and wait two minutes. Measure the initial orientation of the torso reference plane of the seated, unsupported dummy as shown in Figure N5. This initial torso orientation angle may not exceed 22 degrees.


(6) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the spine of the dummy, the pull cable, and the load cell as shown in Figure N5.


(7) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable as shown in Figure N5 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second, until the torso reference plane is at 45 ±0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane as shown in Figure N5.


(8) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 ±0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during the 10-second period.


(9) Release all force as rapidly as possible, and measure the return angle at 3 minutes or any time thereafter after the release.


§ 572.126 Knees and knee impact test procedure.

(a) Knee assembly. The knee assembly is part of the leg assembly (drawing 127-4000-1 and -2).


(b) When the knee assembly, consisting of knee machined (drawing 127-4013), knee flesh (drawing 127-4011), lower leg (drawing 127-4014), the foot assembly (drawing 127-4030-1(left) and -2 (right)) and femur load transducer (drawing SA572-S10) or its structural replacement (drawing 127-4007) is tested according to the test procedure in section 572.127(c), the peak resistance force as measured with the test probe mounted accelerometer must be not less than 2.0 kN (450 lbf) and not more than 3.0 kN (674 lbf).


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as shown in Figure N6. No contact is permitted between any part of the foot or tibia and any exterior surface.


(3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.


(4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral vertical or rotational movement at time-zero.


(5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1 ±0.03 m/s (6.9 # 0.1 ft/s).


(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during testing.


[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47328, July 18, 2002]


§ 572.127 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, shall be of rigid metal or metal alloy construction and concentric about its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware, velocity vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of § 572.124(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.86 ±0.02 kg (6.3 ±0.05 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 160 kg-c
2 (0.141 lb-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One third of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the probe. The impacting end of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 101.6 ±0.25 mm (4.00 ±0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 101-103 mm (4.0-4.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the impactor.


(b) The test probe for knee impacts, except for attachments, shall be of rigid metal or alloy construction and concentric about its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware, velocity vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of § 572.126(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 0.82 ±0.02 kg (1.8 ±0.05 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 34 kg-cm2 (0.03 lb-in-sec2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One third of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the probe. The impacting end of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 ±0.2 mm (3.00 ±0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 76-77 mm (3.0-3.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the impactor.


(c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.


(d) Neck force/moment transducer. (1) The upper neck force/moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S11 and be mounted in the head-neck assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.


(2) The optional lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S26 and be mounted as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.


(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration at T4, and as optional instrumentation in uniaxial for- and-aft oriented configuration on the most anterior ends of ribs #1 and #6 and at the spine box at the levels of #1 and #6 ribs as shown in 127-0000 sheet 3.


(f) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S50 and be mounted in the upper torso assembly as shown in 127-0000 sheet 3.


(g) The optional lumbar spine force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S12 and be mounted in the lower torso assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3 as a replacement for lumbar adaptor 127-3005.


(h) The optional iliac spine force transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S13 and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3 as a replacement for ASIS load cell 127-3015-1 (left) and −2 (right).


(i) The optional pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.


(j) The femur force transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA72-S10 and be mounted in the leg assembly as shown in drawing 127-0000 sheet 3.


(k) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part must be recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended Practice J211, Rev. Mar95 “Instrumentation for lmpact Tests,” except that the lumbar measurements are based on CFC 600, with channel classes as follows:


(1) Head acceleration – Class 1000.


(2) Neck:


(i) Forces – Class 1000;


(ii) Moments – Class 600;


(iii) Pendulum acceleration – Class 180;


(iv) Rotation – Class 60 (if used).


(3) Thorax:


(i) Rib acceleration – Class 1000;


(ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations – Class 180;


(iii) Sternum deflection – Class 600.


(4) Lumbar:


(i) Forces – Class 1000;


(ii) Moments – Class 600;


(iii) Flexion – Class 60 if data channel is used.


(5) Pelvis accelerations – Class 1000.


(6) Femur forces – Class 600.


(l) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12.


(m) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(n) Limb joints must be set at one G, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.


(o) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by period of not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(p) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.


[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47328, July 18, 2002]


Figures to Subpart N of Part 572







[65 FR 2065, Jan. 13, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 47329, July 18, 2002; 67 FR 59023, Sept. 19, 2002]


Subpart O – Hybrid III 5th Percentile Female Test Dummy, Alpha Version


Source:65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.130 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this Subpart by reference:


(1) A drawings and specification package entitled “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F, Alpha Version)” (June 2002), incorporated by reference in “572.131, and consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 880105-100X, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.132, 572.133, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;


(ii) Drawing No. 880105-250, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.133, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;


(iii) Drawing No. 880105-300, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;


(iv) Drawing No. 880105-450, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.134, 572.135, and 572.137;


(v) Drawing No. 880105-560-1, Complete Leg Assembly – left, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.135, 572.136, and 572.137;


(vi) Drawing No. 880105-560-2, Complete Leg Assembly – right incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.135, 572.136, and 572.137;


(vii) Drawing No. 880105-728-1, Complete Arm Assembly – left, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.134, and 572.135 as part of the complete dummy assembly;


(viii) Drawing No. 880105-728-2, Complete Arm Assembly – right, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.131, 572.134, and 572.135 as part of the complete dummy assembly;


(ix) The Hybrid III 5th percentile small adult female crash test dummy parts list, incorporated by reference in § 572.131;


(2) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F), Alpha Version” (February 2002), incorporated by reference in § 572.132.


(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation”, incorporated by reference in § 572.137;


(4) SAE Recommended Practice J211/2, Rev. Mar 95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 2 – Photographic Instrumentation” incorporated by reference in § 572.137; and


(5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12 “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing”, incorporated by reference in § 572.137.


(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Technical Reference Library, 400 Seventh Street SW., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy, (HIII-5F, Alpha Version) (June 2002), referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and the Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 5th Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version, referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section are available from Reprographic Technologies, 9107 Gaither Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20877, (301) 419-5070. These documents are also accessible for reading and copying through the DOT Docket Management System.


(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, Pa. 15096.


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46413, July 15, 2002]


§ 572.131 General description.

(a) The Hybrid III fifth percentile adult female crash test dummy is defined by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:


(1) Technical drawings and specifications package P/N 880105-000 (refer to § 572.130(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A;


(2) Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart O Hybrid III Fifth Percentile Small Adult Female Crash Test Dummy (HIII-5F, Alpha Version) (June 2002) (refer to § 572.130(a)(1)(ix)).


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing No.
Head Assembly880105-100X
Neck Assembly880105-250
Upper Torso Assembly880105-300
Lower Torso Assembly880105-450
Complete Leg Assembly – left880105-560-1
Complete Leg Assembly – right880105-560-2
Complete Arm Assembly – left880105-728-1
Complete Arm Assembly – right880105-728-2

(b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash impact conditions.


(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar to those specified in Standard 208, Occupant Crash Protection.


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46414, July 15, 2002]


§ 572.132 Head assembly and test procedure.

(a) The head assembly (refer to § 572.130(a)(1)(i)) for this test consists of the complete head (drawing 880105-100X), a six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) or its structural replacement (drawing 78051-383X), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).


(b) When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) in accordance with subsection (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG may not be less than 250 G or more than 300 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to peak).


(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as follows:


(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.


(3) Suspend and orient the head assembly as shown in Figure 19 of 49 CFR 572. The lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) from the impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on either side of the dummy’s head shall be used to ensure that the head is level with respect to the impact surface.


(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2.0 in) thick and 610 mm (24.0 in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish of not less than 203.2. × 10−6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not more than 2032.0 × 10−6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).


(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same head.


§ 572.133 Neck assembly and test procedure.

(a) The neck assembly (refer to § 572.130(a)(1)(ii)) for the purposes of this test consists of the assembly of components shown in drawing 880105-250.


(b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 880105-100X), neck (drawing 880105-250), bib simulator (drawing 880105-371), upper neck adjusting bracket (drawing 880105-207), lower neck adjusting bracket (drawing 880105-208), six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and either three accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4) or their mass equivalent installed in the head assembly as specified in drawing 880105-100X, is tested according to the test procedure in subsection (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure O1, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 77 degrees and 91 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA5572-311), about the occipital condyles may not be less than 69 N-m (51 ft-lbf) and not more than 83 N-m (61 ft-lbf). The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 10 N-m (7.4 ft-lbf) between 80 ms and 100 ms after time zero.


(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m)= My−(0.01778m) × (Fx).


(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and 0.01778m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.


(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure O2, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 99 degrees and 114 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA5572-S11), about the occipital condyles shall be not more than −53 N-m (−39 ft-lbf) and not less than −65 N-m (−48 ft-lbf). The negative moment shall decay for the first time to −10 N-m (−7.4 ft-lbf) between 94 ms and 114 ms after time zero.


(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My − (0.01778m) × (Fx).


(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11), and 0.01778 m is the distance from force to occipital condyle.


(3) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels shall be at the zero level at this time.


(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9000018) on the neck cable (drawing 880105-206) to 1.4 ±0.2 N-m (12.0 ±2.0 in-lb).


(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in subsection (b) of this section, on the pendulum described in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 so that the midsagittal plane of the head is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as shown in Figure O1 for flexion tests and Figure O2 for extension tests.


(4)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height to achieve an impact velocity of 7.01 ±0.12 m/s (23.0 ±0.4 ft/s) for flexion tests and 6.07 ±0.12 m/s (19.9 ±0.40 ft/s) for extension tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure 22 of 49 CFR 572 at the instant of contact with the honey comb.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve:


Table B – Pendulum Pulse

Time ms
Flexion
Extension
m/s
ft/s
m/s
ft/s
102.1-2.56.9-8.21.5-1.94.9-6.2
204.0-5.013.1-16.43.1-3.910.2-12.8
305.8-7.019.5-23.04.6-5.615.1-18.4

[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46414, July 15, 2002]


§ 572.134 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) Thorax (Upper Torso) Assembly (refer to § 572.130(a)(1)(iii)). The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 880105-300.


(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 880105-000) is impacted by a test probe conforming to section 572.137(a) at 6.71 ±0.12 m/s (22.0 ±0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure in subsection (c) of this section:


(1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-S5), must be not less than 50.0 mm (1.97 in) and not more than 58.0 mm (2.30 in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the impact probe as defined in section 572.137 and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall not be less than 3900 N (876 lbf) and not more than 4400 N (989 lbf). The peak force after 18.0 mm (0.71 in) of sternum displacement but before reaching the minimum required 50.0 mm (1.97 in) sternum displacement limit shall not exceed 4600 N.


(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (1) of this section shall be not less than 69 percent but not more than 85 percent. The hysteresis shall be calculated by determining the ratio of the area between the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the area under the loading portion of the curve.


(3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its deceleration.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as follows:


(1) The dummy is clothed in a form fitting cotton stretch above-the-elbow sleeved shirt and above-the-knee pants. The weight of the shirt and pants shall not exceed 0.14 kg (0.30 lb) each.


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back support as shown in Figure O3, with the limbs extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane vertical within ±1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior and lateral directions within ±0.5 degrees.


(4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within ±2.5 mm (0.1 in) and is 12.7 ±1.1 mm (0.5 ±0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]


§ 572.135 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test procedure.

(a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (drawing 880105-1096), and abdominal insert (drawing 880105-434), on resistance to articulation between the upper torso assembly (drawing 880105-300) and the lower torso assembly (drawing 880105-450) (refer to § 572.130(a)(1)(iv)).


(b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure O4 according to the test procedure set out in subsection (c) of this section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular motion relative to the vertical transverse plane 45 ±0.5 degrees at which time the force applied must be not less than 320 N (71.5 lbf) and not more than 390 N (87.4 lbf), and


(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to within 8 degrees of its initial position.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the upper/lower torso assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the legs below the femurs) and attach to the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure O4.


(3) Secure the pelvis to the fixture at the pelvis instrument cavity rear face by threading four
1/4 inch cap screws into the available threaded attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test material is rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar joining surface is horizontal.


(4) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the spine of the dummy as shown in Figure O4.


(5) Inspect and adjust, if necessary, the seating of the abdominal insert within the pelvis cavity and with respect to the torso flesh, assuring that the torso flesh provides uniform fit and overlap with respect to the outside surface of the pelvis flesh.


(6) Flex the dummy’s upper torso three times between the vertical and until the torso reference plane, as shown in Figure O4, reaches 30 degrees from the vertical transverse plane. Bring the torso to vertical orientation and wait for 30 minutes before conducting the test. During the 30 minute waiting period, the dummy’s upper torso shall be externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to prevent it from drooping.


(7) Remove all external support and wait two minutes. Measure the initial orientation angle of the torso reference plane of the seated, unsupported dummy as shown in Figure O4. The initial orientation angle may not exceed 20 degrees.


(8) Attach the pull cable and the load cell as shown in Figure O4.


(9) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable as shown in Figure O4 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second, until the angle reference plane is at 45 ±0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane.


(9) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 ±0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during the 10-second period.


(10) Release all force at the attachment bracket as rapidly as possible, and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle reference plane as defined in paragraph (6) 3 minutes after the release.


§ 572.136 Knees and knee impact test procedure.

(a) Knee assembly. The knee assembly (refer to §§ 572.130(a)(1)(v) and (vi)) for the purpose of this test is the part of the leg assembly shown in drawing 880105-560.


(b)(1) When the knee assembly, consisting of sliding knee assembly (drawing 880105-528R or -528L), lower leg structural replacement (drawing 880105-603), lower leg flesh (drawing 880105-601), ankle assembly (drawing 880105-660), foot assembly (drawing 880105-651 or 650), and femur load transducer (drawing SA572-S14) or its structural replacement (drawing 78051-319) is tested according to the test procedure in subsection (c), the peak resistance force as measured with the test probe-mounted accelerometer must be not less than 3450 N (776 lbf) and not more than 4060 N (913 lbf).


(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its deceleration.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as shown in Figure O5. No part of the foot or tibia may contact any exterior surface.


(3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.


(4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral vertical or rotational movement at the time of initial contact between the impactor and the knee.


(5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1 ±0.03 m/s (6.9 ±0.1 ft/s).


(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]


§ 572.137 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of § 572.134(c)(7). The impactor shall have a mass of 13.97 ±0.23 kg (30.8 ±0.5 lbs) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-cm
2 (3.22 lbs-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third (1/3) of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 152.4 ±0.25 mm (6.00 ±0.01 in) diameter face with a minimum/maximum edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 152.4-152.6 mm (6.0-6.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting of an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the procedure listed in Docket No. NHTSA-6714-14.


(b) The test probe for knee impacts, except for attachments, shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of § 572.136(c)(6). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.99±0.23 kg (6.6±0.5 lbs) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 209 kg-cm
2 (0.177 lb-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third (1/3) of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe may be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 ±0.2 mm (3.00 ±0.01 in) diameter face with a minimum/maximum edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 76.2-76.4 mm (3.0-3.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the procedure listed in Docket No. NHTSA-6714-14.


(c) Head accelerometers shall have dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.


(d) The upper neck force/moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S11 and be mounted in the head neck assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000, sheet 3 of 6.


(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration within the spine box instrumentation cavity and as optional instrumentation in uniaxial for-and-aft oriented configuration arranged as corresponding pairs in three locations on the sternum on and at the spine box of the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.


(f) The optional lumbar spine force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S15 and be mounted in the lower torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-450.


(g) The optional iliac spine force transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S16 and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-450.


(h) The pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3.


(i) The single axis femur force transducer (SA572-S14) or the optional multiple axis femur force/moment transducer (SA572-S29) shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in the appropriate drawing and be mounted in the femur assembly as shown in drawing 880105-500 sheet 3 of 6.


(j) The chest deflection transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S51 and be mounted to the upper torso assembly as shown in drawings 880105-300 and 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.


(k) The optional lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S27 and be mounted to the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.


(l) The optional thoracic spine force/moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S28 and be mounted in the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing 880105-000 sheet 3 of 6.


(m) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part shall be recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended Practice J211/10, Rev. Mar95 “Instrumentation for Impact Impact Tests; – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation,” and SAE Recommended Practice J211/2, Rev Mar95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 2 – Photographic Instrumentation”, (refer to §§ 572.130(a)(3) and (4) respectively) except as noted, with channel classes as follows:


(1) Head acceleration – Class 1000


(2) Neck:


(i) Forces – Class 1000


(ii) Moments – Class 600


(iii) Pendulum acceleration – Class 180


(iv) Rotation potentiometer – Class 60 (optional)


(3) Thorax:


(i) Rib acceleration – Class 1000


(ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations – Class 180


(iii) Sternum deflection – Class 600


(iv) Forces – Class 1000


(v) Moments – Class 600


(4) Lumbar:


(i) Forces – Class 1000


(ii) Moments – Class 600


(iii) Torso flexion pulling force – Class 60 if data channel is used


(5) Pelvis:


(i) Accelerations – Class 1000


(ii) Iliac wing forces – Class 180


(6) Femur forces and knee pendulum – Class 600


(n) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to section 572.130(a)(4)).


(o) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(p) Limb joints must be set at one G, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.


(q) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(r) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.


[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002; 74 FR 29894, June 23, 2009]


Figures to Subpart O of Part 572






[65 FR 10968, Mar. 1, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 46415, July 15, 2002]


Subpart P – 3-year-Old Child Crash Test Dummy, Alpha Version


Source:65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.140 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated in this subpart P by reference:


(1) A drawings and specifications package entitled, “Parts List and Drawings, Subpart P Hybrid III 3-year-old child crash test dummy, (H-III3C, Alpha version) September 2001,” incorporated by reference in § 572.141 and consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 210-1000, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.141, 572.142, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;


(ii) Drawing No. 210-2001, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.141, 572.143, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;


(iii) Drawing No. TE-208-000, Headform, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.141, and 572.143;


(iv) Drawing No. 210-3000, Upper/Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.141, 572.144, 572.145, and 572.146;


(v) Drawing No. 210-5000-1(L), -2(R), Leg Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.141, 572.144, 572.145 as part of a complete dummy assembly;


(vi) Drawing No. 210-6000-1(L), -2(R), Arm Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.141, 572.144, and 572.145 as part of the complete dummy assembly;


(2) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI), Subpart P, Hybird III 3-year-old Child Crash Test Dummy, (H-III3C, Alpha Version) September 2001,” incorporated by reference in § 572.141;


(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation”, incorporated by reference in § 572.146;


(4) SAE J1733 1994-12 “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing” incorporated by reference in § 572.146.


(5) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street SW, room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The drawings and specifications package referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and the PADI document referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section are accessible for viewing and copying at the Department of Transportation’s Docket public area, Plaza 401, 400 Seventh St., SW., Washington, DC 20590, and downloadable at dms.dot.gov. They are also available from Reprographic Technologies, 9107 Gaither Rd., Gaithersburg, MD 20877, (301) 419-5070.


(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.


[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]


§ 572.141 General description.

(a) The Hybrid III 3-year-old child dummy is described by the following materials:


(1) Technical drawings and specifications package 210-0000 (refer to § 572.140(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A of this section;


(2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection document (PADI) (refer to § 572.140(a)(2)).


(b) The dummy is made up of the component assemblies set out in the following Table A of this section:


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing No.
Head Assembly210-1000
Neck Assembly (complete)210-2001
Upper/Lower Torso Assembly210-3000
Leg Assembly210-5000-1(L), -2(R)
Arm Assembly210-6000-1(L), -2(R)

(c) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash impact conditions.


(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this part in every respect only before use in any test similar to those specified in Standard 208, Occupant Crash Protection, and Standard 213, Child Restraint Systems.


§ 572.142 Head assembly and test procedure.

(a) The head assembly (refer to § 572.140(a)(1)(i)) for this test consists of the head (drawing 210-1000), adapter plate (drawing ATD 6259), accelerometer mounting block (drawing SA 572-S80), structural replacement of
1/2 mass of the neck load transducer (drawing TE-107-001), head mounting washer (drawing ATD 6262), one
1/2-20 × 1″ flat head cap screw (FHCS) (drawing 9000150), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA-572-S4).


(b) When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is dropped from a height of 376.0±1.0 mm (14.8±0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG shall not be less than 250 g or more than 280 g. The resultant acceleration versus time history curve shall be unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed ±15 G (zero to peak).


(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as follows:


(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the head skin and the steel impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichlorethane, or an equivalent. Both impact surfaces must be clean and dry for testing.


(3) Suspend the head assembly with its midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure P1 of this subpart. The lowest point on the forehead is 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.76 ±0.04 in) from the steel impact surface. The 3.3 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes, located on either side of the dummy’s head in transverse alignment with the CG, shall be used to ensure that the head transverse plane is level with respect to the impact surface.


(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by a means that ensures a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a finish of not less than 203.2 × 10−6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not more than 2032.0 × 10−6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).


(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same head.


§ 572.143 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.

(a) The neck and headform assembly (refer to §§ 572.140(a)(1)(ii) and 572.140(a)(1)(iii)) for the purposes of this test, as shown in Figures P2 and P3 of this subpart, consists of the neck molded assembly (drawing 210-2015), neck cable (drawing 210-2040), nylon shoulder bushing (drawing 9001373), upper mount plate insert (drawing 910420-048), bib simulator (drawing TE-208-050), urethane washer (drawing 210-2050), neck mounting plate (drawing TE-250-021), two jam nuts (drawing 9001336), load-moment transducer (drawing SA 572-S19), and headform (drawing TE-208-000).


(b) When the neck and headform assembly, as defined in § 572.143(a), is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Flexion.


(i) Plane D, referenced in Figure P2 of this subpart, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 70 degrees and 82 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyle may not be less than 42 N-m and not more than 53 N-m.


(ii) The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 10 N-m between 60 ms and 80 ms after time zero.


(iii) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.


(2) Extension.


(i) Plane D referenced in Figure P3 of this subpart shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 83 degrees and 93 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak moment about the occipital condyle may be not more than −43.7 N-m and not less than −53.3 N-m.


(ii) The negative moment shall decay for the first time to −10 N-m between 60 and 80 ms after time zero.


(iii) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.


(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9001336) on the neck cable (drawing 210-2040) between 0.2 N-m and 0.3 N-m.


(3) Mount the neck-headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a) of this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the headform is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as shown in Figure P2 of this subpart for flexion and Figure P3 of this subpart for extension tests.


(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 5.50 ±0.10 m/s (18.05 + 0.40 ft/s) for flexion and 3.65 ±0.1 m/s (11.98 ±0.40 ft/s) for extension tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure 22 of this part 572 at time zero.


(i) The test shall be conducted without inducing any torsion twisting of the neck.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified in Table B of this section. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve as indicated in Table B of this section.


(iii) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. The pendulum data channel shall be zero at this time.


Table B – Pendulum Pulse

Time
Flexion
Time
Extension
ms
m/s
ft/s
ms
m/s
ft/s
102.0-2.76.6-8.961.0-1.43.3-4.6
153.0-4.09.8-13.1101.9-2.56.2-8.2
204.0-5.113.1-16.7142.8-3.59.2-11.5

§ 572.144 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly (refer to § 572.140(a)(1)(iv)). The thorax consists of the upper part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 210-3000.


(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 210-0000) is impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.146(a) at 6.0 ±0.1 m/s (19.7 ±0.3 ft/s) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section.


(1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with the chest deflection transducer (SA-572-S50), must not be less than 32mm (1.3 in) and not more than 38mm (1.5 in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the probe-mounted accelerometer as defined in § 572.146(a) and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall be not less than 680 N and not more than 810 N. The peak force after 12.5 mm of sternum compression but before reaching the minimum required 32.0 mm sternum compression shall not exceed 910 N.


(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact, as determined from the force vs. deflection curve, shall be not less than 65 percent and not more than 85 percent. The hysteresis shall be calculated by determining the ratio of the area between the loading and unloading portions of the force deflection curve to the area under the loading portion of the curve.


(3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its deceleration.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as follows:


(1) The test dummy is clothed in cotton-polyester-based tight-fitting shirt with long sleeves and ankle-length pants whose combined weight is not more than 0.25 kg (0.55 lbs).


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back support as shown in Figure P4, with the lower limbs extended horizontally and forward, the upper arms parallel to the torso and the lower arms extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane being vertical within ±1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior and lateral directions within ±0.5 degrees.


(4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe coincides with the dummy’s mid-sagittal plane and is centered on the center of No. 2 rib within ±2.5 mm (0.1 in.) and 0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal center line is within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]


§ 572.145 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test procedure.

(a) The test objective is to determine the resistance of the lumbar spine and abdomen of a fully assembled dummy (drawing 210-0000) to flexion articulation between upper and lower halves of the torso assembly (refer to § 572.140(a)(1)(iv)).


(b)(1) When the upper half of the torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected to a force continuously applied at the occipital condyle level through the rigidly attached adaptor bracket in accordance with the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section, the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the upper half of the torso, as measured at the posterior surface of the torso reference plane shown in Figure P5 of this subpart, to translate in angular motion in the midsagittal plane 45 ±0.5 degrees relative to the vertical transverse plane, at which time the pulling force applied must not be less than 130 N (28.8 lbf) and not more than 180 N (41.2 lbf), and


(2) Upon removal of the force, the upper torso assembly returns to within 10 degrees of its initial position.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure is as follows:


(1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9° and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least 4 hours prior to a test.


(2) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the lower legs) and seat it on a rigid flat-surface table, as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart.


(i) Unzip the torso jacket and remove the four
1/4-20 ×
3/4″ bolts which attach the lumbar load transducer or its structural replacement to the pelvis weldment (drawing 210-4510) as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart.


(ii) Position the matching end of the rigid pelvis attachment fixture around the lumbar spine and align it over the four bolt holes.


(iii) Secure the fixture to the dummy with the four
1/4-20 ×
3/4″ bolts and attach the fixture to the table. Tighten the mountings so that the pelvis-lumbar joining surface is horizontal within ±1 deg and the buttocks and upper legs of the seated dummy are in contact with the test surface.


(iv) Attach the loading adapter bracket to the upper part of the torso as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart and zip up the torso jacket.


(v) Point the upper arms vertically downward and the lower arms forward.


(3)(i) Flex the thorax forward three times from vertical until the torso reference plane reaches 30 ±2 degrees from vertical. The torso reference plane, as shown in figure P5 of this subpart, is defined by the transverse plane tangent to the posterior surface of the upper backplate of the spine box weldment (drawing 210-8020).


(ii) Remove all externally applied flexion forces and support the upper torso half in a vertical orientation for 30 minutes to prevent it from drooping.


(4) Remove the external support and after two minutes measure the initial orientation angle of the upper torso reference plane of the seated, unsupported dummy as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart. The initial orientation of the torso reference plane may not exceed 15 degrees.


(5) Attach the pull cable at the point of load application on the adaptor bracket while maintaining the initial torso orientation. Apply a pulling force in the midsagittal plane, as shown in Figure P5 of this subpart, at any upper torso flexion rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second, until the torso reference plane reaches 45 ±0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane.


(6) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 45 ±0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during the 10-second period.


(7) [Reserved]


(8) Release all force at the loading adaptor bracket as rapidly as possible and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle reference plane as defined in paragraph (c)(4) of this section 3 to 4 minutes after the release.


§ 572.146 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor such as suspension hardware, and impact vanes, must meet the requirements of § 572.144(c)(7) of this part. The impactor shall have a mass of 1.70 ±0.02 kg (3.75 ±0.05 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia 164 kg-cm
2 (0.145 lb-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third (
1/3) of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 50.8 ±0.25 mm (2.00 ±0.01 inch) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 53.3 mm (2.1 in) dia. cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 25.4 mm (1.0 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency not less than 1000 Hz limited to the direction of the longitudinal axis of the impactor.


(b) Head accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA 572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 210-0000.


(c) The neck force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA 572-S19 and be mounted at the upper neck transducer location as shown in drawing 210-0000. A lower neck transducer as specified in drawing SA 572-S19 is allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. ATD6204, as shown in drawing 210-0000.


(d) The shoulder force transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA 572-S21 and be allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 210-3800 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000.


(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA 572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration at the T4 location, as shown in drawing 210-0000. Triaxial accelerometers may be mounted as optional instrumentation at T1, and T12, and in uniaxial configuration on the sternum at the midpoint level of ribs No. 1 and No. 3 and on the spine coinciding with the midpoint level of No. 3 rib, as shown in drawing 210-0000. If used, the accelerometers must conform to SA-572-S4.


(f) The chest deflection potentiometer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S50 and be mounted in the torso assembly as shown drawing 210-0000.


(g) The lumbar spine force/moment transducer may be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 210-4150. If used, the transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S20.


(h) The pubic force transducer may be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921-0022-036. If used, the transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S18.


(i) The acetabulum force transducers may be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 210-4522. If used, the transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S22.


(j) The anterior-superior iliac spine transducers may be mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 210-4540-1, -2. If used, the transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S17.


(k) The pelvis accelerometers may be mounted in the pelvis in triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 210-0000 as optional instrumentation. If used, the accelerometers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA-572-S4.


(l) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part shall be recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1-Electronic Instrumentation” (refer to § 572.140(a)(3)), with channel classes as follows:


(1) Head acceleration – Class 1000


(2) Neck


(i) Force – Class 1000


(ii) Moments – Class 600


(iii) Pendulum acceleration – Class 180


(iv) Rotation potentiometer response (if used) – CFC 60.


(3) Thorax:


(i) Rib/sternum acceleration – Class 1000


(ii) Spine and pendulum accelerations – Class 180


(iii) Sternum deflection – Class 600


(iv) Shoulder force – Class 180


(4) Lumbar:


(i) Forces – Class 1000


(ii) Moments – Class 600


(iii) Torso flexion pulling force – Class 60 if data channel is used


(5) Pelvis


(i) Accelerations – Class 1000


(ii) Acetabulum, pubic symphysis – Class 1000,


(iii) Iliac wing forces – Class 180


(m) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to § 572.140(a)(4)).


(n) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(o) Limb joints shall be set at lG, barely restraining the weight of the limbs when they are extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb segment shall not exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.


(p) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by a period of not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(q) Surfaces of dummy components are not painted except as specified in this part or in drawings subtended by this part.


Figures to Subpart P of Part 572






[65 FR 15262, Mar. 22, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 64376, Dec. 13, 2001]


Subpart R – CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant, Alpha Version


Source:65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.150 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The following materials are incorporated by reference in this subpart R.


(1) A drawings and specifications package entitled “Parts List and Drawings, Subpart R, CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant Crash Test Dummy (CRABI-12, Alpha version) August 2001” and consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 921022-001, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.151, 572.152, 572.154, and 572.155;


(ii) Drawing No. 921022-041, Neck Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.151, 572.153, 572.154, and 572.155;


(iii) Drawing No. TE-3200-160, Headform, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.151 and 572.153;


(iv) Drawing No. 921022-060, Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.151, 572.154, and 572.155;


(v) Drawing No. 921022-055, Leg Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.151, and 572.155 as part of a complete dummy assembly;


(vi) Drawing No. 921022-054, Arm Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.151, and 572.155 as part of the complete dummy assembly;


(2) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) Subpart R, CRABI 12-Month-Old Infant Crash Test Dummy (CRABI-12, Alpha version) August 2001” incorporated by reference in § 572.155;


(3) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation”, incorporated by reference in § 572.155;


(4) SAE J1733 1994-12 “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing”, incorporated by reference in § 572.155.


(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved those materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket Section, 400 Seventh Street S.W., room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html.


(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The drawings and specifications package referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and the procedures manual referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section are available from Reprographic Technologies, 9000 Virginia Manor Road, Beltsville, MD 20705 (301) 419-5070.


(2) The SAE materials referred to paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.


[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]


§ 572.151 General description.

(a) The 12-month-old-infant crash test dummy is described by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:


(1) Technical drawings and specifications package 921022-000 (refer to § 572.150(a)(1)), the titles of which are listed in Table A of this section;


(2) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection document (PADI) (refer to § 572.150(a)(2)).


(b) The dummy consists of the component assemblies set out in the following Table A:


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing number
Head Assembly921022-001.
Neck Assembly (complete)921022-041.
Torso Assembly921022-060.
Leg Assembly921022-055 R&L.
Arm Assembly921022-054 R&L.

(c) Adjacent segments of the dummy are joined in a manner such that, except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash impact conditions.


(d) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy shall conform to this Subpart in every respect before its use in any test under this chapter.


§ 572.152 Head assembly and test procedure.

(a) The head assembly (refer to § 572.150(a)(1)(i)) for this test consists of the assembly (drawing 921022-001), triaxial mount block (SA572-80), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4).


(b) Frontal and rear impact. (1) Frontal impact. When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is dropped from a height of 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration measured at the head CG shall not be less than 100 g or more than 120 g. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall be less than 17 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed ±15 g’s.


(2) Rear impact. When the head assembly in paragraph (a) of this section is dropped from a height of 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration measured at the head CG shall be not less than 55 g and not more than 71 g. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal, and the oscillations occurring after the main pulse shall be less than 17 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed ±15 g’s.


(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as follows:


(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be maintained throughout the entire testing period specified in this section.


(2) Before the test, clean the impact surface of the head skin and the steel impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichlorethane, or an equivalent. Both impact surfaces shall be clean and dry for testing.


(3)(i) For a frontal impact test, suspend the head assembly with its midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure R1 of this subpart. The lowest point on the forehead is 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) from the impact surface. The 3.30 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes located on either side of the dummy’s head are used to ensure that the head is level with respect to the impact surface. The angle between the lower surface plane of the neck transducer mass simulator (drawing 910420-003) and the plane of the impact surface is 45 ±1 degrees.


(ii) For a rear impact test, suspend the head assembly with its midsagittal plane in vertical orientation as shown in Figure R2 of this subpart. The lowest point on the back of the head is 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) from the impact surface. The 3.30 mm (0.13 in) diameter holes located on either side of the dummy’s head are used to ensure that the head is level with respect to the impact surface. The angle between the lower surface plane of the neck transducer structural replacement (drawing 910420-003) and the impact surface is 90 ±1 degrees.


(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by a means that ensures a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish of not less than 203.2 × 10−6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not more than 2032.0 × 10−6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).


(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests of the head assembly at the same impact point. For head impacts on the opposite side of the head, the 30-minute waiting period specified in § 572.155(m) does not apply.


§ 572.153 Neck-headform assembly and test procedure.

(a) The neck and headform assembly (refer to §§ 572.150(a)(1)(ii) and 572.150(a)(1)(iii)) for the purposes of this test consists of parts shown in CRABI neck test assembly (drawing TE-3200-100);


(b) When the neck and headform assembly, as defined in § 572.153(a), is tested according to the test procedure in § 572.153(c), it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D referenced in Figure R3 of this subpart shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline not less than 75 degrees and not more than 86 degrees. Within this specified rotation corridor, the peak positive moment about the occipital condyles shall be not less than 36 N-m (26.6 ft-lbf) and not more than 45 N-m (33.2 ft-lbf).


(ii) The positive moment about the occipital condyles shall decay for the first time to 5 N-m (3.7 ft-lbf) between 60 ms and 80 ms after time zero.


(iii) The moment about the occipital condyles shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My − (0.005842m) × (Fx), where My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572 -S23) and 0.005842m is the distance from the point at which the load cell measures the force to the occipital condyle.


(2) Extension. (i) Plane D referenced in Figure R4 of this subpart shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline not less than 80 degrees and not more than 92 degrees. Within the specified rotation corridor, the peak negative moment about the occipital condyles shall be not more than −12 Nm (−8.9 ft-lbf) and not less than −23 N-m (−17.0 ft-lbf) within the minimum and maximum rotation interval.


(ii) The negative moment about the occipital condyles shall decay for the first time to −5 Nm (−3.7 lbf-ft) between 76 ms and 90 ms after time zero.


(iii) The moment about the occipital condyles shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My − (0.005842m) × (Fx), where My is the moment about the y-axis, Fx is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572 -S23) and 0.005842m is the distance from the point at which the load cell measures the force to the occipital condyle.


(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be maintained throughout the testing period specified in this section.


(2) Torque the jam nut (drawing 9001336) on the neck cable (drawing ATD-6206) to 0.2 to 0.3 Nm (2-3 in-lbf).


(3) Mount the neck-headform assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this section, on the pendulum so the midsagittal plane of the headform is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum as shown in Figure R3 for flexion and Figure R4 for extension tests.


(i) The moment and rotation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.


(ii) The test shall be conducted without inducing any torsion of the neck.


(4) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 5.2 ±0.1 m/s (17.1 ±0.3 ft/s) for flexion and 2.5 ±0.1 m/s (8.2 ±0.3 ft/s) for extension measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer at the instant of contact with the honeycomb.


(i) Time-zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. The pendulum data channel shall be defined to be zero at this time.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse which meets the velocity change as specified in the following table. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve as indicated in Table B:


Table B – Pendulum Pulse

Time
Flexion
Time
Extension
m/s
m/s
ft/s
ms
m/s
ft/s
101.6-2.35.2-7.560.8-1.22.6-3.9
203.4-4.211.2-13.8101.5-2.14.9-6.9
254.3-5.214.1-17.1142.2-2.97.2-9.5

§ 572.154 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) Thorax Assembly (refer to § 572.150(a)(1)(iv)) . The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 921022-060.


(b) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 921022-000) is impacted by a test probe conforming to § 572.155(a) at 5.0 ±0.1m/s (16.5 ±0.3 ft/s) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, the peak force, measured by the impact probe in accordance with paragraph § 572.155(a), shall be not less than 1514 N (340.7 lbf) and not more than 1796 N (404.1 lbf).


(c) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and at any relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test. These temperature and humidity levels shall be maintained throughout the entire testing period specified in this section.


(2) The test dummy is clothed in a cotton-polyester based tight fitting sweat shirt with long sleeves and ankle long pants whose combined weight is not more than 0.25 kg (.55 lbs).


(3) Seat and orient the dummy on a level seating surface without back support as shown in Figure R5 of this subpart, with the lower limbs extended forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane and the arms 0 to 5 degrees forward of vertical. The dummy’s midsagittal plane is vertical within ±/1 degree and the posterior surface of the upper spine box is aligned at 90 ±/1 degrees from the horizontal. (Shim material may be used under the upper legs to maintain the dummy’s specified spine box surface alignment).


(4) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe coincides with the dummy’s midsagittal plane, is centered on the torso 196 ±/2.5 mm (7.7 ±/0.1 in) vertically from the plane of the seating surface, and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane.


(5) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal center line falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(6) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical or rotational movement.


(7) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]


§ 572.155 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The test probe for thoracic impacts, except for attachments, shall be of rigid metallic construction and concentric about its longitudinal axis. Any attachments to the impactor, such as suspension hardware, impact vanes, etc., must meet the requirements of § 572.154(c)(7). The impactor shall have a mass of 2.86 ±0.02 kg (6.3 ±0.05 lbs) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 164 kg-cm
2 (0.145 lb-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG of the probe. One-third of the weight of suspension cables and any attachments to the impact probe must be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis of the probe, has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 101.6 ±0.25 mm (4.00 ±0.01 in) diameter face with an edge radius of 7.6/12.7 mm (0.3/0.5 in). The impactor shall have a 101-103 mm (4-4.1 in) diameter cylindrical surface extending for a minimum of 12.5 mm (0.5 in) to the rear from the impact face. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. The impact probe shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz measured in line with the longitudinal axis of the impactor, using the test method shown in the Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) document referenced in § 572.151.


(b) Head accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the head as shown in drawing 921022-000.


(c) The neck force-moment transducer shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S23 and shall be mounted for testing as shown in drawing 921022-000 and in figures R3 and R4 of this subpart.


(d) The shoulder force transducers shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S25 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921022-022 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 921022-000.


(e) The thorax accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and be mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 921022-000.


(f) The lumbar spine and lower neck force/moment transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S23 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in the torso assembly in place of part No. 910420-003 as shown in drawing 921022-000.


(g) The pelvis accelerometers shall have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and are allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in the pelvis in triaxial configuration as shown in drawing 921022-000.


(h) The pubic force transducer shall have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S24 and is allowed to be mounted as optional instrumentation in place of part No. 921022-050 in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 921022-000.


(i) The outputs of acceleration and force-sensing devices installed in the dummy and in the test apparatus specified by this part are recorded in individual data channels that conform to the requirements of SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation” (refer to § 572.150(a)(3)), with channel classes as follows:


(1) Head and headform acceleration – Class 1000.


(2) Neck :


(i) Forces – Class 1000;


(ii) Moments – Class 600;


(iii) Pendulum acceleration – Class 180;


(iv) Rotation potentiometer response (if used) – CFC 60.


(3) Thorax:


(i) Spine and pendulum accelerations – Class 180;


(ii) Shoulder forces – Class 600;


(4) Lumbar:


(i) Forces – Class 1000;


(ii) Moments – Class 600;


(5) Pelvis:


(i) Accelerations – Class 1000;


(ii) Pubic – Class 1000.


(j) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to SAE J1733, 1994-12, “Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle Information Report,” (refer to § 572.150(a)(4)).


(k) The mountings for sensing devices shall have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(l) Limb joints shall be set at l g, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force required to move a limb segment shall not exceed 2 g throughout the range of limb motion.


(m) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by period of not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(n) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as specified in this subpart or in drawings referenced in § 572.150.


[65 FR 17188, Mar. 31, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 45784, Aug. 30, 2001]


Figures to Subpart R of Part 572






Subpart S – Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy


Source:69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.160 Incorporation by reference.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this subpart S by reference:


(1) A drawings and specifications package entitled, “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test Dummy (H-III6CW),” dated June 2009, incorporated by reference in § 572.161 and consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 167-0000, Complete Assembly, incorporated by reference in § 572.161;


(ii) Drawing No. 167-2000, Upper Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.161, 572.164, and 572.165 as part of a complete dummy assembly;


(iii) Drawing No. 167-2020, Revision A, Spine Box Weight, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.161, 572.164, and 572.165 as part of a complete dummy assembly;


(iv) Drawing No. 167-3000, Lower Torso Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.161, and 572.165 as part of a complete dummy assembly;


(v) Drawing No. 167-3010, Revision A, Lumbar Weight Base, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.161 and 572.165 as part of a complete dummy assembly; and


(vi) The Hybrid III Weighted Six-Year-Old Child Parts/Drawing List, incorporated by reference in § 572.161.


(2) A procedures manual entitled, “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, And Inspection (PADI) of the Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test Dummy (H-III6CW), revised June 2009,” incorporated by reference in § 572.161;


(3) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to: http://www.regulations.gov.


(b) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The Drawings and Specifications for the Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section are available in electronic format through the NHTSA docket center and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.


(2) [Reserved]


[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005; 75 FR 76646, Dec. 9, 2010]


§ 572.161 General description.

(a) The Hybrid III Six-Year-Old Weighted Child Test Dummy is defined by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:


(1) “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test Dummy (H-III6CW),” dated June 2009 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.160);


(2) The head, neck, arm, and leg assemblies specified in 49 CFR 572 subpart N; and


(3) “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, And Inspection (PADI) of the Part 572 Subpart S, Hybrid III 6-Year-Old Child Weighted Crash Test Dummy (H-III6CW), revised June 2009” (incorporated by reference, see § 572.160).


Table A

Component assembly
1
Drawing No.
Complete assembly167-0000.
Upper torso assembly167-2000.
Spine box weight167-2020 Rev. A.
Lower torso assembly167-3000.
Lumbar weight base167-3010 Rev. A.


1 Head, neck, arm, and leg assemblies are as specified in 49 CFR 572 subpart N.


(b) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no contact between metallic elements throughout the range of motion or under simulated crash impact conditions.


(c) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy must conform to Subpart S in every respect and Subpart N as applicable, before use in any test similar to those specified in Standard 208, “Occupant Crash Protection” (49 CFR 571.208), and Standard 213, “Child Restraint Systems” (49 CFR 571.213).


[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005; 75 FR 76646, Dec. 9, 2010]


§ 572.162 Head assembly and test procedure.

The head assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR 572.122 (Subpart N).


§ 572.163 Neck assembly and test procedure.

The neck assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR 572.123 (Subpart N).


§ 572.164 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) Thorax (upper torso) assembly. The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 167-2000 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.160).


(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 167-2000) that is seated as shown in Figure S1 is impacted by a test probe conforming to 49 CFR 572.127(a) at 6.71 ±0.12 m/s (22.0 ±0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure specified in 49 CFR 572.124(c):


(1) The maximum sternum displacement relative to the spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (specified in 49 CFR 572.124(b)(1)), must be not less than 38.0 mm (1.50 in) and not more than 46.0 mm (1.80 in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the probe in accordance with 49 CFR 572.127, must be not less than 1205 N (270.9 lbf) and not more than 1435 N (322.6 lbf). The peak force after 12.5 mm (0.5 in) of sternum displacement, but before reaching the minimum required 38.0 mm (1.46 in) sternum displacement limit, must not exceed an upper limit of 1500 N.


(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (b)(1) of this section must be not less than 65 percent but not more than 85 percent.


(c) Test procedure. The thorax assembly is tested as specified in 49 CFR 572.124(c).


§ 572.165 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test procedure.

(a) Upper/lower torso assembly. The test objective is to determine the stiffness effects of the lumbar spine (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), including cable (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), mounting plate insert (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), nylon shoulder bushing (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), nut (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), spine box weighting plates (drawing 167-2020 Revision A), lumbar base weight (drawing 167-3010 Revision A), and abdominal insert (specified in 49 CFR 572.125(a)), on resistance to articulation between the upper torso assembly (drawing 167-2000) and the lower torso assembly (drawing 167-3000). Drawing Nos. 167-2000, 167-2020 Revision A, 167-3000, and 167-3010 Revision A, are incorporated by reference, see § 572.160.


(b)(1) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure S2 according to the test procedure set out in 49 CFR 572.125(c), the lumbar spine-abdomen assembly must flex by an amount that permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular motion until the machined surface of the instrument cavity at the back of the thoracic spine box is at 45 ±0.5 degrees relative to the transverse plane, at which time the force applied as shown in Figure S2 must be within 88.6 N ±25 N (20.0 lbf ±5.6 lbf), and


(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to within 9 degrees of its initial position.


(c) Test procedure. The upper and lower torso assemblies are tested as specified in 49 CFR 572.125(c), except that in paragraph (c)(5) of that section, the initial torso orientation angle may not exceed 32 degrees.


[69 FR 42602, July 16, 2004, as amended at 70 FR 77338, Dec. 30, 2005]


§ 572.166 Knees and knee impact test procedure.

The knee assembly is assembled and tested as specified in 49 CFR 572.126 (Subpart N).


§ 572.167 Test conditions and instrumentation.

The test conditions and instrumentation are as specified in 49 CFR 572.127 (Subpart N).


Figures to Subpart S of Part 572



Subpart T – Hybrid III 10-Year-Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C)


Source:77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.170 Incorporation by reference.

(a) Certain material is incorporated by reference (IBR) into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, NHTSA must publish notice of change in the Federal Register and the material must be available to the public. All approved material is available for inspection at the Department of Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, telephone 202-366-9826, and is available from the sources listed below. The material is available in electronic format through Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457 or go to www.regulations.gov. It is also available for inspection at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030 or go to http://www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html.


(b) NHTSA Technical Information Services, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone 202-366-5965.


(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, “Parts/Drawing List, Part 572 Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March, 2015,” IBR approved for § 572.171.


(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled, “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Crash Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015,” IBR approved for § 572.171, including:


(i) Drawing No. 420-0000, Complete Assembly HIII 10-year-old, IBR approved for §§ 572.171, 572.172, 572.173, 572.174, 572.176, and 572.177.


(ii) Drawing No. 420-1000, Head Assembly, IBR approved for § 572.171, § 572.172, § 572.173, and § 572.177.


(iii) Drawing No. 420-2000, Neck Assembly, IBR approved for §§ 572.171, 572.173, and 572.177.


(iv) Drawing No. 420-3000, Upper Torso Assembly, IBR approved for §§ 572.171, 572.174, 572.175, and 572.177.


(v) Drawing No. 420-4000, Lower Torso Assembly, IBR approved for §§ 572.171, 572.174, 572.175, and 572.177.


(vi) Drawing No. 420-5000-1, Complete Leg Assembly – left, IBR approved for §§ 572.171, 572.176, and 572.177.


(vii) Drawing No. 420-5000-2, Complete Leg Assembly – right, IBR approved for §§ 572.171, 572.176, and 572.177.


(viii) Drawing No. 420-7000-1, Complete Arm Assembly – left, IBR approved for § 572.171, and,


(ix) Drawing No. 420-7000-2, Complete Arm Assembly – right, IBR approved for § 572.171.


(3) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015”; IBR approved for §§ 572.171 and 572.177.


(c) SAE International, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, call 1-877-606-7323.


(1) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation,” IBR approved for § 572.177.


(2) SAE Information Report J1733 of 1994-12, “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,” December 1994, IBR approved for § 572.177.


[77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 35860, June 23, 2015]


§ 572.171 General description.

(a) The Hybrid III 10-year-old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C) is defined by drawings and specifications containing the following materials:


(1) The parts enlisted in “Parts/Drawing List, Part 572 Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March, 2015” (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170),


(2) The engineering drawings and specifications contained in “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart T, Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Crash Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015,” which includes the engineering drawings and specifications described in Drawing 420-0000, the titles of the assemblies of which are listed in Table A, and,


(3) A manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Hybrid III 10 Year Old Child Test Dummy (HIII-10C), March 2015.”


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing No.
(i) Head Assembly420-1000
(ii) Neck Assembly420-2000
(iii) Upper Torso Assembly420-3000
(iv) Lower Torso Assembly420-4000
(v) Complete Leg Assembly – left420-5000-1
(vi) Complete Leg Assembly – right420-5000-2
(vii) Complete Arm Assembly – left420-7000-1
(viii) Complete Arm Assembly – right420-7000-2

(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test.


[77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 35860, June 23, 2015]


§ 572.172 Head assembly and test procedure.

(a) The head assembly for this test consists of the complete head (drawing 420-1000), a six-axis neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11, included in drawing 420-0000), or its structural replacement (drawing 420-383X), and 3 accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4, included in drawing 420-0000) (all incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(b) When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG may not be less than 250 G or more than 300 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to peak).


(c) Head test procedure. The test procedure for the head is as follows:


(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 18.9 and 25.6 °C (66 and 78 °F) and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an equivalent. The skin of the head must be clean and dry for testing.


(3) Suspend and orient the head assembly as shown in Figure T1. The lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 ±1.0 mm (14.8 ±0.04 in) from the impact surface. The 1.57 mm (0.062 in) diameter holes located on either side of the dummy’s head shall be used to ensure that the head is level with respect to the impact surface.


(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm (2 in) thick and 610 mm (24 in) square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a micro finish of not less than 203.2 × 10−6 mm (8 micro inches) (RMS) and not more than 2032.0 × 10−6 mm (80 micro inches) (RMS).


(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same head.


§ 572.173 Neck assembly and test procedure.

(a) The neck assembly for the purposes of this test consists of the assembly of components shown in drawing 420-2000 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(b) When the head-neck assembly consisting of the head (drawing 420-1000), neck (drawing 420-2000), six-channel neck transducer (SA572-S11, included in drawing 420-0000), lower neck bracket assembly (drawing 420-2070), and either three uniaxial accelerometers (drawing SA572-S4, included in drawing 420-0000) or their mass equivalent installed in the head assembly as specified in drawing 420-1000 (all incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Flexion. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure T2, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 76 degrees and 90 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11, included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), about the occipital condyles may not be less than 50 N-m (36.9 ft-lbf) and not more than 62 N-m (45.7 ft-lbf). The positive moment shall decay for the first time to 10 N-m (7.4 ft-lbf) between 86 ms and 105 ms after time zero.


(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My − (0.01778) × (FX).


(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis in Newton-meters, FX is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11) in Newtons, and 0.01778 is the distance in meters from the load center of the neck transducer to the occipital condyle.


(2) Extension. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure T3, shall rotate in the direction of preimpact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 96 degrees and 115 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within the specified corridor, the peak moment, measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11, included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), about the occipital condyles may not be more than −37 N-m (−27.3 ft-lbf) and not less than −46 N-m (−33.9 ft-lbf). The positive moment shall decay for the first time to −10 N-m (−7.4 ft-lbf) between 100 ms and 116 ms after time zero.


(ii) The moment shall be calculated by the following formula: Moment (N-m) = My − (0.01778) × (FX).


(iii) My is the moment about the y-axis in Newton-meters, FX is the shear force measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S11, included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) in Newtons, and 0.01778 is the distance in meters from the load center of the neck transducer to the occipital condyle.


(3) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material. All data channels shall be at the zero level at this time.


(c) Test procedure. The test procedure for the neck assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Torque the hex nut (drawing 420-2000, part 9000130) on the neck cable (drawing 420-2060) (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) to 0.9 ±0.2 N-m (8 ±2 in-lbf) before each test on the same neck.


(3) Mount the head-neck assembly, defined in paragraph (b) of this section, on the pendulum described in Figure 22 of 49 CFR part 572 so that the leading edge of the lower neck bracket coincides with the leading edge of the pendulum as shown in Figure T2 for flexion tests and Figure T3 for extension tests.


(4)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height to achieve an impact velocity of 6.1 ±0.12 m/s (20.0 ±0.4 ft/s) for flexion tests and 5.03 ±0.12 m/s (16.50 ±0.40 ft/s) for extension tests, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure T2 at the instant of contact with the honeycomb.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse that meets the velocity change as specified below. Integrate the pendulum acceleration data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve:


Table B – Pendulum Pulse

Time

(ms)
Flexion
Extension
M/s
ft/s
m/s
ft/s
101.64-2.045.38-6.691.49-1.894.89-6.20
203.04-4.049.97-13.252.88-3.689.45-12.07
304.45-5.6514.60-18.534.20-5.2013.78-17.06

§ 572.174 Thorax assembly and test procedure.

(a) The thorax consists of the part of the torso assembly designated as the upper torso (drawing 420-3000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(b) When the anterior surface of the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) is impacted by a test probe conforming to section 572.177 at 6.00 ±0.12 m/s (22.0 ±0.4 ft/s) according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) Maximum sternum displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with chest deflection transducer (drawing SA572-T4, included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), must be not less than 37 mm (1.46 in) and not more than 46 mm (1.81 in). Within this specified compression corridor, the peak force, measured by the impact probe as defined in section 572.177 and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, shall not be less than 2.0 kN (450 lbf) and not more than 2.45 kN (551 lbf). The peak force after 20 mm (0.79 in.) of sternum displacement but before reaching the minimum required 37 mm (1.46 in.) sternum displacement limit shall not exceed 2.52 kN (567 lbf).


(2) The internal hysteresis of the ribcage in each impact as determined by the plot of force vs. deflection in paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall be not less than 69 percent but not more than 85 percent. The hysteresis shall be calculated by determining the ratio of the area between the loading (from time zero to maximum deflection) and unloading portions (from maximum deflection to zero force) of the force deflection curve to the area under the loading portion of the curve.


(3) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its measured deceleration.


(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the thorax assembly is as follows:


(1) The dummy is clothed in a form fitting cotton stretch above-the-elbow sleeved shirt and above-the-knees pants. The weight of the shirt and pants shall not exceed 0.14 kg (0.30 lb) each.


(2) Torque the lumbar cable (drawing 420-4130) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) to 0.9 ±0.2 N-m (8 ±2 in-lbf) and set the lumbar adjustment angle to 12 degrees. Set the neck angle to 16 degrees.


(3) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(4) Seat and orient the dummy on a seating surface without back support as shown in Figure T4, with the limbs extended horizontally and forward, parallel to the midsagittal plane, the midsagittal plane vertical within ±1 degree and the ribs level in the anterior-posterior and lateral directions within ±0.5 degrees.


(5) Establish the impact point at the chest midsagittal plane so that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe coincides with the midsagittal plane of the dummy within ±2.5 mm (0.1 in) and is 12.7 ±1.1 mm (0.5 ±0.04 in) below the horizontal-peripheral centerline of the No. 3 rib and is within 0.5 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(6) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal centerline falls within 2 degrees of a horizontal line in the dummy’s midsagittal plane.


(7) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(8) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


§ 572.175 Upper and lower torso assemblies and torso flexion test procedure.

(a) The test objective is to determine the stiffness of the molded lumbar assembly (drawing 420-4100), abdominal insert (drawing 420-4300), and chest flesh assembly (drawing 420-3560) on resistance to articulation between the upper torso assembly (drawing 420-3000) and lower torso assembly (drawing 420-4000) (all incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(b) When the upper torso assembly of a seated dummy is subjected to a force continuously applied at the head to neck pivot pin level through a rigidly attached adaptor bracket as shown in Figure T5 according to the test procedure set out in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) The lumbar spine-abdomen-chest flesh assembly shall flex by an amount that permits the upper torso assembly to translate in angular motion relative to the vertical transverse plane 35 ±0.5 degrees at which time the force applied must be not less than 180 N (40.5 lbf) and not more than 250 N (56.2 lbf).


(2) Upon removal of the force, the torso assembly must return to within 8 degrees of its initial position.


(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the upper/lower torso assembly is as follows:


(1) Torque the lumbar cable (drawing 420-4130) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) to 0.9 ±0.2 N-m (8 ±2 in-lbf) and set the lumbar adjustment angle to 12 degrees. Set the neck angle to 16 degrees.


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) Assemble the complete dummy (with or without the legs below the femurs) and attach to the fixture in a seated posture as shown in Figure T5.


(4) Secure the pelvis to the fixture at the pelvis instrument cavity rear face by threading four
1/4-inch cap screws into the available threaded attachment holes. Tighten the mountings so that the test material is rigidly affixed to the test fixture and the pelvic-lumbar joining surface is 18 degrees from horizontal and the legs are parallel with the test fixture.


(5) Attach the loading adaptor bracket to the spine of the dummy as shown in Figure T5.


(6) Inspect and adjust, if necessary, the seating of the abdominal insert within the pelvis cavity and with respect to the chest flesh, assuring that the chest flesh provides uniform fit and overlap with respect to the outside surface of the pelvis flesh.


(7) Flex the dummy’s upper torso three times between the vertical and until the torso reference frame, as shown in Figure T5, reaches 30 degrees from the vertical transverse plane. Bring the torso to vertical orientation and wait for 30 minutes before conducting the test. During the 30-minute waiting period, the dummy’s upper torso shall be externally supported at or near its vertical orientation to prevent it from drooping.


(8) Remove all external support and wait two minutes. Measure the initial orientation angle of the torso reference plane of the seated, unsupported dummy as shown in Figure T5. The initial orientation angle may not exceed 20 degrees.


(9) Attach the pull cable and the load cell as shown in Figure T5.


(10) Apply a tension force in the midsagittal plane to the pull cable as shown in Figure T5 at any upper torso deflection rate between 0.5 and 1.5 degrees per second, until the angle reference plane is at 35 ±0.5 degrees of flexion relative to the vertical transverse plane.


(11) Continue to apply a force sufficient to maintain 35 ±0.5 degrees of flexion for 10 seconds, and record the highest applied force during the 10-second period.


(12) Release all force at the attachment bracket as rapidly as possible, and measure the return angle with respect to the initial angle reference plane as defined in paragraph (c)(7) of this section three minutes after the release.


§ 572.176 Knees and knee impact test procedure.

(a) The knee assembly for the purpose of this test is the part of the leg assembly shown in drawing 420-5000 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(b) When the knee assembly, consisting of lower upper leg assembly (420-5200), femur load transducer (SA572-S10, included in drawing 420-0000) or its structural replacement (420-5121), lower leg assembly (420-5300), ankle assembly (420-5400), and foot molded assembly (420-5500) (all incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) is tested according to the test procedure in subsection (c) of this section:


(1) The peak resistance force as measured with the test probe-mounted accelerometer must not be less than 2.6 kN (585 lbf) and not more than 3.2 kN (719 lbf).


(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its deceleration.


(c) Test Procedure. The test procedure for the knee assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the knee assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Mount the test material and secure it to a rigid test fixture as shown in Figure T6. No part of the foot or tibia may contact any exterior surface.


(3) Align the test probe so that throughout its stroke and at contact with the knee it is within 2 degrees of horizontal and collinear with the longitudinal centerline of the femur.


(4) Guide the pendulum so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement at the time of initial contact between the impactor and the knee.


(5) The test probe velocity at the time of contact shall be 2.1 ±0.03 m/s (6.9 ±0.1 ft/s).


(6) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


§ 572.177 Test conditions and instrumentation.

(a) The following test equipment and instrumentation is needed for qualification as set forth in this subpart:


(1) The test probe for thoracic impacts is of rigid metallic construction, concentric in shape, and symmetric about its longitudinal axis. It has a mass of 6.89 ±0.05 kg (15.2 ±0.1 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 2040 kg-cm
2 (1.81 lbf-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG. One-third (
1/3) of the weight of the suspension cables and their attachments to the impact probe is included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis, is at least 25.4 mm (1.0 in) long, and has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 121 ±0.25 mm (4.76 ±0.01 in) diameter face with a maximum edge radius of 12.7 mm (0.5 in). The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting of an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. No concentric portions of the impact probe may exceed the diameter of the impact face. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the procedure listed in the PADI (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(2) The test probe for knee impacts is of rigid metallic construction, concentric in shape, and symmetric about its longitudinal axis. It has a mass of 1.91 ±0.05 kg (4.21 ±0.1 lb) and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 140 kg-cm
2 (0.124 lbf-in-sec
2) in yaw and pitch about the CG. One third (
1/3) of the weight of the suspension cables and their attachments to the impact probe may be included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis, is at least 12.5 mm (0.5 in) long, and has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 76.2 ±0.2 mm (3.00 ±0.01 in) diameter face with a maximum edge radius of 12.7 mm (0.5 in). The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. No concentric portions of the impact probe may exceed the diameter of the impact face. The impact probe has a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the procedure listed in the PADI (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(3) Head accelerometers have dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the head as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.


(4) The upper neck force and moment transducer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S11 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted in the head-neck assembly as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.


(5) The chest deflection transducer has the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S50 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted to the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.


(b) The following instrumentation may be required for installation in the dummy for compliance testing. If so, it is installed during qualification procedures as described in this subpart:


(1) The thorax CG accelerometers have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) and are mounted in the torso assembly in a triaxial configuration within the spine box instrumentation cavity.


(2) The lower neck force and moment transducer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S40 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted to the neck assembly by replacing the lower neck mounting bracket 420-2070 as shown in drawing 420-2000 (all incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(3) The clavicle force transducers have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S41 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the shoulder assembly as shown in drawing 420-3800 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(4) The IR-Tracc chest deflection transducers have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S43 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted to the spine box assembly as shown in drawing 420-8000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(5) The spine and sternum accelerometers have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the torso assembly in uniaxial fore-and-aft oriented configuration arranged as corresponding pairs in two locations each on the sternum and at the spine box of the upper torso assembly as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.


(6) The lumbar spine force-moment transducer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S12 (included in drawing 420-0000) and is mounted in the lower torso assembly as shown in drawing 420-4000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(7) The iliac force transducers have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S13 L and R (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the lower torso assembly as shown in drawing 420-4000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(8) The pelvis accelerometers have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted in the torso assembly in triaxial configuration in the pelvis bone as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.


(9) The femur force and moment transducers (SA572-S10, included in drawing 420-0000) have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in the appropriate drawing and are mounted in the upper leg assembly, replacing the femur load cell simulator (drawing 420-5121) as shown in drawing 420-5100 (all incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(10) The tilt sensors have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S42 (included in drawing 420-0000) and are mounted to the head, thorax, and pelvis assemblies as shown in drawing 420-0000 (both incorporated by reference, see § 572.170), sheet 2 of 6.


(c) The outputs of transducers installed in the dummy and in the test equipment specified by this part are to be recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE Recommended Practice J211 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170) except as noted, with channel frequency classes as follows:


(1) Pendulum acceleration, CFC 180,


(2) Pendulum D-plane rotation (if transducer is used), CFC 60,


(3) Torso flexion pulling force (if transducer is used), CFC 60,


(4) Head acceleration, CFC 1000,


(5) Neck forces, upper and lower, CFC 1000,


(6) Neck moments, upper and lower, CFC 600,


(7) Thorax CG acceleration, CFC 180,


(8) Sternum deflection, Class 600,


(9) Sternum and rib accelerations, Class 1000,


(10) Spine accelerations, CFC 180,


(11) Lumbar forces, CFC 1000,


(12) Lumbar moments, CFC 600,


(13) Shoulder forces, CFC 180,


(14) Pelvis accelerations, CFC 1000,


(15) Iliac forces, CFC 180,


(16) Femur and tibia forces, CFC 600,


(17) Femur and tibia moments, CFC 600.


(18) Thorax probe acceleration, CFC 180,


(19) Knee probe acceleration, CFC 600.


(d) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity are to conform to SAE Information Report J1733 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.170).


(e) The mountings for sensing devices have no resonant frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(f) Limb joints are set at one G, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a limb segment is not to exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.


(g) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(h) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.


[77 FR 11667, Feb. 27, 2012, as amended at 80 FR 35860, June 23, 2015]


Appendix – Figures to Subpart T of Part 572







Subpart U – ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult Male


Source:71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.180 Incorporated materials.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this Subpart by reference:


(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, “Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES2re), September 2009,” incorporated by reference in § 572.181.


(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re, Alpha Version), September 2009,” consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 175-0000, ES-2re Dummy Assembly, incorporated by reference, see §§ 572.181, 575.182, 572.184;


(ii) Drawing No. 175-1000, Head Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.182;


(iii) Drawing No. 175-2000, Neck Assembly Test/Cert, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.183;


(iv) Drawing No. 175-3000, Shoulder Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.184;


(v) Drawing No. 175-3500, Arm Assembly, Left, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.185;


(vi) Drawing No. 175-3800, Arm Assembly, Right, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181, and 572.185;


(vii) Drawing No. 175-4000, Thorax Assembly with Rib Extensions, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.185;


(viii) Drawing No. 175-5000, Abdominal Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.186;


(ix) Drawing No. 175-5500, Lumbar Spine Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.187;


(x) Drawing No. 175-6000, Pelvis Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.188;


(xi) Drawing No. 175-7000-1, Leg Assembly – left incorporated by reference in § 572.181;


(xii) Drawing No. 175-7000-2, Leg Assembly – right incorporated by reference in § 572.181;


(xiii) Drawing No. 175-8000, Neoprene Body Suit, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181 and 572.185; and,


(xiv) Drawing No. 175-9000, Headform Assembly, incorporated by reference in §§ 572.181, 572.183, 572.187;


(3) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) of the EuroSID-2re 50th Percentile Adult Male Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, February 2008,” incorporated by reference in §§ 572.180(a)(2), and 572.181(a);


(4) Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Recommended Practice J211, Rev. Mar 95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation”; and,


(5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12 “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing.”


(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to: http://www.regulations.gov.


(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES2re) referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re, Alpha Version) referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, and the PADI document referred to in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, are available in electronic format through Regulations.gov and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, telephone (301) 670-0090.


(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, telephone 1-877-606-7323.


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33920, June 16, 2008; 76 FR 31864, June 2, 2011]


§ 572.181 General description.

(a) The ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 50th Percentile Adult Male, is defined by:


(1) The drawings and specifications contained in the “Parts List and Drawings, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES-2re, Alpha Version), September 2009,” (incorporated by reference, see § 572.180), which includes the technical drawings and specifications described in Drawing 175-0000, the titles of which are listed in Table A;


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing No.
Head Assembly175-1000
Neck Assembly Test/Cert175-2000
Neck Bracket Including Lifting Eyebolt175-2500
Shoulder Assembly175-3000
Arm Assembly-Left175-3500
Arm Assembly-Right175-3800
Thorax Assembly with Rib Extensions175-4000
Abdominal Assembly175-5000
Lumbar Spine Assembly175-5500
Pelvis Assembly175-6000
Leg Assembly, Left175-7000-1
Leg Assembly, Right175-7000-2
Neoprene Body Suit175-8000

(2) “Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart U, Eurosid 2 with Rib Extensions (ES2re), September 2009,” containing 9 pages, incorporated by reference, see § 572.180,


(3) A listing of available transducers-crash test sensors for the ES-2re Crash Test Dummy is shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 4 of 6, dated February 2008, incorporated by reference, see § 572.180,


(4) Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly and Inspection (PADI) of the ES-2re Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, February 2008, incorporated by reference, see § 572.180,


(5) Sign convention for signal outputs reference document SAE J1733 Information Report, titled “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing” dated December 1994, incorporated by reference, see § 572.180.


(b) Exterior dimensions of ES-2re test dummy are shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 3 of 6, dated February 2008, incorporated by reference, see § 572.180.


(c) Weights of body segments (head, neck, upper and lower torso, arms and upper and lower segments) and the center of gravity location of the head are shown in drawing 175-0000 sheet 2 of 6, dated February 2008, incorporated by reference, see § 572.180.


(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no additional contact between metallic elements of adjacent body segments throughout the range of motion.


(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar to those in Standard No. 214, Side Impact Protection and Standard No. 201, Occupant Protection in Interior Impact.


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008; 76 FR 31866, June 2, 2011]


§ 572.182 Head assembly.

(a) The head assembly consists of the head (drawing 175-1000), including the neck upper transducer structural replacement, and a set of three (3) accelerometers in conformance with specifications in § 572.189(b) and mounted as shown in drawing (175-0000 sheet 1 of 6). When tested to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the head assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. The head shall be tested per procedure specified in 49 CFR § 572.112(a).


(c) Performance criteria. (1) When the head assembly is dropped in accordance with § 572.112 (a), the measured peak resultant acceleration shall be between 125 g’s and 155 g’s;


(2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse shall not exceed 15% (zero to peak) of the main pulse;


(3) The fore-and-aft component of the head acceleration shall not exceed 15 g’s.


§ 572.183 Neck assembly.

(a) The neck assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 175-2000. For purposes of this test, the neck is mounted within the headform assembly 175-9000 as shown in Figure U1 in appendix A to this subpart. When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the neck-headform assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the neck-headform assembly in a test environment as specified in § 572.189(n);


(2) Attach the neck-headform assembly to the part 572 subpart E pendulum test fixture as shown in Figure U2-A in appendix A to this subpart, so that the midsagittal plane of the neck-headform assembly is vertical and perpendicular to the plane of motion of the pendulum longitudinal centerline shown in Figure U2-A. Torque the half-spherical screws (175-2004) located at either end of the neck assembly to 88 ±5 in-lbs using the neck compression tool (175-9500) or equivalent;


(3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to allow it to fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 3.4±0.1 m/s measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer (Figure 22 as set forth in 49 CFR 572.33) at the time the pendulum makes contact with the decelerating mechanism. The velocity-time history of the pendulum falls inside the corridor determined by the upper and lower boundaries specified in Table 1 to paragraph (a) of this section.


(4) Allow the neck to flex without the neck-headform assembly making contact with any object;


(5) Time zero is defined in § 572.189(j).


Table 1 to Paragraph (a) – ES-2re Neck Certification Pendulum Velocity Corridor

Upper boundary
Lower boundary
Time

(ms)
Velocity

(m/s)
Time

(ms)
Velocity

(m/s)
1.00.000.0−0.05
3.0−0.252.5−0.375
14.0−3.2013.5−3.7
17.0−3.7

(c) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as determined by integrating the filtered pendulum acceleration response from time-zero.


(2) The maximum rotation in the lateral direction of the reference plane of the headform (175-9000) as shown in Figure U2-B in appendix A to this subpart, shall be 49 to 59 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis of the pendulum occurring between 54 and 66 ms from time zero. Rotation of the headform-neck assembly and the neck angle with respect to the pendulum shall be measured with potentiometers specified in § 572.189(c), installed as shown in drawing 175-9000, and calculated per procedure specified in Figure U2-B in appendix A to this subpart;


(3) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 53 ms to 88 ms after the time the peak translation-rotation value is reached.


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]


§ 572.184 Shoulder assembly.

(a) The shoulder (175-3000) is part of the body assembly shown in drawing 175-0000. When subjected to impact tests specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the shoulder assembly shall meet performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly, without suit and shoulder foam pad (175-3010), in a test environment as specified in § 572.189(n);


(2) The dummy is seated, as shown in Figure U3 in appendix A to this subpart, on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface covered by two overlaid 2 mm thick Teflon sheets and with no back support of the dummy’s torso. The dummy’s torso spine backplate is vertical within ±2 degrees and the midsagittal plane of the thorax is positioned perpendicular to the direction of the plane of motion of the impactor at contact with the shoulder. The arms are oriented forward at 50±2 degrees from the horizontal, pointing downward. The dummy’s legs are horizontal and symmetrical about the midsaggital plane with the distance between the innermost point on the opposite ankle at 100 ±5 mm. The length of the elastic shoulder cord (175-3015) shall be adjusted so that a force between and including 27.5 and 32.5 N applied in a forward direction at 4 ±1 mm from the outer edge of the clavicle in the same plane as the clavicle movement, is required to initiate a forward motion of 1 to 5 mm;


(3) The impactor is the same as defined in § 572.189(a);


(4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the shoulder, its longitudinal axis is within ±0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane and perpendicular (±0.5 degrees) to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint on the impactor’s face is within 5 mm of the center of the upper arm pivot bolt (5000040) at contact with the test dummy, as shown in Figure U3 in appendix A to this subpart;


(5) The impactor impacts the dummy’s shoulder at 4.3±0.1 m/s.


(c) Performance criteria. The peak acceleration of the impactor is between 7.5 g’s and 10.5 g’s during the pendulum’s contact with the dummy.


§ 572.185 Thorax (upper torso) assembly.

(a) The thorax assembly of the dummy must meet the requirements of both (b) and (c) of this section. Section 572.185(b) specifies requirements for an individual rib drop test, and § 572.185(c) specifies requirements for a full-body thorax impact test.


(b) Individual rib drop test. For purposes of this test, the rib modules (175-4002), which are part of the thorax assembly (175-4000), are tested as individual units. When subjected to test procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the rib modules shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. Each rib is tested at both the 459 mm and 815 mm drop height tests described in paragraphs (b)(1)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.


(1) Test procedure. (i) Soak the rib modules (175-4002) in a test environment as specified in 572.189(n);


(ii) Mount the rib module rigidly in a drop test fixture as shown in Figure U7 in appendix A to this subpart with the impacted side of the rib facing up;


(iii) The drop test fixture contains a free fall guided mass of 7.78±0.01 kg that is of rigid construction and with a flat impact face 150±1.0 mm in diameter and an edge radius of ±0.25 mm;


(iv) Align the vertical longitudinal centerline of the drop mass so that the centerpoint of the downward-facing flat surface is aligned to impact the centerline of the rib rail guide system within ±2.5 mm.


(v) The impacting mass is dropped from the following heights:


(A) 459 ±5 mm


(B) 815 ±8 mm


(vi) A test cycle consists of one drop from each drop height specified in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section. Allow a period of not less than five (5) minutes between impacts in a single test cycle. Allow a period of not less than thirty (30) minutes between two separate cycles of the same rib module.


(2) Performance criteria.


(i) Each of the rib modules shall deflect as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, with the deflection measurements made with the internal rib module position transducer specified in § 572.189(d):


(A) Not less than 36 mm and not more than 40 mm when impacted by the mass dropped from 459 mm; and,


(B) Not less than 46 mm and not more than 51mm when impacted by the mass dropped from 815 mm.


(c) Full-body thorax impact test. The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing 175-4000. For this full-body thorax impact test, the dummy is tested as a complete assembly (drawing 175-0000) with the struck-side arm (175-3500, left arm; 175-3800, right arm) removed. The dummy’s thorax is equipped with deflection potentiometers as specified in drawing SA572-S69. When subjected to the test procedures specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the thorax shall meet the performance requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(2).


(1) Test Procedure. (i) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000), with struck-side arm (175-3500, left arm; 175-3800, right arm), shoulder foam pad (175-3010), and neoprene body suit (175-8000) removed, in a test environment as specified in § 572.189(n);


(ii) The dummy is seated, as shown in Figure U4 in appendix A to this subpart, on a flat, horizontal, rigid surface covered by two overlaid 2 mm thick Teflon sheets and with no back support of the dummy’s torso. The dummy’s torso spine backplate is vertical within ±2 degrees and the midsagittal plane of thorax is positioned perpendicular to the direction of the plane of motion of the impactor at contact with the thorax. The non-struck side arm is oriented vertically, pointing downward. The dummy’s legs are horizontal and symmetrical about the midsagittal plane with the distance between the innermost point on the opposite ankle at 100 ±5 mm;


(iii) The impactor is the same as defined in § 572.189(a);


(iv) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the thorax its longitudinal axis is within ±0.5 degrees of horizontal and perpendicular ±0.5 degrees to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint of the impactor’s face is within 5 mm of the impact point on the dummy’s middle rib shown in Figure U4 in appendix A to this subpart;


(v) The impactor impacts the dummy’s thorax at 5.5 m/s ±0.1 m/s.


(vi) Time zero is defined in § 572.189(k).


(2) Performance Criteria. (i) The individual rib modules shall conform to the following range of deflections:


(A) Upper rib not less than 34 mm and not greater than 41 mm;


(B) Middle rib not less than 37 mm and not greater than 45 mm;


(C) Lower rib not less than 37 mm and not greater than 44 mm.


(ii) The impactor force shall be computed as the product of the impact probe acceleration and its mass. The peak impactor force at any time after 6 ms from time zero shall be not less than 5100 N and not greater than 6200 N.


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]


§ 572.186 Abdomen assembly.

(a) The abdomen assembly (175-5000) is part of the dummy assembly shown in drawing 175-0000 including load sensors specified in § 572.189(e). When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the abdomen assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure.


(1) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000), without suit (175-8000) and shoulder foam pad (175-3010), as specified in § 572.189(n);


(2) The dummy is seated as shown in Figure U5 in appendix A to this subpart;


(3) The abdomen impactor is the same as specified in § 572.189(a) except that on its rectangular impact surface is affixed a special purpose block whose weight is 1.0 ±0.01 kg. The block is 70 mm high, 150 mm wide and 60 to 80 mm deep. The impact surface is flat, has a minimum Rockwell hardness of M85, and an edge radius of 4 to 5 mm. The block’s wide surface is horizontally oriented and centered on the longitudinal axis of the probe’s impact face as shown in Figure U5-A in appendix A to this subpart;


(4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the abdomen its longitudinal axis is within ±0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane and perpendicular ±0.5 degrees to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint on the impactor’s face is aligned within 5 mm of the center point of the middle load measuring sensor in the abdomen as shown in Figure U5;


(5) The impactor impacts the dummy’s abdomen at 4.0 m/s ±0.1 m/s;


(6) Time zero is defined in § 572.189(k).


(c) Performance criteria.


(1) The maximum sum of the forces of the three abdominal load sensors, specified in 572.189(e), shall be not less than 2200 N and not more than 2700 N and shall occur between 10 ms and 12.3 ms from time zero. The calculated sum of the three load cell forces must be concurrent in time.


(2) Maximum impactor force (impact probe acceleration multiplied by its mass) is not less than 4000 N and not more than 4800 N occurring between 10.6 ms and 13.0 ms from time zero.


§ 572.187 Lumbar spine.

(a) The lumbar spine assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 175-5500. For purposes of this test, the lumbar spine is mounted within the headform assembly 175-9000 as shown in Figure U1 in appendix A to this subpart. When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the lumbar spine-headform assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the lumbar spine-headform assembly in a test environment as specified in § 572.189(n);


(2) Attach the lumbar spine-headform assembly to the Part 572 pendulum test fixture per procedure in § 572.183(b)(2) and as shown in Figure U2-A in appendix A to this subpart. Torque the lumbar hex nut (p/n 9000057) on to the lumbar cable assembly (175-5506) to 50 ±5 in-lb;


(3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to allow it to fall freely to achieve an impact velocity of 6.05 ±0.1 m/s measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer (Figure 22) at the time the pendulum makes contact with its decelerating mechanism. The velocity-time history of the pendulum falls inside the corridor determined by the upper and lower boundaries specified in Table 1 to paragraph (b) of this section;


(4) Allow the lumbar spine to flex without the lumbar spine or the headform making contact with any object;


(5) Time zero is defined in § 572.189(j).


Table 1 to paragraph (b) – ES-2re Lumbar Spine Certification Pendulum Velocity Corridor

Upper boundary
Lower boundary
Time

(ms)
Velocity

(m/s)
Time

(ms)
Velocity

(m/s)
1.00.000.0−0.05
3.7−0.242.7−0.425
27.0−5.8024.5−6.50
30.0−6.50

(c) Performance criteria. (1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is to be characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as determined by integrating the filtered pendulum acceleration response from time-zero.


(2) The maximum rotation in the lateral direction of the reference plane of the headform (175-9000) as shown in Figure U2-B in appendix A to this subpart, shall be 45 to 55 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis of the pendulum occurring between 39 and 53 ms from time zero. Rotation of the headform-neck assembly shall be measured with potentiometers specified in § 572.189(c), installed as shown in drawing 175-9000, and calculated per procedure specified in Figure U2-B in appendix A to this subpart.


(3) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 37 ms to 57 ms after the time the peak translation-rotation value is reached.


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]


§ 572.188 Pelvis.

(a) The pelvis (175-6000) is part of the torso assembly shown in drawing 175-0000. The pelvis is equipped with a pubic symphysis load sensor in conformance with § 572.189(f) and mounted as shown in drawing (175-0000 sheet 4). When subjected to tests procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure.


(1) Soak the dummy assembly (175-0000) without suit (175-8000) and shoulder foam pad (175-3010) as specified in § 572.189(n);


(2) The dummy is seated as specified in Figure U6 in appendix A to this subpart;


(3) The pelvis impactor is the same as specified in § 572.189(a);


(4) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the pelvis its longitudinal axis is within ±0.5 degrees of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint on the impactor’s face is within 5 mm of the center of the H-point in the pelvis, as shown in Figure U6 in appendix A to this subpart;


(5) The impactor impacts the dummy’s pelvis at 4.3 ±0.1 m/s.


(6) Time zero is defined in § 572.189(k).


(c) Performance criteria. (1) The impactor force (probe acceleration multiplied by its mass) shall be not less than 4,700 N and not more than 5,400 N, occurring between 11.8 ms and 16.1 ms from time zero;


(2) The pubic symphysis load, measured with load cell specified in § 572.189(f) shall be not less than 1,230 N and not more than 1,590 N occurring between 12.2 ms and 17.0 ms from time zero.


[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]


§ 572.189 Instrumentation and test conditions.

(a) The test probe for lateral shoulder, thorax without arm, abdomen, and pelvis impact tests is the same as that specified in § 572.36(a) and the impact probe has a minimum mass moment of inertia in yaw of 9,000 kg-cm
2, a free air resonant frequency not less than 1,000 Hz and the probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions to mount an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. All hardware attached directly to the impactor and one-third (
1/3) of the mass of the suspension cables must be included in the calculations of the total impactor mass. The sum mass of the attachments and
1/3 cable mass must not exceed 5 percent of the total pendulum mass. No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the test probe, including velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


(b) Accelerometers for the head, the thoracic spine, and the pelvis conform to specifications of SA572-S4.


(c) Rotary potentiometer for the neck and lumbar spine certification tests conforms to SA572-53.


(d) Linear position transducer for the thoracic rib conforms to SA572-S69.


(e) Load sensors for the abdomen conform to specifications of SA572-S75.


(f) Load sensor for the pubic symphysis conforms to specifications of SA572-77.


(g) Load sensor for the lumbar spine conforms to specifications of SA572-76.


(h) Instrumentation and sensors conform to the Recommended Practice SAE J-211 (Mar. 1995) – Instrumentation for Impact Test unless noted otherwise.


(i) All instrumented response signal measurements shall be treated to the following specifications:


(1) Head acceleration – Digitally filtered CFC 1000;


(2) Neck and lumbar spine rotations – Digitally filtered CFC 180;


(3)Neck and lumbar spine pendulum accelerations – Digitally filtered CFC 60;


(4) Pelvis, shoulder, thorax without arm, and abdomen impactor accelerations – Digitally filtered CFC 180;


(5) Abdominal and pubic symphysis force – Digitally filtered at CFC 600;


(6) Thorax deflection – Digitally filtered CFC 180.


(j)(1) Filter the pendulum acceleration data using a SAE J211 CFC 60 filter.


(2) Determine the time when the filtered pendulum accelerometer data first crosses the −10 g level (T10).


(3) Calculate time-zero: T0 = T10−Tm,



Where:

Tm = 1.417 ms for the Neck Test

= 1.588 ms for the Lumbar Spine Test

(4) Set the data time-zero to the sample number nearest to the calculated T0.


(k)(1) Filter the pendulum acceleration data using a SAE J211 CFC 180 filter.


(2) Determine the time when the filtered pendulum accelerometer data first crosses the −1.0 m/s
2 (−.102 g) acceleration level (T0).


(3) Set the data time-zero to the sample number of the new T0.


(l) Mountings for the head, spine and pelvis accelerometers shall have no resonance frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(m) Limb joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1 to 2 G’s, which just supports the limb’s weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2 G’s throughout the range of the limb motion.


(n) Performance tests are conducted, unless specified otherwise, at any temperature from 20.6 to 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and at any relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 percent after exposure of the dummy to those conditions for a period of not less than 4 hours.


(o) Certification tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy shall be separated in time by a period of not less than thirty (30) minutes unless otherwise specified.


Appendix A to Subpart U of Part 572 – Figures










[71 FR 75331, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 33921, June 16, 2008]


Subpart V – SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, Small Adult Female


Source:71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.190 Incorporated materials.

(a) The following materials are hereby incorporated into this Subpart by reference:


(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, “Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD, July 1, 2008,”


(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled “Drawings and Specifications for the SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572 Subpart V, July 1, 2008,” consisting of:


(i) Drawing No. 180-0000, SID-IIsD Complete Assembly;


(ii) Drawing No. 180-1000, 6 Axis Head Assembly;


(iii) Drawing No. 180-2000, Neck Assembly;


(iv) Drawing No. 180-3000, Upper Torso Assembly;


(v) Drawing No. 180-3005, Washer, Clamping;


(vi) Drawing No. 9000021, Screw, SHCS
3/8-16 × 1 NYLOK;


(vii) Drawing No. 900005, Screw, SHCS
1/4-20 ×
5/8 NYLOK;


(viii) Drawing No. 180-4000, Lower Torso Assembly Complete;


(ix) Drawing No. 180-5000-1, Complete Leg Assembly, Left;


(x) Drawing No. 180-5000-2, Complete Leg Assembly, Right;


(xi) Drawing No. 180-6000-1, Arm Assembly Left Molded;


(xii) Drawing No. 180-6000-2, Arm Assembly Right Molded; and,


(xiii) Drawing No. 180-9000, SID-IIsD Headform Assembly.


(3) A procedures manual entitled, “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, July 1, 2008,” incorporated by reference in § 572.191;


(4) SAE Recommended Practice J211, Rev. Mar 95 “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation”; and,


(5) SAE J1733 of 1994-12, “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing.”


(b) The Director of the Federal Register approved the materials incorporated by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies of the materials may be inspected at the Department of Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590, telephone (202) 366-9826, and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA), and in electronic format through Regulations.gov. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_locations.html. For information on the availability and inspection of this material at Regulations.gov, call 1-877-378-5457, or go to: http://www.regulations.gov.


(c) The incorporated materials are available as follows:


(1) The Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD, July 1, 2008, referred to in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the package entitled Drawings and Specifications for SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572 Subpart V, July 1, 2008, referred to in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, and the PADI document referred to in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, are available in electronic format through www.Regulations.gov and in paper format from Leet-Melbrook, Division of New RT, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879, (301) 670-0090.


(2) The SAE materials referred to in paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of this section are available from the Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, telephone 1-877-606-7323.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29894, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.191 General description.

(a) The SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, small adult female, is defined by:


(1) The drawings and specifications contained in the “Drawings and Specifications for SID-IIsD Small Female Crash Test Dummy, Part 572 Subpart V, July 1, 2008,” which includes the technical drawings and specifications described in Drawing 180-0000, the titles of which are listed in Table A;


Table A

Component assembly
Drawing

number
6 Axis Head Assembly180-1000
Neck Assembly180-2000
Upper Torso Assembly180-3000
Clamping Washer180-3005
Lower Torso Assembly Complete180-4000
Complete Leg Assembly, Left180-5000-1
Complete Leg Assembly, Right180-5000-2
Arm Assembly Left Molded180-6000-1
Arm Assembly Right Molded180-6000-2

(2) The “Parts/Drawing List, Part 572 Subpart V, SID-IIsD,” dated July 1, 2008 and containing 7 pages,


(3) A listing of available transducers-crash test sensors for the SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, 5th percentile adult female, is shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5, dated July 1, 2008,


(4) “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the SID-IIsD Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, July 1, 2008,” and,


(5) Sign convention for signal outputs reference document SAE J1733 Information Report, titled “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,” dated July 12, 1994, incorporated by reference in § 572.200(k).


(b) Exterior dimensions of the SID-IIsD Small Adult Female Side Impact Crash Test Dummy are shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 3 of 5, dated July 1, 2008.


(c) Weights and center of gravity locations of body segments are shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 4 of 5, dated July 1, 2008.


(d) Adjacent segments are joined in a manner such that, except for contacts existing under static conditions, there is no additional contact between metallic elements of adjacent body segments throughout the range of motion.


(e) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this Subpart in every respect before use in any test similar to that set forth in Standard 214, Side Impact Protection (49 CFR 571.214).


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.192 Head assembly.

(a) The head assembly consists of the head (180-1000) and a set of three (3) accelerometers in conformance with specifications in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and mounted as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When tested to the procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the head assembly shall meet performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. The head shall be tested according to the procedure specified in 49 CFR 572.112(a).


(c) Performance criteria.


(1) When the head assembly is dropped from either the right or left lateral incline orientations in accordance with procedure in § 572.112(a), the measured peak resultant acceleration shall be between 115 g and 137 g;


(2) The resultant acceleration-time curve shall be unimodal to the extent that oscillations occurring after the main acceleration pulse shall not exceed 15% (zero to peak) of the main pulse;


(3) The longitudinal acceleration vector (anterior-posterior direction) shall not exceed 15 g.


§ 572.193 Neck assembly.

(a) The neck assembly consists of parts shown in drawing 180-2000. For purposes of this test, the neck assembly is mounted within the headform assembly (180-9000) as shown in Figure V1 in appendix A to this subpart. When subjected to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the neck-headform assembly shall meet the performance requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure.


(1) Soak the assembly in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j);


(2) Attach the neck-headform assembly, as shown in Figure V2-A or V2-B in appendix A to this subpart, to the 49 CFR Part 572 pendulum test fixture (Figure 22, 49 CFR 572.33) in either the left or right lateral impact orientations, respectively, so that the midsagittal plane of the neck-headform assembly is vertical and at right angle (90 ±1 degrees) to the plane of motion of the pendulum longitudinal centerline;


(3) Release the pendulum from a height sufficient to achieve a velocity of 5.57 ±0.06 m/s measured at the center of the pendulum accelerometer, as shown in 49 CFR Part 572 Figure 15, at the instant the pendulum makes contact with the decelerating mechanism;


(4) The neck flexes without the neck-headform assembly making contact with any object;


(5) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum mounted striker plate and the pendulum deceleration mechanism;


(6) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between successive tests on the same neck assembly.


(c) Performance Criteria.


(1) The pendulum deceleration pulse is characterized in terms of decrease in velocity as obtained by integrating the pendulum acceleration output from time zero:


Time(ms)
Peakpendulumdelta-V(m/s)
10.0−2.20 to −2.80
15.0−3.30 to −4.10
20.0−4.40 to −5.40
25.0−5.40 to −6.10
>25.0 −5.50 to −6.20

(2) The maximum translation-rotation of the midsagittal plane of the headform disk (180-9061 or 9062) in the lateral direction measured, with the rotation transducers specified in 49 CFR 572.200(e) shall be 71 to 81 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis of the pendulum (see Figure V2-C in appendix A to this subpart) occurring between 50 and 70 ms from time zero;


(3) Peak occipital condyle moment shall not be higher than −36 Nm and not lower than −44 Nm. The moment measured by the upper neck load cell (Mx) shall be adjusted by the following formula: Mx(oc)
1
= Mx + 0.01778Fy;




1 Mx(oc) is the moment at occipital condyle (Newton-meters) and Fy is the lateral shear force (Newtons) measured by the load cell.


(4) The decaying moment shall cross the 0 Nm line after peak moment between 102 ms-126 ms after time zero.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.194 Shoulder.

(a) The shoulder structure is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing 180-3000. For the shoulder impact test, the dummy is tested as a complete assembly (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped with T1 laterally oriented accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d), and deflection potentiometer as specified in 180-3881 configured for shoulder and installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the shoulder shall meet the performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).


(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and cotton underwear pants on a certification bench, specified in Figure V3 in appendix A to this subpart, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2 mm thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet;


(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V4-A in appendix A to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.


(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.


(5) While maintaining the dummy’s position as specified in paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6 ±2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V4-B in appendix A to this subpart.


(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the feet are vertical and as close together as possible.


(7) Orient the arm to point forward at 90 ±2 degrees relative to the inferior-superior orientation of the upper torso spine box incline.


(8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).


(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the dummy’s arm rotation centerline (ref. item 23 in drawing 180-3000) the impactor’s longitudinal axis is within ±1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor face at contact is within 2 mm of the shoulder yoke assembly rotation centerline (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V4-A in appendix A to this subpart.


(10) The dummy’s arm-shoulder is impacted at 4.3 ±0.1 m/s with the impactor meeting the alignment and contact point requirements of paragraph (b)(9) of this section.


(11) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between successive tests of the same shoulder assembly.


(c) Performance criteria.


(1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy’s arm, the shoulder shall compress not less than 28 mm and not more than 37 mm measured by the potentiometer specified in (a);


(2) Peak lateral acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be less than 17 g and not more than 22 g;


(3) Peak impactor acceleration shall be not less than 13 g and not more than 18 g.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.195 Thorax with arm.

(a) The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing 180-3000. For the thorax with arm impact test, the dummy is tested as a complete assembly (drawing 180-0000). The dummy’s thorax is equipped with T1 and T12 laterally oriented accelerometers as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d), and deflection potentiometers for the thorax and shoulder as specified in 180-3881, installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the thorax shall meet performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).


(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and cotton underwear pants on a certification bench, specified in Figure V3, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.


(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V5-A, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.


(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.


(5) While maintaining the dummy’s position as specified in paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6 ±2.0 degrees relative to horizontal as shown in Figure V5-B in appendix A to this subpart.


(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the feet are vertical and as close together as possible.


(7) Orient the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior orientation of the spine box.


(8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).


(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the dummy’s arm, its longitudinal axis is within ±1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor face is within 2 mm of the vertical midpoint of the second thoracic rib and coincident with a line parallel to the seat back incline passing through the center of the shoulder yoke assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V5-A in appendix A to this subpart.


(10) The dummy’s arm is impacted at 6.7 ±0.1 m/s.


(11) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact probe and the arm.


(12) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between successive tests of the same thorax assembly.


(c) Performance criteria.


(1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy’s arm, the thoracic ribs and the shoulder shall conform to the following range of deflections:


(i) Shoulder not less than 31 mm and not more than 40 mm;


(ii) Upper thorax rib not less than 25 mm and not more than 32 mm;


(iii) Middle thorax rib not less than 30 mm and not more than 36 mm;


(iv) Lower thorax rib not less than 32 mm and not more than 38 mm;


(2) Peak lateral acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be less than 34 g and not more than 43 g, and the lower spine (T12) not less than 29 g and not more than 37 g;


(3) Peak impactor acceleration after 5 ms after time zero shall be not less than 30 g and not more than 36 g.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.196 Thorax without arm.

(a) The thorax is part of the upper torso assembly shown in drawing 180-3000. For this thorax test, the dummy is tested as a complete assembly (drawing 180-0000) with the arm (180-6000) on the impacted side removed. The dummy’s thorax is equipped with T1 and T12 laterally oriented accelerometers as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and with deflection potentiometers for the thorax as specified in drawing 180-3881, installed as shown in drawing 180-0000 sheet 2 of 5. When subjected to the test procedure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the thorax shall meet the performance requirements set forth in paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).


(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and cotton underwear pants on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3 in appendix A to this subpart, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.


(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V6-A, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.


(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.


(5) While maintaining the dummy’s position as specified in paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6 ±2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V6-B in appendix A to this subpart.


(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the feet are vertical and as close together as possible.


(7) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).


(8) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the thorax, its longitudinal axis is within 1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor face is within 2 mm of the vertical midpoint of the second thorax rib and coincident with a line parallel to the seat back incline passing through the center of the shoulder yoke assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V6-A in appendix A to this subpart.


(9) The dummy’s thorax is impacted at 4.3 ±0.1 m/s.


(10) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between successive tests of the same thorax assembly.


(c) Performance criteria.


(1) While the impactor is in contact with the dummy’s thorax, the ribs shall conform to the following range of deflections:


(i) Upper thorax rib not less than 32 mm and not more than 40 mm;


(ii) Middle thorax rib not less than 39 mm and not more than 45 mm;


(iii) Lower thorax rib not less than 35 mm and not more than 43 mm;


(2) Peak acceleration of the upper spine (T1) shall not be less than 13 g and not more than 17 g and the lower spine (T12) not less than 7 g and not more than 11 g;


(3) Peak impactor acceleration shall not be less than 14 g and not more than 18 g.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29895, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.197 Abdomen.

(a) The abdomen assembly is part of the upper torso assembly (180-3000) and is represented by two ribs (180-3368) and two linear deflection potentiometers (180-3881). The abdomen test is conducted on the complete dummy assembly (180-0000) with the arm (180-6000) on the impacted side removed. The dummy is equipped with a lower spine laterally oriented accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d) and deflection potentiometers specified in drawing 180-3881, installed as shown in sheet 2 of drawing 180-0000. When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the abdomen shall meet performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).


(2) Seat the dummy, outfitted with the torso jacket (180-3450) and cotton underwear pants on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3, the seat pan and the seatback surfaces of which are covered with a 2 mm thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.


(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V7-A in Appendix A to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.


(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.


(5) While maintaining the dummy’s position as specified in paragraph (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6 ±2.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V7-B in appendix A to this subpart);


(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the feet are vertical and as close together as possible;


(7) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(b);


(8) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the abdomen, its longitudinal axis is within ±1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy and the centerpoint of the impactor’s face is within 2 mm of the vertical midpoint between the two abdominal ribs and coincident with a line parallel to the seat back incline passing through the center of the shoulder yoke assembly arm rotation pivot (drawing 180-3327), as shown in Figure V7-A in appendix A to this subpart;


(9) The dummy’s abdomen is impacted at 4.3 ±0.1 m/s.


(10) Allow a period of at least thirty (30) minutes between successive tests of the same abdomen assembly.


(c) Performance criteria. (1) While the impact probe is in contact with the dummy’s abdomen, the deflection of the upper abdominal rib shall be not less than 36 mm and not more than 47 mm, and the lower abdominal rib not less than 33 mm and not more than 44 mm.


(2) Peak acceleration of the lower spine (T12) laterally oriented accelerometer shall be not less than 9 g and not more than 14 g;


(3) Peak impactor acceleration shall be not less than 12 g and not more than 16 g.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.198 Pelvis acetabulum.

(a) The acetabulum is part of the lower torso assembly shown in drawing 180-4000. The acetabulum test is conducted by impacting the side of the lower torso of the assembled dummy (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped with a laterally oriented pelvis accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d), acetabulum load cell SA572-S68, mounted as shown in sheet 2 of 5 of drawing 180-0000, and an unused and certified pelvis plug (180-4450). When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis shall meet performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).


(2) Seat the dummy, without the torso jacket (180-3450) and without cotton underwear pants, as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A to this subpart, on a calibration bench, specified in Figure V3 in appendix A to this subpart, with the seatpan and the seatback surfaces covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet;


(3) Align the outermost portion of the pelvis flesh of the impacted side of the seated dummy tangent to a vertical plane located within 10 mm of the side edge of the bench as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A to this subpart, while the midsagittal plane of the dummy is in vertical orientation.


(4) Push the dummy at the knees and at mid-sternum of the upper torso with just sufficient horizontally oriented force towards the seat back until the back of the upper torso is in contact with the seat back.


(5) While maintaining the dummy’s position as specified in paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount (drawing 180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is 24.6 ±1.0 degrees relative to horizontal, as shown in Figure V8-B in appendix A to this subpart;


(6) Adjust orientation of the legs such that they are symmetrical about the mid-sagittal plane, the thighs touch the seat pan, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to each other, the heels touch the designated foot support surface and the feet are vertical and as close together as possible.


(7) Rotate the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior orientation of the spine box.


(8) The impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(a).


(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the pelvis, its longitudinal axis is within ±1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy. The centerpoint of the impactor’s face is in line within 2 mm of the longitudinal centerline of the
1/4-20x
1/2 flat head cap screw through the center of the acetabulum load cell (SA572-S68), as shown in Figure V8-A in appendix A to this subpart;


(10) The dummy’s pelvis is impacted at the acetabulum at 6.7 ±0.1 m/s.


(11) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact probe and the pelvis plug.


(12) Allow a period of at least 120 minutes between successive tests of the same pelvis assembly.


(c) Performance criteria. While the impactor is in contact with the pelvis:


(1) Peak acceleration of the impactor is not less than 38 g and not more than 47 g;


(2) Peak lateral acceleration of the pelvis after 6 ms after time zero is not less than 34 g and not more than 42 g;


(3) Peak acetabulum force is not less than 3.60 kN and not more than 4.30 kN.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.199 Pelvis iliac.

(a) The iliac is part of the lower torso assembly shown in drawing 180-4000. The iliac test is conducted by impacting the side of the lower torso of the assembled dummy (drawing 180-0000). The dummy is equipped with a laterally oriented pelvis accelerometer as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(d), and iliac wing load cell SA572-S66, mounted as shown in sheet 2 of 5 of drawing 180-0000. When subjected to the test procedure as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, the pelvis shall meet performance requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.


(b) Test procedure. (1) Soak the dummy assembly (180-0000) in a test environment as specified in 49 CFR 572.200(j).


(2) Seat the dummy, without the torso jacket and without cotton underwear pants, as shown in Figure V9-A in appendix A to this subpart, on a flat, rigid, horizontal surface covered with a 2-mm-thick PTFE (Teflon) sheet.


(3) The legs are outstretched in front of the dummy such that they are symmetrical about the midsagittal plane, the thighs touch the seated surface, the inner part of the right and left legs at the knees are as close as possible to each other, and the feet are in full dorsiflexion and as close together as possible.


(4) Orient the arm downward to the lowest detent such that the longitudinal centerline of the arm is parallel to the inferior-superior orientation of the spine box.


(5) The midsagittal plane of the dummy is vertical, and superior surface of the lower half neck assembly load cell replacement (180-3815) in the lateral direction is within ±1 degree relative to the horizontal as shown in Figure V9-A.


(6) While maintaining the dummy’s position as specified in paragraphs (b)(3), (4) and (5) of this section, the top of the shoulder rib mount (180-3352) orientation in the fore-and-aft direction is within ±1.0 degree relative to horizontal as shown in Figure V9-B in Appendix A to this subpart.


(7) The pelvis impactor is specified in 49 CFR 572.200(c).


(8) The dummy is positioned with respect to the impactor such that the longitudinal centerline of the impact probe is in line with the longitudinal centerline of the iliac load cell access hole, and the 88.9 mm dimension of the probe’s impact surface is aligned horizontally.


(9) The impactor is guided, if needed, so that at contact with the pelvis, the longitudinal axis of the impactor is within ±1 degree of a horizontal plane and perpendicular to the midsagittal plane of the dummy.


(10) The dummy’s pelvis is impacted at the iliac location at 4.3±0.1 m/s.


(11) Allow a period of at least 120 minutes between successive tests of the same pelvis assembly.


(c) Performance criteria. While the impactor is in contact with the pelvis:


(1) Peak acceleration of the impactor is not less than 36 g and not more than 45 g;


(2) Peak acceleration of the pelvis is not less than 28 g and not more than 39 g;


(3) Peak iliac force is not less than 4.10 kN and not more than 5.10 kN.


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]


§ 572.200 Instrumentation and test conditions.

(a) The test probe for shoulder, lateral thorax, and pelvis-acetabulum impact tests is the same as that specified in 49 CFR 572.137(a) except that its impact face diameter is 120.70 ±0.25 mm and it has a minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-cm
2.


(b) The test probe for the lateral abdomen impact test is the same as that specified in 572.137(a) except that its impact face diameter is 76.20 ±0.25 mm and it has a minimum mass moment of inertia of 3646 kg-cm
2.


(c) The test probe for the pelvis-iliac impact tests is the same as that specified in 49 CFR 572.137(a) except that it has a rectangular flat impact surface 50.8 × 88.9 mm for a depth of at least 76 mm and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 5000 kg-cm
2.


(d) Accelerometers for the head, the thoracic spine, and the pelvis conform to specifications of SA572-S4.


(e) Rotary potentiometers for the neck-headform assembly conform to SA572-S51.


(f) Instrumentation and sensors conform to the Recommended Practice SAE J-211 (March 1995), Instrumentation for Impact Test, unless noted otherwise.


(g) All instrumented response signal measurements shall be treated to the following specifications:


(1) Head acceleration – digitally filtered CFC 1000;


(2) Neck-headform assembly translation-rotation – digitally filtered CFC 60;


(3) Neck pendulum, T1 and T12 thoracic spine and pelvis accelerations – digitally filtered CFC 180;


(4) Neck forces (for the purpose of occipital condyle calculation) and moments – digitally filtered at CFC 600;


(5) Pelvis, shoulder, thorax and abdomen impactor accelerations – digitally filtered CFC 180;


(6) Acetabulum and iliac wings forces – digitally filtered at CFC 600;


(7) Shoulder, thorax, and abdomen deflection – digitally filtered CFC 600.


(h) Mountings for the head, thoracic spine and pelvis accelerometers shall have no resonant frequency within a range of 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class;


(i) Leg joints of the test dummy are set at the force between 1 to 2 g, which just support the limb’s weight when the limbs are extended horizontally forward. The force required to move a limb segment does not exceed 2 g throughout the range of the limb motion.


(j) Performance tests are conducted, unless specified otherwise, at any temperature from 20.6 to 22.2 degrees C. (69 to 72 degrees F.) and at any relative humidity from 10% to 70% after exposure of the dummy to those conditions for a period of 4 hours.


(k) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity shall conform to the Sign Convention For Vehicle Crash Testing, Surface Vehicle Information Report, SAE J1733, 1994-12 (refer to § 572.191(a)(5)).


[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]


Appendix A to Subpart V of Part 572 – Figures


















[71 FR 75370, Dec. 14, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 29896, June 23, 2009]


Subpart W – Q3s Three-Year-Old Child Test Dummy


Source:85 FR 69925, Nov. 3, 2020, unless otherwise noted.

§ 572.210 Incorporation by reference.

Link to an amendment published at 86 FR 66218, Nov. 22, 2021.

Certain material is incorporated by reference (IBR) into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, NHTSA must publish a document in the Federal Register and the material must be available to the public. All approved material is available for inspection at the Department of Transportation, Docket Operations, Room W12-140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE, Washington DC 20590, telephone 202-366-9826, and is available from the sources listed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section. It is also available for inspection at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, email [email protected] or go to www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html.


(a) NHTSA Technical Information Services, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE, Washington, DC 20590, telephone 202-366-5965.


(1) A parts/drawing list entitled, “Parts/Drawings List, Part 572 Subpart W, Q3s Three-Year-Old Child Side Impact Dummy, May 2016,” (Parts/Drawings List); IBR approved for § 572.211.


(2) A drawings and inspection package entitled, “Drawings and Specifications for Q3S Three-Year-Old Child Test Dummy, Part 572 Subpart W, May 2016,” (Drawings and Specifications); IBR approved for §§ 572.211, 572.212, 572.213, 572.214, 572.215, 572.216, 572.217, 572.218, and 572.219.


(3) A procedures manual entitled “Procedures for Assembly, Disassembly, and Inspection (PADI) of the Q3s Child Side Impact Crash Test Dummy, May 2016,” (PADI); IBR approved for §§ 572.211, 572.215(b), 572.216(b), and 572.219(a).


(b) SAE International, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096, call 1-877-606-7323, https://www.sae.org/.


(1) SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, Rev. Mar 95, “Instrumentation for Impact Tests – Part 1 – Electronic Instrumentation,” (SAE J211); IBR approved for § 572.219;


(2) SAE Information Report J1733 of 1994-12, “Sign Convention for Vehicle Crash Testing,” December 1994, (SAE J1733); IBR approved for § 572.219.


§ 572.211 General description.

(a) The Q3s Three-Year-Old Child Test Dummy is defined by the following materials:


(1) The Parts/Drawings List (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210);


(2) The Drawings and Specifications (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210);


(3) The PADI (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210).


(b) The structural properties of the dummy are such that the dummy conforms to this subpart in every respect before use in any test.


§ 572.212 Head assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The head assembly for this test consists of the complete head (drawing 020-1200) with head accelerometer assembly (drawing 020-1013A), and a half mass simulated upper neck load cell (drawing 020-1050).


(b) When the head assembly is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Frontal head qualification test. When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 376.0 ± 1.0 mm in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG shall have a value between 255 G and 300 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The lateral acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to peak).


(2) Lateral head qualification test. When the head assembly is dropped from a height of 200.0 ± 1.0 mm in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the peak resultant acceleration at the location of the accelerometers at the head CG shall have a value between 114 G and 140 G. The resultant acceleration vs. time history curve shall be unimodal; oscillations occurring after the main pulse must be less than 10 percent of the peak resultant acceleration. The X-component acceleration shall not exceed 15 G (zero to peak).


(c) The test procedure for the head assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the head assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2) Prior to the test, clean the impact surface of the skin and the impact plate surface with isopropyl alcohol, trichloroethane, or an equivalent. The skin of the head and the impact plate surface must be clean and dry for testing.


(3)(i) For the frontal head test, suspend and orient the head assembly with the forehead facing the impact surface as shown in figure W1 in appendix A to this subpart. The lowest point on the forehead must be 376.0 ± 1.0 mm from the impact surface. Assure that the head is horizontal laterally. Adjust the head angle so that the upper neck load cell simulator is 28 ± 2 degrees forward from the vertical while assuring that the head remains horizontal laterally.


(ii) For the lateral head test, the head is dropped on the aspect that opposes the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A left drop set up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale left side impact is depicted in figure W2 in appendix A to this subpart. A right drop set-up would be the mirror image of that shown in figure W2. Suspend and orient the head assembly as shown in figure W2. The lowest point on the impact side of the head must be 200.0 ± 1.0 mm from the impact surface. Assure that the head is horizontal in the fore-aft direction. Adjust the head angle so that the head base plane measured from the base surface of the upper neck load cell simulator is 35 ± 2 degrees forward from the vertical while assuring that the head remains horizontal in the fore-aft direction.


(4) Drop the head assembly from the specified height by means that ensure a smooth, instant release onto a rigidly supported flat horizontal steel plate which is 50.8 mm thick and 610 mm square. The impact surface shall be clean, dry and have a surface finish of not less than 0.2 microns (RMS) and not more than 2.0 microns (RMS).


(5) Allow at least 2 hours between successive tests on the same head.


§ 572.213 Neck assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a)(1) The neck and headform assembly for the purposes of the fore-aft neck flexion and lateral neck flexion qualification tests, as shown in figures W3 and W4 in appendix A to this subpart, consists of the headform (drawing 020-9050, sheet 1) with angular rate sensor installed (drawing SA572-S58), six-channel neck/lumbar load cell (drawing SA572-S8), neck assembly (drawing 020-2400), neck/torso interface plate (drawing 020-9056) and pendulum interface plate (drawing 020-9051) with angular rate sensor installed (drawing SA572-S58).


(2) The neck assembly for the purposes of the neck torsion qualification test, as shown in figure W5 in appendix A to this subpart, consists of the neck twist fixture (drawing DL210-200) with rotary potentiometer installed (drawing SA572-S51), neck adaptor plate assembly (drawing DL210-220), neck assembly (drawing 020-2400), six-channel neck/lumbar load cell (drawing SA572-S8), and twist fixture end plate (drawing DL210-210).


(b) When the neck and headform assembly as defined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, or the neck assembly as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Fore-aft neck flexion qualification test. (i) Plane D, referenced in figure W3 in appendix A to this subpart, shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 69.5 degrees and 81.0 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within these angles, the peak moment measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S8) shall have a value between 41.5 N-m and 50.7 N-m.


(ii) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 45 to 55 ms after the time the peak rotation value is reached.


(iii) All instrumentation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.


(iv) The headform rotation shall be calculated by the following formula with the integration beginning at time zero:


Headform rotation (deg) = ∫ [(Headform Angular Rate)y−(Pendulum Angular Rate)y] dt

(v) (Headform Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the headform (drawing 020-9050, sheet 1), and (Pendulum Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the pendulum interface plate (drawing 020-9051).


(2) Lateral neck flexion qualification test. (i) Plane D, referenced in Figure W4 in appendix A to this subpart, shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 76.5 degrees and 87.5 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within these angles, the peak moment measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S8) shall have a value between 25.3 N-m and 32.0 N-m.


(ii) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 61 to 71 ms after the time the peak rotation value is reached.


(iii) All instrumentation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the neck and pendulum are parallel.


(iv) The headform rotation shall be calculated by the following formula with the integration beginning at time zero:


Headform rotation (deg) = ∫ [(Headform Angular Rate)y−(Pendulum Angular Rate)y] dt

(v) (Headform Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the headform (drawing 020-9050, sheet 1), and (Pendulum Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the pendulum interface plate (drawing 020-9051).


(3) Neck torsion qualification test. (i) The neck twist fixture (drawing DL210-200), referenced in figure W5 in appendix A to this subpart, shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 74.5 degrees and 91.0 degrees, as measured by the rotary potentiometer (drawing SA572-S51). During the time interval while the rotation is within these angles, the peak moment measured by the neck transducer (drawing SA572-S8) shall have a value between 8.0 N-m and 10.0 N-m.


(ii) The decaying neck twist fixture rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 85 to 102 ms after the time the peak rotation value is reached.


(iii) All instrumentation data channels are defined to be zero when the zero pins are installed such that the neck is not in torsion.


(c) The test procedure for the neck assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the neck assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2)(i) For the fore-aft neck flexion test, mount the neck and headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, on the pendulum, described in figure 22 to § 572.33, so that the midsagittal plane of the headform is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum, and with the neck placement such that the front side of the neck is closest to the honeycomb material as shown in figure W3 in appendix A to this subpart.


(ii) For the lateral neck flexion test, the test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A right flexion test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale right side impact is depicted in figure W4 in appendix A to this subpart. A left flexion test set-up would be depicted by a mirror image of all components beneath the pendulum interface plate in Figure W4. Mount the neck and headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, on the pendulum, described by figure 22 to § 572.33, so that the midsagittal plane of the headform is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum, and with the neck placement such that the right (or left) side of the neck is closest to the honeycomb material as shown in figure W4.


(iii) For the neck torsion test, the test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A right torsion test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale right side impact is depicted in figure W5 in appendix A to this subpart. A left flexion test set-up would be a mirror image of that shown in figure W5. Mount the neck assembly, defined in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, on the pendulum, described by figure 22 to § 572.33, as shown in figure W5.


(3)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height to achieve an impact velocity of 4.7 ± 0.1 m/s for fore-aft flexion, 3.8 ± 0.1 m/s for lateral flexion, and 3.6 ± 0.1 m/s for torsion, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum at time zero.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse that meets the velocity change as specified in table 1 to this section. Integrate the pendulum accelerometer data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve beginning at time zero.


(iii) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material.


Table 1 to § 572.213

Time

(ms)

Fore-aft

Flexion

(m/s)

Time

(ms)

Lateral Flexion

(m/s)

Time

(ms)

Torsion

(m/s)

101.1-2.1101.7-2.2100.9-1.3
202.8-3.8152.5-3.0151.4-2.0
304.1-5.1203.4-3.9202.0-2.6

§ 572.214 Shoulder assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The shoulder assembly for this test consists of the torso assembly (drawing 020-4500) with string pot assembly (drawing SA572-S38 or SA572-S39) installed.


(b) When the center of the shoulder of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 020-0100) is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to § 572.219, at 3.6 ± 0.1 m/s according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) Maximum lateral shoulder displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with the string potentiometer assembly (drawing SA572-S38 or SA572-S39), must not be less than 17.0 mm and not more than 22.0 mm. The peak force, measured by the impact probe as defined in § 572.219 and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, shall have a value between 1123 N and 1437 N.


(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its measured deceleration.


(c) The test procedure for the shoulder assembly is as follows:


(1) The dummy is clothed in the Q3s suit (drawing 020-8001). No additional clothing or shoes are placed on the dummy.


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) The shoulder test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A left shoulder test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale left side impact is depicted in figure W6 in appendix A to this subpart. A right shoulder set-up would be a mirror image of that shown in figure W6. Seat the dummy on the qualification bench described in figure V3 to § 572.194, the seat pan and seat back surfaces of which are covered with thin sheets of PTFE (Teflon) (nominal stock thickness: 2 to 3 mm) along the impact side of the bench.


(4) Position the dummy on the bench as shown in Figure W6, with the ribs making contact with the seat back oriented 24.6 degrees relative to vertical, the legs extended forward along the seat pan oriented 21.6 degrees relative to horizontal with the knees spaced 40 mm apart. Position the arms so that the upper arms are parallel to the seat back (±2 degrees) and the lower arms are parallel to the dummy’s sagittal plane and perpendicular to the upper arms. Move the elbows inward (medially) until initial contact occurs between the sleeve and the portion of the suit covering the thorax while maintaining the relationships between the arms, seat back, and sagittal plane.


(5) The target point of the impact is a point on the shoulder that is 15 mm above and perpendicular to the midpoint of a line connecting the centers of the bolt heads of the two lower bolts (part #5000010) that connect the upper arm assembly (020-9750) to the shoulder ball retaining ring (020-3533).


(6) Impact the shoulder with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal centerline should be horizontal (±1 degree), and the centerline of the probe should be within 2 mm of the target point.


(7) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(8) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


§ 572.215 Thorax with arm assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The thorax assembly for this test consists of the torso assembly (drawing 020-4500) with an IR-TRACC (drawing SA572-S37) installed.


(b) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 020-0100) is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to § 572.219 at 5.0 ± 0.1 m/s according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) Maximum lateral thorax displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with the IR-TRACC (drawing SA572-S37) and processed as set out in the PADI (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210), shall have a value between 22.5 mm and 27.5 mm. The peak force occurring after 5 ms, measured by the impact probe as defined in § 572.219 and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, shall have a value between 1360 N and 1695 N.


(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its measured deceleration.


(3) Time zero is defined as the time of contact between the impact probe and the arm. All channels should be at a zero level at this point.


(c) The test procedure for the thorax with arm assembly is as follows:


(1) The dummy is clothed in the Q3s suit (drawing 020-8001). No additional clothing or shoes are placed on the dummy.


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) The test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A left thorax test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale left side impact is depicted in figure W7 in appendix A to this subpart. A right thorax set-up would be a mirror image of that shown in figure W7. Seat the dummy on the qualification bench described in figure V3 to § 572.194, the seat pan and seat back surfaces of which are covered with thin sheets of PTFE (Teflon) (nominal stock thickness: 2 to 3 mm) along the impact side of the bench.


(4) Position the dummy on the bench as shown in figure W7 in appendix A to this subpart, with the ribs making contact with the seat back oriented 24.6 degrees relative to vertical, the legs extended forward along the seat pan oriented 21.6 degrees relative to horizontal with the knees spaced 40 mm apart. On the non-impact side of the dummy, the long axis of the upper arm is positioned parallel to the seat back (±2 degrees). On the impact side, the upper arm is positioned such that the target point intersects its long axis as described in paragraph (c)(5) of this section. The long axis of the upper arm is defined by section line A-A in drawing 020-9750. Both of the lower arms are set perpendicular to the upper arms and parallel to the dummy’s sagittal plane. Move the elbows inward (medially) until initial contact occurs between the sleeve and the portion of the suit covering the thorax while maintaining the relationships between the arms, seat back, and sagittal plane.


(5) The target point of the impact is the point of intersection on the lateral aspect of the upper arm and a line projecting from the thorax of the dummy. The projecting line is horizontal, runs parallel to the coronal plane of the dummy, and passes through the midpoint of a line connecting the centers of the bolt heads of the two IR-TRACC bolts (part #5000646). The projected line should intersect the upper arm within 2 mm of its long axis.


(6) Impact the arm with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal centerline should be horizontal (±1 degrees), and the centerline of the probe should be within 2 mm of the target point.


(7) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(8) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


§ 572.216 Thorax without arm assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The thorax assembly for this test consists of the torso assembly (drawing 020-4500) with IR-TRACC (drawing SA572-S37) installed.


(b) When the thorax of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 020-0100) with the arm (drawing 020-9700 or 020-9800) on the impacted side removed is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to § 572.219 at 3.3 ± 0.1 m/s according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) Maximum lateral thorax displacement (compression) relative to the spine, measured with the IR-TRACC (drawing SA572-S37) and processed as set out in the PADI (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210), shall have a value between 24.5 mm and 30.5 mm. The peak force, measured by the impact probe as defined in § 572.219 and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, shall have a value between 610 N and 754 N.


(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its measured deceleration.


(c) The test procedure for the thorax without arm assembly is as follows:


(1) The dummy is clothed in the Q3s suit (drawing 020-8001). No additional clothing or shoes are placed on the dummy.


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) The test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A left thorax test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale left side impact is depicted in figure W8 in appendix A to this subpart. A right thorax set-up would be a mirror image of that shown in Figure W8. Seat the dummy on the qualification bench described in figure V3 to § 572.194, the seat pan and seat back surfaces of which are covered with thin sheets of PTFE (Teflon) (nominal stock thickness: 2 to 3 mm) along the impact side of the bench.


(4) Position the dummy on the bench as shown in figure W8 in appendix A to this subpart, with the ribs making contact with the seat back oriented 24.6 degrees relative to vertical, the legs extended forward along the seat pan oriented 21.6 degrees relative to horizontal with the knees spaced 40 mm apart, and the arm on the non-impacted side positioned so that the upper arm is parallel (±2 degrees) to the seat back and the lower arm perpendicular to the upper arm.


(5) The target point of the impact is the midpoint of a line between the centers of the bolt heads of the two IR-TRACC bolts (part #5000646).


(6) Impact the thorax with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal centerline should be horizontal (±1 degrees), and the centerline of the probe should be within 2 mm of the target point.


(7) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(8) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


§ 572.217 Lumbar spine assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The lumbar spine and headform assembly for the purposes of the fore-aft lumbar flexion and lateral lumbar flexion qualification tests, as shown in Figures W9 and W10 in appendix A to this subpart, consists of the headform (drawing 020-9050, sheet 2) with angular rate sensor installed (drawing SA572-S58), six-channel neck/lumbar load cell (drawing SA572-S8), lumbar spine assembly (drawing 020-6000), lumbar interface plate (drawing 020-9062) and pendulum interface plate (drawing 020-9051) with angular rate sensor installed (drawing SA572-S58).


(b) When the lumbar spine and headform assembly is tested according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section, it shall have the following characteristics:


(1) Fore-aft lumbar flexion qualification test. (i) Plane D, referenced in figure W9 in appendix A to this subpart, shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 47.0 degrees and 58.5 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within these angles, the peak moment measured by the neck/lumbar transducer (drawing SA572-S8) shall have a value between 78.2 N-m and 96.2 N-m.


(ii) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 49 to 59 ms after the time the peak rotation value is reached.


(iii) All instrumentation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the lumbar spine and pendulum are parallel.


(iv) The headform rotation shall be calculated by the following formula with the integration beginning at time zero:


Headform rotation (deg) = ∫ [(Headform Angular Rate)y−(Pendulum Angular Rate)y] dt

(v) (Headform Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the headform (drawing 020-9050, sheet 2), and (Pendulum Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the pendulum interface plate (drawing 020-9051).


(2) Lateral lumbar flexion qualification test. (i) Plane D, referenced in figure W10, shall rotate in the direction of pre-impact flight with respect to the pendulum’s longitudinal centerline between 46.1 degrees and 58.2 degrees. During the time interval while the rotation is within these angles, the peak moment measured by the neck/lumbar transducer (drawing SA572-S8) shall have a value between 79.4 N-m and 98.1 N-m.


(ii) The decaying headform rotation vs. time curve shall cross the zero angle with respect to its initial position at time of impact relative to the pendulum centerline between 48 to 59 ms after the time the peak rotation value is reached.


(iii) All instrumentation data channels are defined to be zero when the longitudinal centerline of the lumbar spine and pendulum are parallel.


(iv) The headform rotation shall be calculated by the following formula with the integration beginning at time zero:


Headform rotation (deg) = ∫ [(Headform Angular Rate)y−(Pendulum Angular Rate)y] dt


(v) (Headform Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the headform (drawing 020-9050, sheet 2), and (Pendulum Angular Rate)y is the angular rate about the y-axis in deg/sec measured on the pendulum interface plate (drawing 020-9051).

(c) The test procedure for the lumbar spine assembly is as follows:


(1) Soak the lumbar spine assembly in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C and a relative humidity between 10 and 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(2)(i) For the fore-aft lumbar flexion test, mount the lumbar spine and headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a) of this section, on the pendulum described Figure 22 to § 572.33 so that the midsagittal plane of the headform is vertical and coincides with the plane of motion of the pendulum, and with the lumbar spine placement such that the front side of the lumbar spine is closest to the honeycomb material.


(ii) For the lateral lumbar flexion test, the test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A right flexion test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing a full scale right side impact is depicted in figure W10 in appendix A to this subpart. A left flexion test set-up would be depicted by a mirror image of all components beneath the pendulum interface plate in Figure W10. Mount the lumbar spine and headform assembly, defined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, on the pendulum described in figure 22 to § 572.33 so that the midsagittal plane of the headform is vertical and perpendicular to the direction of motion of the pendulum, and with the lumbar spine placement such that the right (or left) side of the lumbar spine is closest to the honeycomb material.


(3)(i) Release the pendulum and allow it to fall freely from a height to achieve an impact velocity of 4.4 ± 0.1 m/s, measured by an accelerometer mounted on the pendulum as shown in Figure 22 to § 572.33 at time zero.


(ii) Stop the pendulum from the initial velocity with an acceleration vs. time pulse that meets the velocity change as specified in table 1 to this section. Integrate the pendulum accelerometer data channel to obtain the velocity vs. time curve beginning at time zero.


(iii) Time zero is defined as the time of initial contact between the pendulum striker plate and the honeycomb material.


Table 1 to § 572.217

Time

(ms)

Fore-aft

flexion

(m/s)

Lateral

flexion

(m/s)

101.3-1.71.3-1.7
202.7-3.72.7-3.7
304.1-4.94.0-4.8

§ 572.218 Pelvis assembly and test procedure.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The pelvis assembly (drawing 020-7500) for this test may include either a uniaxial pubic load cell (drawing SA572-S7) or a pubic load cell structural replacement (drawing 020-7150) installed on the non-impact side of the pelvis.


(b) When the center of the pelvis of a completely assembled dummy (drawing 020-0100) is impacted laterally by a test probe conforming to § 572.219 at 4.0 ± 0.1 m/s according to the test procedure in paragraph (c) of this section:


(1) The peak force, measured by the impact probe as defined in § 572.219 and calculated in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, shall have a value between 1587 N and 1901 N.


(2) The force shall be calculated by the product of the impactor mass and its measured deceleration.


(c) The test procedure for the pelvis assembly is as follows:


(1) The dummy is clothed in the Q3s suit (drawing 020-8001). No additional clothing or shoes are placed on the dummy.


(2) Soak the dummy in a controlled environment at any temperature between 20.6 and 22.2 °C (69 and 72 °F) and a relative humidity from 10 to 70 percent for at least four hours prior to a test.


(3) The pelvis test is carried out in the direction opposing the primary load vector of the ensuing full scale test for which the dummy is being qualified. A left pelvis test set-up that is used to qualify the dummy for an ensuing full scale left side impact is depicted in figure W11 in appendix A to this subpart. A right pelvis test set-up would be a mirror image of that shown in figure W11. Seat the dummy on the qualification bench described in figure V3 to § 572.194, the seat pan and seat back surfaces of which are covered with thin sheets of PTFE (Teflon) (nominal stock thickness: 2 to 3 mm) along the impact side of the bench.


(4) Position the dummy on the bench as shown in figure W11 in appendix A to this subpart, with the ribs making contact with the seat back oriented 24.6 degrees relative to vertical, the legs extended forward along the seat pan oriented 21.6 degrees relative to horizontal with the knees spaced 40 mm apart. The arms should be positioned so that the arm on the non-impacted side is parallel to the seat back with the lower arm perpendicular to the upper arm, and the arm on the impacted side is positioned upwards away from the pelvis.


(5) Establish the impact point at the center of the pelvis so that the impact point of the longitudinal centerline of the probe is located 185 mm from the center of the knee pivot screw (part #020-9008) and centered vertically on the femur.


(6) Impact the pelvis with the test probe so that at the moment of contact the probe’s longitudinal centerline should be horizontal (±1 degrees), and the centerline of the probe should be within 2 mm of the center of the pelvis.


(7) Guide the test probe during impact so that there is no significant lateral, vertical, or rotational movement.


(8) No suspension hardware, suspension cables, or any other attachments to the probe, including the velocity vane, shall make contact with the dummy during the test.


§ 572.219 Test conditions and instrumentation.

All assemblies and drawings referenced in this section are contained in Drawings and Specifications, incorporated by reference, see § 572.210.


(a) The following test equipment and instrumentation is needed for qualification as set forth in this subpart:


(1) The test probe for shoulder, thorax, and pelvis impacts is of rigid metallic construction, concentric in shape, and symmetric about its longitudinal axis. It has a mass of 3.81 ± 0.02 kg and a minimum mass moment of inertia of 560 kg-cm
2 in yaw and pitch about the CG. One-third (
1/3) of the weight of the suspension cables and their attachments to the impact probe is included in the calculation of mass, and such components may not exceed five percent of the total weight of the test probe. The impacting end of the probe, perpendicular to and concentric with the longitudinal axis, is at least 25.4 mm long, and has a flat, continuous, and non-deformable 70.0 ± 0.25 mm diameter face with an edge radius between 6.4-12.7 mm. The probe’s end opposite to the impact face has provisions for mounting of an accelerometer with its sensitive axis collinear with the longitudinal axis of the probe. No concentric portions of the impact probe may exceed the diameter of the impact face. The impact probe shall have a free air resonant frequency of not less than 1000 Hz, which may be determined using the procedure listed in the PADI (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210).


(2) Head accelerometers have dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and are mounted in the head as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(3) The upper neck force and moment transducer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S8 and is mounted in the head-neck assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(4) The angular rate sensors for the fore-aft neck flexion and lateral neck flexion qualification tests have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S58 and are mounted in the headform and on the pendulum as shown in figures W3 and W4 in appendix A to this subpart.


(5) The string potentiometer shoulder deflection transducers have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S38 or SA572-S39 and are mounted to the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(6) The IR-TRACC thorax deflection transducers have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S37 and are mounted to the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(7) The lumbar spine force and moment transducer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S8 and is mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(8) The angular rate sensors for the fore-aft lumbar flexion and lateral lumbar flexion qualification tests have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S58 and are mounted in the headform and on the pendulum as shown in figures W9, W10 in appendix A to this subpart.


(b) The following instrumentation may be required for installation in the dummy for compliance testing. If so, it is installed during qualification procedures as described in this subpart:


(1) The optional angular rate sensors for the head have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in any of drawings SA572-S55, SA572-S56, SA572-S57 or SA572-S58 and are mounted in the head as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(2) The upper spine accelerometers have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and are mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(3) The pelvis accelerometers have the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass locations specified in drawing SA572-S4 and are mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(4) The T1 accelerometer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive mass location specified in drawing SA572-S4 and is mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(5) The lower neck force and moment transducer has the dimensions, response characteristics, and sensitive axis locations specified in drawing SA572-S8 and is mounted to the neck assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(6) The tilt sensor has the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S44 and is mounted to the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(7) The pubic force transducers have the dimensions and response characteristics specified in drawing SA572-S7 and are mounted in the torso assembly as shown in drawing 020-0100, sheet 2 of 5.


(c) The outputs of transducers installed in the dummy and in the test equipment specified by this part are to be recorded in individual data channels that conform to SAE J211 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210) except as noted, with channel frequency classes (CFCs) as follows:


(1) Pendulum acceleration, CFC 180,


(2) Pendulum angular rate, CFC 60,


(3) Neck twist fixture rotation, CFC 60,


(4) Test probe acceleration, CFC 180,


(5) Head accelerations, CFC 1000,


(6) Headform angular rate, CFC 60,


(7) Neck moments, upper and lower, CFC 600,


(8) Shoulder deflection, CFC 180,


(9) Thorax deflection, CFC 180,


(10) Upper spine accelerations, CFC 180,


(11) T1 acceleration, CFC 180,


(12) Pubic force, CFC 180,


(13) Pelvis accelerations, CFC 1000.


(d) Coordinate signs for instrumentation polarity are to conform to SAE J1733 (incorporated by reference, see § 572.210).


(e) The mountings for sensing devices have no resonant frequency less than 3 times the frequency range of the applicable channel class.


(f) Limb joints are set at one G, barely restraining the weight of the limb when it is extended horizontally. The force needed to move a limb segment is not to exceed 2G throughout the range of limb motion.


(g) Performance tests of the same component, segment, assembly, or fully assembled dummy are separated in time by not less than 30 minutes unless otherwise noted.


(h) Surfaces of dummy components may not be painted except as specified in this subpart or in drawings subtended by this subpart.


Appendix A to Subpart W of Part 572 – Figures












PART 573 – DEFECT AND NONCOMPLIANCE RESPONSIBILITY AND REPORTS


Authority:49 U.S.C. 30102, 30103, 30116-30121, 30166, Pub. L. 112-141, 126 Stat. 405; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95 and 49 CFR 501.8.


Source:43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, unless otherwise noted.

§ 573.1 Scope.

This part:


(a) Sets forth the responsibilities under 49 U.S.C. 30116-30121 of manufacturers of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment with respect to safety-related defects and noncompliances with Federal motor vehicle safety standards in motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment; and


(b) Specifies requirements for –


(1) Manufacturers to maintain lists of owners, purchasers, dealers, and distributors notified of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles and motor vehicle original and replacement equipment,


(2) Reporting to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) defects in motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment and noncompliances with motor vehicle safety standards prescribed under part 571 of this chapter, and


(3) Providing quarterly reports on defect and noncompliance notification campaigns.


[69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]


§ 573.2 Purposes.

The purposes of this part are:


(a) To facilitate the notification of owners of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment, and the remedy of such defects and noncompliances, by equitably apportioning the responsibility for safety-related defects and noncompliances with Federal motor vehicle safety standards among manufacturers of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment; and


(b) To inform NHTSA of defective and noncomplying motor vehicles and items of motor vehicle equipment, and to obtain information for NHTSA on the adequacy of manufacturers’ defect and noncompliance notification campaigns, on corrective action, on owner response, and to compare the defect incidence rate among different groups of vehicles.


[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]


§ 573.3 Application.

(a) Except as provided in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this section, this part applies to manufacturers of complete motor vehicles, incomplete motor vehicles, and motor vehicle original and replacement equipment, with respect to all vehicles and equipment that have been transported beyond the direct control of the manufacturer.


(b) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in a motor vehicle or equipment item imported into the United States, compliance with §§ 573.6 and 573.7 by either the fabricating manufacturer or the importer of the vehicle or equipment item shall be considered compliance by both.


(c) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in a vehicle manufactured in two or more stages, compliance with §§ 573.6 and 573.7 by either the manufacturer of the incomplete vehicle or any subsequent manufacturer of the vehicle shall be considered compliance by all manufacturers.


(d) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an item of replacement equipment (except tires) compliance with §§ 573.6 and 573.7 by the brand name or trademark owner shall be considered compliance by the manufacturer. Tire brand name owners are considered manufacturers (49 U.S.C. 10102(b)(1)(E)) and have the same reporting requirements as manufacturers.


(e) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an item of original equipment used in the vehicles of only one vehicle manufacturer, compliance with §§ 573.6 and 573.7 by either the vehicle or equipment manufacturer shall be considered compliance by both.


(f) In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in original equipment installed in the vehicles of more than one manufacturer, compliance with § 573.6 is required of the equipment manufacturer as to the equipment item, and of each vehicle manufacturer as to the vehicles in which the equipment has been installed. Compliance with § 573.7 is required of the manufacturer who is conducting the recall campaign.


(g) The provisions of § 573.10 apply to all persons.


(h) The provisions of § 573.11 apply to dealers, including retailers of motor vehicle equipment.


(i) The provisions of § 573.12 apply to all persons.


[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 66 FR 38162, July 23, 2001; 67 FR 19697, Apr. 23, 2002; 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003]


§ 573.4 Definitions.

For purposes of this part:


Act means 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301.


Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration or his delegate.


First purchaser means first purchaser for purposes other than resale.


Leased motor vehicle means any motor vehicle that is leased to a person for a term of at least four months by a lessor who has leased five or more vehicles in the twelve months preceding the date of notification by the vehicle manufacturer of the existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in the motor vehicle.


Lessee means a person who is the lessee of a leased motor vehicle as defined in this section.


Lessor means a person or entity that is the owner, as reflected on the vehicle’s title, of any five or more leased vehicles (as defined in this section), as of the date of notification by the manufacturer of the existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in one or more of the leased motor vehicles.


Original equipment means an item of motor vehicle equipment (other than a tire) that was installed in or on a motor vehicle at the time of its delivery to the first purchaser if the item of equipment was installed on or in the motor vehicle at the time of its delivery to a dealer or distributor for distribution, or was installed by the dealer or distributor with the express authorizations of the motor vehicle manufacturer.


Readable form means a form readable by the unassisted eye or readable by machine. If readable by machine, the submitting party must obtain written confirmation from the Office of Defects Investigation immediately prior to submission that the machine is readily available to NHTSA. For all similar information responses, once a manufacturer has obtained approval for the original response in that form, it will not have to obtain approval for future submissions in the same form. In addition, all coded information must be accompanied by an explanation of the codes used.


Replacement equipment means motor vehicle equipment other than original equipment as defined in this section, and tires.


[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]


§ 573.5 Defect and noncompliance responsibility.

(a) Each manufacturer of a motor vehicle shall be responsible for any safety-related defect or any noncompliance determined to exist in the vehicle or in any item of original equipment.


(b) Each manufacturer of an item of replacement equipment shall be responsible for any safety-related defect or any noncompliance determined to exist in the equipment.


[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]


§ 573.6 Defect and noncompliance information report.

(a) Each manufacturer shall furnish a report to the NHTSA for each defect in his vehicles or in his items of original or replacement equipment that he or the Administrator determines to be related to motor vehicle safety, and for each noncompliance with a motor vehicle safety standard in such vehicles or items of equipment which either he or the Administrator determines to exist.


(b) Each report shall be submitted not more than 5 working days after a defect in a vehicle or item of equipment has been determined to be safety related, or a noncompliance with a motor vehicle safety standard has been determined to exist. At a minimum, information required by paragraphs (c)(1), (2), and (5) of this section shall be submitted in the initial report. The remainder of the information required by paragraph (c) of this section that is not available within the five-day period shall be submitted within 5 working days after the manufacturer has confirmed the accuracy of the information. In addition, each manufacturer shall amend information required by paragraphs (c)(2), (3), and (8)(i) or (ii) within 5 working days after it has new information that updates or corrects information that was previously reported. Each manufacturer submitting new information relative to a previously submitted report shall refer to the recall campaign number when a number has been assigned by the NHTSA.


(c) Each manufacturer shall include in each report the information specified below.


(1) The manufacturer’s name: The full corporate or individual name of the fabricating manufacturer and any brand name or trademark owner of the vehicle or item of equipment shall be spelled out, except that such abbreviations as “Co.” or “Inc.”, and their foreign equivalents, and the first and middle initials of individuals, may be used. In the case of a defect or noncompliance decided to exist in an imported vehicle or item of equipment, the agency designated by the fabricating manufacturer pursuant to 49 U.S.C. section 30164(a) shall be also stated. If the fabricating manufacturer is a corporation that is controlled by another corporation that assumes responsibility for compliance with all requirements of this part the name of the controlling corporation may be used.


(2) Identification of the vehicles or items of motor vehicle equipment potentially containing the defect or noncompliance, including a description of the manufacturer’s basis for its determination of the recall population and a description of how the vehicles or items of equipment to be recalled differ from similar vehicles or items of equipment that the manufacturer has not included in the recall.


(i) In the case of passenger cars, the identification shall be by the make, line, model year, the inclusive dates (month and year) of manufacture, and any other information necessary to describe the vehicles.


(ii) In the case of vehicles other than passenger cars, the identification shall be by body style or type, inclusive dates (month and year) of manufacture and any other information necessary to describe the vehicles, such as GVWR or class for trucks, displacement (cc) for motorcycles, and number of passengers for buses.


(iii) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the identification shall be by the generic name of the component (tires, child seating systems, axles, etc.), part number (for tires, a range of tire identification numbers, as required by 49 CFR 574.5), size and function if applicable, the inclusive dates (month and year) of manufacture if available, brand (or trade) name, model name, model number, as applicable, and any other information necessary to describe the items.


(iv) In the case of motor vehicles or items of motor vehicle equipment in which the component that contains the defect or noncompliance was manufactured by a different manufacturer from the reporting manufacturer, the reporting manufacturer shall identify the component and, if known, the component’s country of origin (i.e. final place of manufacture or assembly), the manufacturer and/or assembler of the component by name, business address, and business telephone number. If the reporting manufacturer does not know the identity of the manufacturer of the component, it shall identify the entity from which it was obtained. If at the time of submission of the initial report, the reporting manufacturer does not know the country of origin of the component, the manufacturer shall ascertain the country of origin and submit a supplemental report with that information once it becomes available.


(v) In the case of items of motor vehicle equipment, the manufacturer of the equipment shall identify by name, business address, and business telephone number every manufacturer that purchases the defective or noncomplying component for use or installation in new motor vehicles or new items of motor vehicle equipment.


(3) The total number of vehicles or items of equipment potentially containing the defect or noncompliance, and where available the number of vehicles or items of equipment in each group identified pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section.


(4) The percentage of vehicles or items of equipment specified pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section estimated to actually contain the defect or noncompliance.


(5) A description of the defect or noncompliance, including both a brief summary and a detailed description, with graphic aids as necessary, of the nature and physical location (if applicable) of the defect or noncompliance. In addition, the manufacturer shall identify and describe the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably related to the defect or noncompliance consistent with its evaluation of risk required by 49 CFR 577.5(f).


(6) In the case of a defect, a chronology of all principal events that were the basis for the determination that the defect related to motor vehicle safety, including a summary of all warranty claims, field or service reports, and other information, with their dates of receipt.


(7) In the case of a noncompliance, the test results and other information that the manufacturer considered in determining the existence of the noncompliance. The manufacturer shall identify the date of each test and observation that indicated that a noncompliance might or did exist.


(8)(i) A description of the manufacturer’s program for remedying the defect or noncompliance. This program shall include a plan for reimbursing an owner or purchaser who incurred costs to obtain a remedy for the problem addressed by the recall within a reasonable time in advance of the manufacturer’s notification of owners, purchasers and dealers, in accordance with § 573.13 of this part. A manufacturer’s plan may incorporate by reference a general reimbursement plan it previously submitted to NHTSA, together with information specific to the individual recall. Information required by § 573.13 that is not in a general reimbursement plan shall be submitted in the manufacturer’s report to NHTSA under this section. If a manufacturer submits one or more general reimbursement plans, the manufacturer shall update each plan every two years, in accordance with § 573.13. The manufacturer’s remedy program and reimbursement plans will be available for inspection by the public at NHTSA headquarters.


(ii) The estimated date(s) on which it will begin sending notifications to owners, and to dealers and distributors, that there is a safety-related defect or noncompliance and that a remedy without charge will be available to owners, and the estimated date(s) on which it will complete such notifications (if different from the beginning date). If a manufacturer subsequently becomes aware that either the beginning or the completion dates reported to the agency for any of the notifications will be delayed by more than two weeks, it shall promptly advise the agency of the delay and the reasons therefore, and furnish a revised estimate.


(iii) If a manufacturer intends to file a petition for an exemption from the recall requirements of the Act on the basis that a defect or noncompliance is inconsequential as it relates to motor vehicle safety, it shall notify NHTSA of that intention in its report to NHTSA of the defect or noncompliance under this section. If such a petition is filed and subsequently denied, the manufacturer shall provide the information required by paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section within five Federal government business days from the date the petition denial is published in the Federal Register.


(iv) If a manufacturer advises NHTSA that it intends to file such a petition for exemption from the notification and remedy requirements on the grounds that the defect or noncompliance is inconsequential as it relates to motor vehicle safety, and does not do so within the 30-day period established by 49 CFR 556.4(c), the manufacturer must submit the information required by paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section no later than the end of that 30-day period.


(9) In the case of a remedy program involving the replacement of tires, the manufacturer’s program for remedying the defect or noncompliance shall:


(i) Address how the manufacturer will assure that the entities replacing the tires are aware of the legal requirements related to recalls of tires established by 49 U.S.C. Chapter 301 and regulations thereunder. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall notify its owned stores and/or distributors, as well as all independent outlets that are authorized to replace the tires that are the subject of the recall, annually or for each individual recall that the manufacturer conducts, about the ban on the sale of new defective or noncompliant tires (49 CFR 573.11); the prohibition on the sale of new and used defective and noncompliant tires (49 CFR 573.12); and the duty to notify NHTSA of any sale of a new or used recalled tire for use on a motor vehicle (49 CFR 573.10). For tire outlets that are manufacturer-owned or otherwise subject to the control of the manufacturer, the manufacturer shall also provide directions to comply with these statutory provisions and the regulations thereunder.


(ii) Address how the manufacturer will prevent, to the extent reasonably within its control, the recalled tires from being resold for installation on a motor vehicle. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall include the following information, to be furnished to each tire outlet that it owns, or that is authorized to replace tires that are recalled, either annually or for each individual recall the manufacturer conducts:


(A) Written directions to manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-controlled outlets to alter the recalled tires permanently so that they cannot be used on vehicles. These shall include instructions on the means to render recalled tires unsuitable for resale for installation on motor vehicles and instructions to perform the incapacitation of each recalled tire, with the exception of any tires that are returned to the manufacturer pursuant to a testing program, within 24 hours of receipt of the recalled tire at the outlet. If the manufacturer has a testing program for recalled tires, these directions shall also include criteria for selecting recalled tires for testing and instructions for labeling those tires and returning them promptly to the manufacturer for testing.


(B) Written guidance to all other outlets which are authorized to replace the recalled tires on how to alter the recalled tires promptly and permanently so that they cannot be used on vehicles.


(C) A requirement that manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-controlled outlets report to the manufacturer, either on a monthly basis or within 30 days of the deviation, the number of recalled tires removed from vehicles by the outlet that have not been rendered unsuitable for resale for installation on a motor vehicle within the specified time frame (other than those returned for testing) and describe any such failure to act in accordance with the manufacturer’s plan;


(iii) Address how the manufacturer will limit, to the extent reasonably within its control, the disposal of the recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel them into a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling, and recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use. At a minimum, the manufacturer shall include the following information, to be furnished to each tire outlet that it owns or that is authorized to replace tires that are recalled, either annually or for each individual recall that the manufacturer conducts:


(A)(1) Written directions that require manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-controlled outlets either:


(i) To ship recalled tires to one or more locations designated by the manufacturer as part of the program or allow the manufacturer to collect and dispose of the recalled tires; or


(ii) To ship recalled tires to a location of their own choosing, provided that they comply with applicable state and local laws and regulations regarding disposal of tires.


(2) Under option (c)(9)(iii)(A)(1)(ii) of this section, the directions must also include further direction and guidance on how to limit the disposal of recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel them into a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling, and recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use.


(B)(1) Written guidance that authorizes all other outlets that are authorized to replace the recalled tires either:


(i) To ship recalled tires to one or more locations designated by the manufacturer or allow the manufacturer to collect and dispose of the recalled tires; or


(ii) To ship recalled tires to a location of their own choosing, provided that they comply with applicable state and local laws and regulations regarding disposal of tires.


(2) Under option (c)(9)(iii)(B)(1)(ii) of this section, the manufacturer must also include further guidance on how to limit the disposal of recalled tires in landfills and, instead, channel them into a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling, and recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use.


(C) A requirement that manufacturer-owned and other manufacturer-controlled outlets report to the manufacturer, on a monthly basis or within 30 days of the deviation, the number of recalled tires disposed of in violation of applicable state and local laws and regulations, and describe any such failure to act in accordance with the manufacturer’s plan; and


(D) A description of the manufacturer’s program for disposing of the recalled tires that are returned to the manufacturer or collected by the manufacturer from the retail outlets, including, at a minimum, statements that the returned tires will be disposed of in compliance with applicable state and local laws and regulations regarding disposal of tires, and will be channeled, insofar as possible, into a category of positive reuse (shredding, crumbling, recycling and recovery) or another alternative beneficial non-vehicular use, instead of being disposed of in landfills.


(iv) To the extent that the manufacturer wishes to limit the frequency of shipments of recalled tires, it must specify both a minimum time period and a minimum weight for the shipments and provide that shipments may be made at whichever minimum occurs first.


(v) Written directions required under this paragraph to be furnished to a manufacturer-owned or controlled outlet shall be sent to the person in charge of each outlet by first-class mail or by electronic means, such as FAX transmissions or e-mail, with further instructions to notify all employees of the outlet who are involved with removal, rendering unsuitable for use, or disposition of recalled tires of the applicable requirements and procedures.


(vi) Manufacturers must implement the plans for disposition of recalled tires that they file with NHTSA pursuant to this paragraph. The failure of a manufacturer to implement its plan in accordance with its terms constitutes a violation of the Safety Act.


(10) A representative copy of all notices, bulletins, and other communications that relate directly to the defect or noncompliance and are sent to more than one manufacturer, distributor, dealer or purchaser. These copies shall be submitted to NHTSA’s Recall Management Division (NVS-215) (RMD), not later than 5 days after they are initially sent to manufacturers, distributors, dealers, or purchasers. Submission shall be made pursuant to § 573.9 of this part.


(11) The manufacturer’s campaign number, if not identical to the identification number assigned by NHTSA.


[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 20437, Apr. 5, 1979; 48 FR 44081, Sept. 27, 1983; 60 FR 17268, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 278, Jan. 4, 1996. Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 64063, Oct. 17, 2002; 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004; 69 FR 50084, Aug. 13, 2004; 70 FR 38814, July 6, 2005; 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007; 74 FR 47757, Sept. 17, 2009; 78 FR 51421, Aug. 20, 2013; 79 FR 43677, July 28, 2014]


§ 573.7 Quarterly reports.

(a) Each manufacturer who is conducting a defect or noncompliance notification campaign to manufacturers, distributors, dealers, or owners shall submit to NHTSA a report in accordance with paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section. Unless otherwise directed by the NHTSA, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section shall be included in the quarterly report, with respect to each notification campaign, for each of six consecutive quarters beginning with the quarter in which the campaign was initiated (i.e., the date the manufacturer notifies its purchasers of the availability of a remedy) or corrective action has been completed on all defective or noncomplying vehicles or items of replacement equipment involved in the campaign, whichever occurs first.


(b) Each report shall include the following information identified by and in the order of the subparagraph headings of this paragraph.


(1) The notification campaign number assigned by NHTSA.


(2) The date notification began and the date completed.


(3) The number of vehicles or items of equipment involved in the notification campaign.


(4) The number of vehicles and equipment items which have been inspected and repaired and the number of vehicles and equipment items inspected and determined not to need repair.


(5) The number of vehicles or items of equipment determined to be unreachable for inspection due to export, theft, scrapping, failure to receive notification, or other reasons (specify). The number of vehicles or items or equipment in each category shall be specified.


(6) In reports by equipment manufacturers, the number of items of equipment repaired and/or returned by dealers, other retailers, and distributors to the manufacturer prior to their first sale to the public.


(7) For all recalls that involve the replacement of tires, the manufacturer shall provide:


(i) The aggregate number of recalled tires that the manufacturer becomes aware have not been rendered unsuitable for resale for installation on a motor vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer’s plan provided to NHTSA pursuant to § 573.6(c)(9);


(ii) The aggregate number of recalled tires that the manufacturer becomes aware have been disposed of in violation of applicable state and local laws and regulations; and


(iii) A description of any failure of a tire outlet to act in accordance with the directions in the manufacturer’s plan, including an identification of the outlet(s) in question.


(c) Information supplied in response to the paragraphs (b)(4) and (5) of this section shall be cumulative totals.


(d) The reports required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with the following schedule, except that if the due date specified below falls on a Saturday, Sunday or Federal holiday, the report shall be submitted on the next day that is a business day for the Federal government:


(1) For the first calendar quarter (January 1 through March 31), on or before April 30;


(2) For the second calendar quarter (April 1 through June 30), on or before July 30;


(3) For the third calendar quarter (July 1 through September 30), on or before October 30; and


(4) For the fourth calendar quarter (October 1 through December 31), on or before January 30.


[51 FR 398, Jan. 6, 1986, as amended at 60 FR 17269, Apr. 5, 1995. Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002, as amended at 69 FR 50085, Aug. 13, 2004; 79 FR 43677, July 28, 2014]


§ 573.8 Lists of purchasers, owners, dealers, distributors, lessors, and lessees.

(a) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall maintain, in a form suitable for inspection such as computer information storage devices or card files, a list of the names and addresses of registered owners, as determined through State motor vehicle registration records or other sources or the most recent purchasers where the registered owners are unknown, for all vehicles involved in a defect or noncompliance notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part. The list shall include the vehicle identification number for each vehicle and the status of remedy with respect to each vehicle, updated as of the end of each quarterly reporting period specified in § 573.7. Each vehicle manufacturer shall also maintain such a list of the names and addresses of all dealers and distributors to which a defect or noncompliance notification was sent. Each list shall be retained for 5 years, beginning with the date on which the defect or noncompliance information report required by § 573.6 is initially submitted to NHTSA.


(b) Each manufacturer (including brand name owners) of tires shall maintain, in a form suitable for inspection such as computer information storage devices or card files, a list of the names and addresses of the first purchasers of his tires for all tires involved in a defect or noncompliance notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part. The list shall include the tire identification number of all tires and shall show the status of remedy with respect to each owner involved in each notification campaign, updated as of the end of each quarterly reporting period specified in § 573.6. Each list shall be retained, beginning with the date on which the defect information report is initially submitted to the NHTSA, for 3 years.


(c) For each item of equipment involved in a defect or noncompliance notification campaign initiated after the effective date of this part, each manufacturer of motor vehicle equipment other than tires shall maintain, in a form suitable for inspection, such as computer information storage devices or card files, a list of the names and addresses of each distributor and dealer of such manufacturer, each motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment manufacturer and most recent purchaser known to the manufacturer to whom a potentially defective or noncomplying item of equipment has been sold and to whom notification is sent, the number of such items sold to each, and the date of shipment. The list shall show as far as is practicable the number of items remedied or returned to the manufacturer and the dates of such remedy or return. Each list shall be retained, beginning with the date on which the defect report required by § 573.5 is initially submitted to the NHTSA, for 5 years.


(d) Each lessor of leased motor vehicles that receives a notification from the manufacturer of such vehicles that the vehicle contains a safety-related defect or fails to comply with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard shall maintain, in a form suitable for inspection, such as computer information storage devices or card files, a list of the names and addresses of all lessees to which the lessor has provided notification of a defect or noncompliance pursuant to 49 CFR 577.5(h). The list shall also include the make, model, model year, and vehicle identification number of each such leased vehicle, and the date on which the lessor mailed notification of the defect or noncompliance to the lessee. The information required by this paragraph must be retained by the lessor for one calendar year from the date the vehicle lease expires.


[43 FR 60169, Dec. 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 20437, Apr. 5, 1979; 60 FR 17269, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 278, Jan. 4, 1996. Redesignated at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002; 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]


§ 573.9 Address for submitting required reports and other information.

All submissions, except as otherwise required by this part, shall be submitted to NHTSA on the Internet Web page http://www.safercar.gov/Vehicle + Manufacturers. A manufacturer must use the templates provided at this Web page for all submissions required under this section. Defect and noncompliance information reports required by § 573.6 of this part shall be submitted using one of the following forms, depending upon the type of product that is the subject of the report: “Defect and/or Noncompliance Information Report Form – Vehicles;” “Defect and/or Noncompliance Information Report Form – Equipment;” “Defect and/or Noncompliance Information Report Form – Tires;” “Defect and/or Noncompliance Information Report Form – Child Restraints;” “Defect and/or Noncompliance Information Report – Vehicle Alterers.” Reports required under § 573.7 of this part shall be submitted using the form, “Quarterly Report Form” also located at this Web page.


[78 FR 51421, Aug. 20, 2013]


§ 573.10 Reporting the sale or lease of defective or noncompliant tires.

(a) Reporting requirement. Subject to paragraph (b) of this section, any person who knowingly and willfully sells or leases for use on a motor vehicle a defective tire or a tire that is not compliant with an applicable tire safety standard with actual knowledge that the manufacturer of such tire has notified its dealers of such defect or noncompliance as required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) or as required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) must report that sale or lease to the Associate Administrator for Enforcement, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, DC 20590.


(b) Exclusions from reporting requirement. Paragraph (a) of this section is not applicable where, before delivery under a sale or lease of a tire:


(1) The defect or noncompliance of the tire is remedied as required under 49 U.S.C. 30120; or


(2) Notification of the defect or noncompliance is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), but enforcement of the order is restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49 U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.


(c) Contents of report; requirement of signature. (1) A report submitted pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section must contain the following information, where that information is available to the person selling or leasing the defective or noncompliant tire:


(i) A statement that the report is being submitted pursuant to 49 CFR 573.10(a) (sale or lease of defective or noncompliant tires);


(ii) The name, address and phone number of the person who purchased or leased the tire;


(iii) The name of the manufacturer of the tire;


(iv) The tire’s brand name, model name, and size;


(v) The tire’s DOT identification number;


(vi) The date of the sale or lease; and


(vii) The name, address, and telephone number of the seller or lessor.


(2) Each report must be dated and signed, with the name of the person signing the report legibly printed or typed below the signature.


(d) Reports required to be submitted pursuant to this section must be submitted no more than that five working days after a person to whom a tire covered by this section has been sold or leased has taken possession of that tire. Submissions must be made by any means which permits the sender to verify promptly that the report was in fact received by NHTSA and the day it was received by NHTSA.


[65 FR 81413, Dec. 26, 2000, as amended at 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007]


§ 573.11 Prohibition on sale or lease of new defective and noncompliant motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment.

(a) If notification is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) or is required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) and the manufacturer has provided to a dealer (including retailers of motor vehicle equipment) notification about a new motor vehicle or new item of replacement equipment in the dealer’s possession, including actual and constructive possession, at the time of notification that contains a defect related to motor vehicle safety or does not comply with an applicable motor vehicle safety standard issued under 49 CFR part 571, the dealer may sell or lease the motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment only if:


(1) The defect or noncompliance is remedied as required by 49 U.S.C. 30120 before delivery under the sale or lease; or


(2) When the notification is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), enforcement of the order is restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49 U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.


(b) Paragraph (a) of this section does not prohibit a dealer from offering the vehicle or equipment for sale or lease, provided that the dealer does not sell or lease it.


[67 FR 19697, Apr. 23, 2002]


§ 573.12 Prohibition on sale or lease of new and used defective and noncompliant motor vehicle equipment.

(a) Subject to § 573.12(b), no person may sell or lease any new or used item of motor vehicle equipment (including a tire) as defined by 49 U.S.C. 30102(a)(7), for installation on a motor vehicle, that is the subject of a decision under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) or a notice required under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c), in a condition that it may be reasonably used for its original purpose.


(b) Paragraph (a) of this section is not applicable where:


(1) The defect or noncompliance is remedied as required under 49 U.S.C. 30120 before delivery under the sale or lease;


(2) Notification of the defect or noncompliance is required by an order under 49 U.S.C. 30118(b), but enforcement of the order is restrained or the order is set aside in a civil action to which 49 U.S.C. 30121(d) applies.


[67 FR 19698, Apr. 23, 2002]


§ 573.13 Reimbursement for pre-notification remedies.

(a) Pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30120(d) and § 573.6(c)(8)(i) of this part, this section specifies requirements for a manufacturer’s plan (including general reimbursement plans submitted pursuant to § 573.6(c)(8)(i)) to reimburse owners and purchasers for costs incurred for remedies in advance of the manufacturer’s notification of safety-related defects and noncompliance with Federal motor vehicle safety standards under subsection (b) or (c) of 49 U.S.C. 30118.


(b) Definitions. The following definitions apply to this section:


(1) Booster seat means either a backless child restraint system or a belt-positioning seat.


(2) Claimant means a person who seeks reimbursement for the costs of a pre-notification remedy for which he or she paid.


(3) Pre-notification remedy means a remedy that is performed on a motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment for a problem subsequently addressed by a notification under subsection (b) or (c) of 49 U.S.C. 30118 and that is obtained during the period for reimbursement specified in paragraph (c) of this section.


(4) Other child restraint system means all child restraint systems as defined in 49 CFR 571.213 S4 not included within the categories of rear-facing infant seat or booster seat.


(5) Rear-facing infant seat means a child restraint system that is designed to position a child to face only in the direction opposite to the normal direction of travel of the motor vehicle.


(6) Warranty means a warranty as defined in § 579.4(c) of this chapter.


(c) The manufacturer’s plan shall specify a period for reimbursement, as follows:


(1) The beginning date shall be no later than a date based on the underlying basis for the recall determined as follows:


(i) For a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard, the date shall be the date of the first test or observation by either NHTSA or the manufacturer indicating that a noncompliance may exist.


(ii) For a safety-related defect that is determined to exist following the opening of an Engineering Analysis (EA) by NHTSA’s Office of Defects Investigation (ODI), the date shall be the date the EA was opened, or one year before the date of the manufacturer’s notification to NHTSA pursuant to § 573.6 of this part, whichever is earlier.


(iii) For a safety-related defect that is determined to exist in the absence of the opening of an EA, the date shall be one year before the date of the manufacturer’s notification to NHTSA pursuant to § 573.6 of this part.


(2) The ending date shall be no earlier than:


(i) For motor vehicles, 10 calendar days after the date on which the manufacturer mailed the last of its notifications to owners pursuant to part 577 of this chapter.


(ii) For replacement equipment, 10 calendar days after the date on which the manufacturer mailed the last of its notifications to owners pursuant to part 577 of this chapter (where applicable) or 30 days after the conclusion of the manufacturer’s initial efforts to provide public notice of the existence of the defect or noncompliance pursuant to § 577.7, whichever is later.


(d) The manufacturer’s plan shall provide for reimbursement of costs for pre-notification remedies, subject to the conditions established in the plan. The following conditions and no others may be established in the plan.


(1) The plan may exclude reimbursement for costs incurred within the period during which the manufacturer’s original or extended warranty would have provided for a free repair of the problem addressed by the recall, without any payment by the consumer unless a franchised dealer or authorized representative of the manufacturer denied warranty coverage or the repair made under warranty did not remedy the problem addressed by the recall. The exclusion based on an extended warranty may be applied only when the manufacturer provided written notice of the terms of the extended warranty to owners.


(2)(i) For a motor vehicle, the plan may exclude reimbursement:


(A) If the pre-notification remedy was not of the same type (repair, replacement, or refund of purchase price) as the recall remedy;


(B) If the pre-notification remedy did not address the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or noncompliance; or


(C) If the pre-notification remedy was not reasonably necessary to correct the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or noncompliance.


(ii) However, the plan may not require that the pre-notification remedy be identical to the remedy elected by the manufacturer pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30120(a)(1)(A).


(3)(i) For replacement equipment, the plan may exclude reimbursement:


(A) If the pre-notification remedy did not address the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or noncompliance;


(B) If the pre-notification remedy was not reasonably necessary to correct the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect and noncompliance; or


(C) In the case of a child restraint system that was replaced, if the replacement child restraint is not the same type (i.e., rear-facing infant seat, booster seat, or other child restraint system) as the restraint that was the subject of the recall.


(ii) However, the plan may not require that the pre-notification remedy be identical to the remedy elected by the manufacturer pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30120(a)(1)(B).


(4) The plan may exclude reimbursement if the claimant did not submit adequate documentation to the manufacturer at an address or location designated pursuant to § 573.13(f). The plan may require, at most, that the following documentation be submitted:


(i) Name and mailing address of the claimant;


(ii) Identification of the product that was recalled:


(A) For motor vehicles, the vehicle make, model, model year, and vehicle identification number of the vehicle;


(B) For replacement equipment other than child restraint systems and tires, a description of the equipment, including model and size as appropriate;


(C) For child restraint systems, a description of the restraint, including the type (rear-facing infant seat, booster seat, or other child restraint system) and the model; or


(D) For tires, the model and size;


(iii) Identification of the recall (either the NHTSA recall number or the manufacturer’s recall number);


(iv) Identification of the owner or purchaser of the recalled motor vehicle or replacement equipment at the time that the pre-notification remedy was obtained;


(v) A receipt for the pre-notification remedy, which may be an original or copy:


(A) If the reimbursement sought is for a repair, the manufacturer may require that the receipt indicate that the repair addressed the defect or noncompliance that led to the recall or a manifestation of the defect or noncompliance, and state the total amount paid for the repair of that problem. Itemization of a receipt of the amount for parts, labor, other costs and taxes, may not be required unless it is unclear on the face of the receipt that the repair for which reimbursement is sought addressed only the pre-notification remedy relating to the pertinent defect or noncompliance or manifestation thereof.


(B) If the reimbursement sought is for the replacement of a vehicle part or an item of replacement equipment, the manufacturer may require that the receipt identify the item and state the total amount paid for the item that replaced the defective or noncompliant item;


(vi) In the case of items of replacement equipment that were replaced, documentation that the claimant or a relative thereof (with relationship stated) owned the recalled item. Such documentation could consist of:


(A) An invoice or receipt showing purchase of the recalled item of replacement equipment;


(B) If the claimant sent a registration card for a recalled child restraint system or tire to the manufacturer, a statement to that effect;


(C) A copy of the registration card for the recalled child restraint system or tire; or


(D) Documentation demonstrating that the claimant had replaced a recalled tire that was on a vehicle that he, she, or a relative owned; and


(vii) If the pre-notification remedy was obtained at a time when the vehicle or equipment could have been repaired or replaced at no charge under a manufacturer’s original or extended warranty program, documentation indicating that the manufacturer’s dealer or authorized facility either refused to remedy the problem addressed by the recall under the warranty or that the warranty repair did not correct the problem addressed by the recall.


(e) The manufacturer’s plan shall specify the amount of costs to be reimbursed for a pre-notification remedy.


(1) For motor vehicles:


(i) The amount of reimbursement shall not be less than the lesser of:


(A) The amount paid by the owner for the remedy, or


(B) The cost of parts for the remedy, plus associated labor at local labor rates, miscellaneous fees such as disposal of waste, and taxes. Costs for parts may be limited to the manufacturer’s list retail price for authorized parts.


(ii) Any associated costs, including, but not limited to, taxes or disposal of wastes, may not be limited.


(2) For replacement equipment:


(i) The amount of reimbursement ordinarily would be the amount paid by the owner for the replacement item.


(ii) In cases in which the owner purchased a brand or model different from the item of motor vehicle equipment that was the subject of the recall, the manufacturer may limit the amount of reimbursement to the retail list price of the defective or noncompliant item that was replaced, plus taxes.


(iii) If the item of motor vehicle equipment was repaired, the provisions of paragraph (e)(1) of this section apply.


(f) The manufacturer’s plan shall identify an address to which claimants may mail reimbursement clams and may identify franchised dealer(s) and authorized facilities to which claims for reimbursement may be submitted directly.


(g) The manufacturer (either directly or through its designated dealer or facility) shall act upon requests for reimbursement as follows:


(1) The manufacturer shall act upon a claim for reimbursement within 60 days of its receipt. If the manufacturer denies the claim, the manufacturer must send a notice to the claimant within 60 days of receipt of the claim that includes a clear, concise statement of the reasons for the denial.


(2) If a claim for reimbursement is incomplete when originally submitted, the manufacturer shall advise the claimant within 60 days of receipt of the claim of the documentation that is needed and offer an opportunity to resubmit the claim with complete documentation.


(h) Reimbursement shall be in the form of a check or cash from the manufacturer or a designated dealer or facility.


(i) The manufacturer shall make its reimbursement plan available to the public upon request.


(j) Any disputes over the denial in whole or in part of a claim for reimbursement shall be resolved between the claimant and the manufacturer. NHTSA will not mediate or resolve any disputes regarding eligibility for, or the amount of, reimbursement.


(k) Each manufacturer shall implement each plan for reimbursement in accordance with this section and the terms of the plan.


(l) Nothing in this section requires that a manufacturer provide reimbursement in connection with a fraudulent claim for reimbursement.


(m) A manufacturer’s plan may provide that it will not apply to recalls based solely on noncompliant or defective labels.


(n) The requirement that reimbursement for a pre-notification remedy be provided to an owner does not apply if, in the case of a motor vehicle or replacement equipment other than a tire, it was bought by the first purchaser more than 10 calendar years before notice is given under 49 U.S.C. 30118(c) or an order is issued under section 49 U.S.C. 30118(b). In the case of a tire, this period shall be 5 calendar years.


[67 FR 64063, Oct. 17, 2002]


§ 573.14 Accelerated remedy program.

(a) An accelerated remedy program is one in which the manufacturer expands the sources of replacement parts needed to remedy the defect or noncompliance, or expands the number of authorized repair facilities beyond those facilities that usually and customarily provide remedy work for the manufacturer, or both.


(b) The Administrator may require a manufacturer to accelerate its remedy program if:


(1) The Administrator finds that there is a risk of serious injury or death if the remedy program is not accelerated;


(2) The Administrator finds that acceleration of the remedy program can be reasonably achieved by expanding the sources of replacement parts, expanding the number of authorized repair facilities, or both; and


(3) The Administrator determines that the manufacturer’s remedy program is not likely to be capable of completion within a reasonable time.


(c) The Administrator, in deciding whether to require the manufacturer to accelerate a remedy program and what to require the manufacturer to do, will consult with the manufacturer and may consider a wide range of information, including, but not limited to, the following: the manufacturer’s initial or revised report submitted under § 573.6(c), information from the manufacturer, information from other manufacturers and suppliers, information from any source related to the availability and implementation of the remedy, and the seriousness of the risk of injury or death associated with the defect or noncompliance.


(d) As required by the Administrator, an accelerated remedy program shall include the manner of acceleration (expansion of the sources of replacement parts, expansion of the number of authorized repair facilities, or both), may require submission of a plan, may identify the parts to be provided and/or the sources of those parts, may require the manufacturer to notify the agency and owners about any differences among different sources or brands of parts, may require the manufacturer to identify additional authorized repair facilities, and may specify additional owner notifications related to the program. The Administrator may also require the manufacturer to include a program to provide reimbursement to owners who incur costs to obtain the accelerated remedy.


(e) Under an accelerated remedy program, the remedy that is provided shall be equivalent to the remedy that would have been provided if the manufacturer’s remedy program had not been accelerated. The replacement parts used to remedy the defect or noncompliance shall be reasonably equivalent to those that would have been used if the remedy program were not accelerated. The service procedures shall be reasonably equivalent. In the case of tires, all replacement tires shall be the same size and type as the defective or noncompliant tire, shall be suitable for use on the owner’s vehicle, shall have the same or higher load index and speed rating, and, for passenger car tires, shall have the same or better rating in each of the three categories enumerated in the Uniform Tire Quality Grading System. See 49 CFR 575.104. In the case of child restraints systems, all replacements shall be of the same type (e.g., rear-facing infant seats with a base, rear-facing infant seats without a base, convertible seats (designed for use in both rear- and forward-facing modes), forward-facing only seats, high back booster seats with a five-point harness, and belt positioning booster seats) and the same overall quality.


(f) In those instances where the accelerated remedy program provides that an owner may obtain the remedy from a source other than the manufacturer or its dealers or authorized facilities by paying for the remedy and/or its installation, the manufacturer shall reimburse the owner for the cost of obtaining the remedy as specified on paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(3) of this section. Under these circumstances, the accelerated remedy program shall include, to the extent required by the Administrator:


(1) A description of the remedy and costs that are eligible for reimbursement, including identification of the equipment and/or parts and labor for which reimbursement is available;


(2) Identification, with specificity or as a class, of the alternative repair facilities at which reimbursable repairs may be performed, including an explanation of how to arrange for service at those facilities; and


(3) Other provisions assuring appropriate reimbursement that are consistent with those set forth in § 573.13, including, but not limited to, provisions regarding the procedures and needed documentation for making a claim for reimbursement, the amount of costs to be reimbursed, the office to which claims for reimbursement shall be submitted, the requirements on manufacturers for acting on claims for reimbursement, and the methods by which owners can obtain information about the program.


(g) In response to a manufacturer’s request, the Administrator may authorize a manufacturer to terminate its accelerated remedy program if the Administrator concludes that the manufacturer can meet all future demands for the remedy through its own sources in a prompt manner. If required by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall provide notice of the termination of the program to all owners of unremedied vehicles and equipment at least 30 days in advance of the termination date, in a form approved by the Administrator.


(h) Each manufacturer shall implement any accelerated remedy program required by the Administrator according to the terms of that program.


[67 FR 72392, Dec. 5, 2002]


§ 573.15 Public availability of motor vehicle recall information.

(a) General – Manufacturers that have manufactured for sale, sold, offered for sale, introduced or delivered for introduction in interstate commerce, or imported into the United States 25,000 or more light vehicles or 5,000 or more motorcycles in the current calendar year or the prior calendar year shall make motor vehicle safety recall information applicable to the vehicles they manufactured available to the public on the Internet. The information shall be in a format that is searchable by vehicle make and model and vehicle identification number (VIN), that preserves consumer privacy, and that includes information about each recall that has not been completed for each vehicle.


(b) Specific requirements – The system that manufacturers use to provide the information as specified in paragraph (a) of this section must also meet the following requirements:


(1) Be free of charge and not require users to register or submit information, other than a make, model, and a VIN, in order to obtain information on recalls;


(2) Have a hyperlink (Internet link) to it conspicuously placed on the manufacturer’s main United States’ Web page;


(3) Not include sales or marketing messages with the page for entering a make, model, and VIN, or with the page where the results are displayed;


(4) Allow users to search a vehicle’s recall remedy status, and report that a recall has not been completed on that vehicle, as soon as possible and no later than the date when the manufacturer includes that vehicle on its list compiled for purposes of 49 CFR 573.8(a);


(5) Ensure safety recalls subject to paragraph (b)(4) of this section are conspicuously placed first, before any other information that is displayed;


(6) For vehicles that have been identified as covered by a safety recall, but for which the recall remedy is not yet available, state that the vehicle is covered by the safety recall and that the remedy is not yet available;


(7) Be updated at least once every seven (7) calendar days. The date of the last update must display on both the page for entering the make, model, and VIN to search for recall completion information and the results page;


(8) Where the search results in identification of a recall that has not been completed, state the recall campaign number NHTSA assigned to the matter; state the date the defect or noncompliance was reported pursuant to Part 573; provide a brief description of the safety defect or noncompliance, including the risk to safety, identified in the manufacturer’s information report or owner notification letter filed pursuant to this part; and describe the remedy program;


(9) At a minimum, include recall completion information for each vehicle covered by any safety recall for which the owner notification campaign started at any time within the previous fifteen (15) calendar years;


(10) State the earliest date for which recall completion information is available, either on the search page or on the results page, and provide information for all owner notification campaigns after that date;


(11) Instruct the user to contact the manufacturer if the user has questions or wishes to question the accuracy of any information, and provide a hyperlink or other contact information for doing so;


(12) Ensure, through adherence with technical specifications that NHTSA makes available through a secure area of its Web site http://www.safercar.gov/Vehicle + Manufacturers/RecallsPortal, the secure electronic transfer of the recall information and data required to be made publicly available by this section, to NHTSA for its use in displaying that information and data on its Web sites or other public portals.


[78 FR 51421, Aug. 20, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 43677, July 28, 2014]


§ 573.16 Reporting bankruptcy petition.

Each manufacturer that files a bankruptcy petition, or is the subject of an involuntary petition for which relief has been ordered, pursuant to Title 11 of the United States Code, 11 U.S.C. 101 et seq., shall provide NHTSA a report as specified below.


(a) The name of the court, the docket number, and the name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer’s legal representative;


(b) A copy of the bankruptcy petition;


(c) A list of the recalls for which the manufacturer filed a “Defect and noncompliance information report” with NHTSA pursuant to 49 CFR 573.6; and


(d) The information specified in 49 CFR 573.7(b) for each recall listed pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.


(e) Each report pursuant to this section must be received by NHTSA not more than 5 working days after the date the petition is filed in the United States Bankruptcy Court. Reports shall be addressed to the Associate Administrator for Enforcement, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Attention: Recall Management Division (NVS-215), 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590, or submitted as an attachment to an email message to [email protected] in a portable document format (.pdf).


[78 FR 51422, Aug. 20, 2013]


PART 574 – TIRE IDENTIFICATION AND RECORDKEEPING


Authority:49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30117, and 30166; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95.



Editorial Note:An interpretation of manufacturer’s designee issued by NHTSA and published at 36 FR 9780, May 28, 1971, provides as follows:
“A request for an interpretation has been received from the Rubber Manufacturers Association asking that it be made clear that, under the Tire Identification and Recordkeeping Regulation (part 574), particularly §§ 574.7 and 574.8, only the tire manufacturer, brand name owner, or retreader may designate a third party to provide the necessary recording forms or to maintain the records required by the regulation.

“Another person has requested an interpretation concerning the questions whether: (1) A tire manufacturer, brand name owner or retreader may designate one or more persons to be its designee for the purpose of maintaining the information, (2) an independent distributor or dealer may select a designee for the retention of the manufacturer’s records, provided the manufacturer approves the designation, and (3) the independent distributor or dealer may seek administrative relief in the event he believes the information retained by the manufacturer is being used to his detriment.

“Under section 113(f) of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act (15 U.S.C. 1402(f) and part 574, it is the tire manufacturer who has the ultimate responsibility for maintaining the records of first purchasers. Therefore, it is the tire manufacturer or his designee who must maintain these records. The term designee, as used in the regulation, was not intended to preclude multiple designees; if the tire manufacturer desires, he may designate more than one person to maintain the required information. Furthermore, neither the Act nor the regulation prohibits the distributor or dealer from being the manufacturer’s designee nor do they prohibit a distributor or dealer from selecting someone to be the manufacturer’s designee provided the manufacturer approves of the selection.

“With respect to the possibility of manufacturers using the maintained information to the detriment of a distributor or dealer, the NHTSA will of course investigate claims by distributors or dealers of alleged misconduct and, if the maintained information is being misused, take appropriate action.

“Issued under the authority of sections 103, 113, and 119 of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act, 15 U.S.C. 1392, 1402, and 1407, and the delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51.”

§ 574.1 Scope.

This part sets forth the method by which new tire manufacturers and new tire brand name owners shall identify tires for use on motor vehicles and maintain records of tire purchasers, and the methods by which retreaders and retreaded tire brand name owners shall identify tires for use on motor vehicles. This part also sets forth the methods by which independent tire dealers and distributors shall record, on registration forms, their names and addresses and the identification number of the tires sold to tire purchasers and provide the forms to the purchasers, so that the purchasers may report their names to the new tire manufacturers and new tire brand name owners, and by which other tire dealers and distributors shall record and report the names of tire purchasers to the new tire manufacturers and new tire brand name owners.


(Authority: Secs. 108, 119, and 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1421); sec. 4, Pub. L. 97-311, 96 Stat. 1619 (15 U.S.C. 1418); and delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)

[49 FR 4760, Feb. 8, 1984]


§ 574.2 Purpose.

The purpose of this part is to facilitate notification to purchasers of defective or nonconforming tires, pursuant to Sections 30118 and 30119 of Title 49, United States Code, so that they may take appropriate action in the interest of motor vehicle safety.


[61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]


§ 574.3 Definitions.

(a) Statutory definitions. All terms in this part that are defined in Section 30102 of Title 49, United States Code, are used as defined therein.


(b) Motor vehicle safety standard definitions. Unless otherwise indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter the Standards), are used as defined therein.


(c)(1) Independent means, with respect to a tire distributor or dealer, one whose business is not owned or controlled by a tire manufacturer or brand name owner.


(2) Mileage contract purchaser means a person who purchases or leases tire use on a mileage basis.


(3) New tire brand name owner means a person, other than a new tire manufacturer, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a new tire or a person who licenses another to purchase new tires from a new tire manufacturer bearing the licensor’s brand name.


(4) Retreaded tire brand name owner means a person, other than a retreader, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a retreaded tire or a person who licenses another to purchase retreaded tires from a retreader bearing the licensor’s brand name.


(5) Tire purchaser means a person who buys or leases a new tire, or who buys or leases for 60 days or more a motor vehicle containing a new tire for purposes other than resale.


(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L. 93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C. 1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)

[36 FR 1197, Jan. 26, 1971, as amended at 44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979; 49 FR 38612, Oct. 1, 1984; 61 FR 29495, June 11, 1996]


§ 574.4 Applicability.

This part applies to manufacturers, brand name owners, retreaders, distributors, and dealers of new and retreaded tires, and new non-pneumatic tires and non-pneumatic tire assemblies for use on motor vehicles manufactured after 1948 and to manufacturers and dealers of motor vehicles manufactured after 1948. However, it does not apply to persons who retread tires solely for their own use.


[36 FR 5422, Mar. 23, 1971, as amended at 55 FR 29596, July 20, 1990]


§ 574.5 Tire identification requirements.

(a) Tire identification number (TIN) labeling requirement – (1) New tires. Each new tire manufacturer must conspicuously label on one sidewall of each tire it manufactures, except non-pneumatic tires or non-pneumatic tire assemblies, by permanently molding into or onto the sidewall, in the manner and location specified in Figure 1, a TIN consisting of 13 symbols and containing the information set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section. NOTE: The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards may have more specific TIN marking requirements for some tires. See 49 CFR part 571.


(2) Retreaded tires. Each tire retreader must conspicuously label at least one sidewall of each tire it retreads by permanently molding or branding into or onto the sidewall, in the manner and location specified by Figure 2, a TIN consisting of seven symbols and containing the information set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(3) of this section.


(3) Non-pneumatic tires and non-pneumatic tire assemblies. Each manufacturer of a non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly must permanently mold, stamp, or otherwise permanently mark into or onto at least one side of the non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly a TIN consisting of 13 symbols and containing the information set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section.


(4) Tires for mileage-contract purchasers. Manufacturers or retreaders of tires exclusively for mileage-contract purchasers may, instead of meeting any other requirements of this section, permanently mold into or onto the tire sidewall in lettering at least 6 mm (0.25 inch) high the phrase “for mileage contract use only”.


(5) Optional phase-out of two-symbol plant code. NHTSA will assign to tire manufacturers who were previously assigned a plant code consisting of two symbols a new three-symbol plant code to replace each two-symbol plant code. A manufacturer may continue to use a previously assigned two-symbol plant code until April 13, 2025. Manufacturers who use a two-symbol plant code must comply with paragraph (g) of this section in lieu of the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section. Retreaders may also optionally comply with paragraph (g) of this section in lieu of paragraph (b) of this section until April 13, 2025.


(b) TIN content requirements – (1) Plant code. The plant code, consisting of three symbols, must be the first group of the TIN. The plant code represents the identity of the new tire manufacturer or retreader. The plant code is assigned to the manufacturer or retreader by NHTSA upon request. See § 574.6.


(2) Manufacturer’s code. The manufacturer’s code, consisting of six symbols, is the second group of the TIN for all new tires, but it cannot be used for retreaded tires. The manufacturer’s code must be located between the plant code and the date code as shown in Figure 1. For new tires, the manufacturer’s code may be used as a descriptive code for the purpose of identifying significant characteristics of the tire or to identify the brand name owner. For a new non-pneumatic tire or a non-pneumatic tire assembly, the manufacturer’s code must identify the non-pneumatic tire identification code. Each manufacturer must maintain a detailed record of each manufacturer’s code it uses with the corresponding tire size, tire characteristic, brand name owner, and non-pneumatic tire identification code as applicable and their respective meanings, which it must provide to NHTSA upon request.


(3) Date code. The date code, consisting of four numerical symbols, is the final group. The date code must identify the week and year of manufacture. The first and second symbols of the date code must identify the week of the year by using “01” for the first full calendar week in each year, “02” for the second full calendar week, and so on. The calendar week runs from Sunday through the following Saturday. The final week of each year may include no more than six days of the following year. The third and fourth symbols of the date code must identify the last two digits of the year of manufacture. For example, 0109 means the tire was manufactured in the first full calendar week of 2009, or the week beginning on Sunday, January 4, 2009, and ending on Saturday, January 10, 2009. The date code must be positioned as shown in Figures 1 or 2 for new tires and retreaded tires, respectively.


(c) Retreaded tire mark. The symbol “R” must be used to identify retreaded tires, and must be marked at the time of TIN marking in a location specified in Figure 2. The “R” is not part of the TIN.


(d) Method of marking. (1) At the option of the manufacturer or retreader, the information contained in paragraph (b)(3) of this section may, instead of being permanently molded, be laser etched into or onto the sidewall in the location specified in Figures 1 or 2, respectively, during the manufacturing process of the tire and not later than 24 hours after the tire is removed from the mold.


(2) The labeling for a non-pneumatic tire or a non-pneumatic tire assembly must be in the manner specified in Figure 1 and positioned on the non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly such that it is not placed on the tread or the outermost edge of the tire and is not obstructed by any portion of the non-pneumatic rim or wheel center member designated for use with that non-pneumatic tire in S4.4 of Standard No. 129 (49 CFR 571.129).


(e) The DOT symbol. (1) The DOT symbol constitutes a certification that the marked tire conforms to an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard.


(2) If required, a manufacturer or retreader must place the DOT symbol as shown and positioned relative to the TIN in Figure 1 for new tires and as shown in Figure 2 for retreaded tires.


(3) The DOT symbol must not appear on tires to which no Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard is applicable, except that retreaders of tires for use on motor vehicles other than passenger cars may, prior to retreading, remove the DOT symbol from the sidewall or allow it to remain on the sidewall, at the retreader’s option.


(f) Authorized symbols. The only symbols that manufacturers and retreaders are allowed to use in the tire identification number are: A, B, C, D, E, F, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, T, U, V, W, X, Y, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 0.


(g) Old TIN content requirement. The following requirements are applicable to tire manufacturers who were previously assigned two-symbol plant codes by NHTSA and to retreaders. A new tire manufacturer who continues to use a previously assigned two-symbol plant code in place of a new three-symbol plant code and a retreader may optionally comply with this paragraph instead of paragraph (b) of this section until April 13, 2025.


(1) First grouping. The plant code, consisting of two symbols, must be the first group of the TIN. The plant code represents the identity of the new tire manufacturer and was previously assigned to the manufacturer by NHTSA.


(2) Second grouping. For new tires, the second group, consisting of no more than two symbols, must be used to identify the tire size. For a non-pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire assembly, the second group, consisting of no more than two symbols, must be used to identify the non-pneumatic tire identification code. For retreaded tires, the second group, consisting of no more than two symbols, must identify the retread matrix in which the tire was processed or a tire size code if a matrix was not used to process the retreaded tire. Each new tire manufacturer and retreader must maintain a record of each symbol used, with the corresponding matrix or tire size, which it must provide to NHTSA upon request.


(3) Third grouping. The third group, consisting of no more than four symbols, may be used at the option of the manufacturer or retreader as a descriptive code for the purpose of identifying significant characteristics of the tire. However, if the tire is manufactured for a brand name owner, one of the functions of the third grouping must be to identify the brand name owner. Each manufacturer or retreader who uses the third grouping must maintain a detailed record of any descriptive brand name owner code used, which it must provide to NHTSA upon request.


(4) Fourth grouping. The date code, consisting of four numerical symbols, is the final group. The date code must identify the week and year of manufacture. The first and second symbols of the date code must identify the week of the year by using “01” for the first full calendar week in each year, “02” for the second full calendar week, and so on. The calendar week runs from Sunday through the following Saturday. The final week of each year may include no more than six days of the following year. The third and fourth symbols of the date code must identify the last two digits of the year of manufacture. For example, 0109 means the tire was manufactured in the first full calendar week of 2009, or the week beginning on Sunday, January 4, 2009, and ending on Saturday, January 10, 2009. The date code must be positioned as shown in Figures 1 or 2 for new tires and retreaded tires, respectively.




[80 FR 19560, Apr. 13, 2015]


§ 574.6 How to obtain a plant code.

To obtain a plant code required by § 574.5(b)(1), each manufacturer of new or retreaded pneumatic tires, non-pneumatic tires, or non-pneumatic tire assemblies must apply in writing to the Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SW., Washington, DC 20590, identify itself as a tire manufacturer or retreader, and furnish the following information:


(a) The name, or other designation identifying the applicant, and its main office address;


(b) The name, or other identifying designation, of each individual plant operated by the manufacturer and the address of each plant, if applicable;


(c) The name, or other identifying designation, of the corporate owner, if applicable, of each plant;


(d) The email addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers for each person or corporation listed, including the main office; and


(e) The type of tires manufactured at each plant, e.g., pneumatic tires for passenger cars, buses, trucks, or motorcycles; pneumatic retreaded tires; or non-pneumatic tires or non-pneumatic tire assemblies.


Note to § 574,6: Additional requirements for new tire manufacturers may be applicable. See 49 CFR parts 551 and 566.


[80 FR 19560, Apr. 13, 2015]


§ 574.7 Information requirements – new tire manufacturers, new tire brand name owners.

(a)(1) Each new tire manufacturer and each new tire brand name owner (hereinafter referred to in this section and § 574.8 as “tire manufacturer”) or its designee, shall provide tire registration forms to every distributor and dealer of its tires which offers new tires for sale or lease to tire purchasers.


(2) Each tire registration form provided to independent distributors and dealers pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall contain space for recording the information specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(iii) of this section. Each form shall:


(i) Have the following physical characteristics:


(A) Be rectangular;


(B) Be not less than 3
1/2 inches high, 5 inches long, and 0.007 inches thick;


(C) Be not more than 4
1/4 inches high, 6 inches long, and 0.016 inch thick.


(ii) On the address side of the form, be addressed with the name and address of the manufacturer or its designee, and include, in the upper right hand corner, the statement “Affix a postcard stamp.”


(iii) On the other side of the form:


(A) Include the tire manufacturer’s name, unless it appears on the address side of the form;


(B) Include a statement explaining the purpose of the form and how a consumer may register tires. The statement shall:


(1) Include the heading “IMPORTANT”.


(2) Include the sentence: “In case of a recall, we can reach you only if we have your name and address.”


(3) Indicate that sending in the card will add a person to the manufacturer’s recall list.


(4) A tire manufacturer may voluntarily provide means for tire registration via the Internet, by telephone or other electronic means. If a tire manufacturer voluntarily provides a Web site or other means by which its tires can be registered, it may (but is not required to) include a sentence listing one or more such means, beginning with the phrase “Instead of mailing this form, you can * * *.” Example: Instead of mailing this form, you can register online at [insert tire manufacturer’s registration Web site address].


(5) Include the sentence: “Do it today.”


(C) Include space for recording tire identification numbers for six tires.


(D) Use shading to distinguish between areas of the form to be filled in by sellers and customers.


(1) Include the statement: “Shaded areas must be filled in by seller.”


(2) The areas of the form for recording tire identification numbers and information about the seller of the tires must be shaded.


(3) The area of the form for recording the customer name and address must not be shaded.


(E) Include, in the top right corner, the phrase “OMB Control No. 2127-0050”.


(3) Each tire registration form provided to distributors and dealers that are not independent distributors or dealers pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section must contain space for recording the information specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(iii) of this section. Each form must include:


(A) A statement indicating where the form should be returned, including the name and mailing address of the manufacturer or its designee.


(B) The tire manufacturers’ logo or other identification, if the manufacturer is not identified as part of the statement indicating where the form should be returned.


(C) The statement: “IMPORTANT: FEDERAL LAW REQUIRES TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS MUST BE REGISTERED”.


(D) In the top right corner, the phrase “OMB Control No. 2127-0050”.


(4)(i) Name and address of the tire purchaser.


(ii) Tire identification number.


(iii) Name and address of the tire seller or other means by which the tire manufacturer can identify the tire seller.


(b) Each tire manufacturer shall record and maintain, or have recorded and maintained for it by a designee, the information from registration forms which are submitted to it or its designee. No tire manufacturer shall use the information on the registration forms for any commercial purpose detrimental to tire distributors and dealers. Any tire manufacturer to which registration forms are mistakenly sent shall forward those registration forms to the proper tire manufacturer within 90 days of the receipt of the forms.


(c) Each tire manufacturer shall maintain, or have maintained for it by a designee, a record of each tire distributor and dealer that purchases tires directly from the manufacturer and sells them to tire purchasers, the number of tires purchased by each such distributor or dealer, the number of tires for which reports have been received from each such distributor or dealer other than an independent distributor or dealer, the number of tires for which reports have been received from each such independent distributor or dealer, the total number of tires for which registration forms have been submitted to the manufacturer or its designee, and the total number of tires sold by the manufacturer.


(d) The information that is specified in paragraph (a)(4) of this section and recorded on registration forms submitted to a tire manufacturer or its designee shall be maintained for a period of not less than five years from the date on which the information is recorded by the manufacturer or its designee.


(e) Tire manufacturers may voluntarily provide means for tire registration via the Internet, by telephone or other electronic means.


(f) Each tire manufacturer shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) of this section with respect to tire registration information submitted to it or its designee by any means authorized by the manufacturer in addition to the use of registration forms.


(Authority: Secs. 108, 119, and 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1421); sec. 4, Pub. L. 97-311, 96 Stat. 1619 (15 U.S.C. 1418); and delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)

[49 FR 4760, Feb. 8, 1984; 49 FR 5621, Feb. 14, 1984, as amended at 56 FR 49427, Sept. 30, 1991; 64 FR 36815, July 8, 1999; 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002; 71 FR 39233, July 12, 2006; 73 FR 72368, Nov. 28, 2008]


§ 574.8 Information requirements – tire distributors and dealers.

(a) Independent distributors and dealers.


(1) Each independent distributor and each independent dealer selling or leasing new tires to tire purchasers or lessors (hereinafter referred to in this section as “tire purchasers”) shall comply with paragraph (a)(1)(i), (a)(1)(ii) or (a)(1)(iii) of this section:


(i) At the time of sale or lease of the tire, provide each tire purchaser with a paper tire registration form on which the distributor or dealer has recorded the following information:


(A) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or leased to the tire purchaser, and


(B) The distributor’s or dealer’s name and street address. In lieu of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or dealer’s e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also be used.


(ii) Record the following information on a paper tire registration form and return it to the tire manufacturer, or its designee, on behalf of the tire purchaser, at no charge to the tire purchaser and within 30 days of the date of sale or lease:


(A) The purchaser’s name and address,


(B) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or leased to the tire purchaser, and


(C) The distributor’s or dealer’s name and street address. In lieu of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or dealer’s e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also be used.


(iii) Electronically transmit the following information on the tire registration form by any means listed on the form by the tire manufacturer, or by such other means as may be authorized by the tire manufacturer, to the tire manufacturer or its designee, using secure means (e.g., https on the Web), at no charge to the tire purchaser and within 30 days of the date of sale or lease:


(A) The purchaser’s name and address,


(B) The entire tire identification number of the tire(s) sold or leased to the tire purchaser, and


(C) The distributor’s or dealer’s name and street address. In lieu of the street address, and if one is available, the distributor or dealer’s e-mail address or Web site may be recorded. Other means of identifying the distributor or dealer known to the manufacturer may also be used.


(2) Each independent distributor or dealer that complies with paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section shall use either the tire registration forms provided by the tire manufacturers pursuant to § 574.7(a) or registration forms obtained from another source. Paper forms obtained from other sources must comply with the requirements specified in § 574.7(a) for forms provided by tire manufacturers to independent distributors and dealers.


(3) Multiple tire sales or leases by the same tire purchaser may be recorded on a single paper registration form or in a single Web site transaction.


(4) Each independent distributor or dealer that is complying with paragraph (a)(1)(iii) with respect to a sale or lease shall include a statement to that effect on the invoice for that sale or lease and provide the invoice to the tire purchaser.


(b) Other distributors and dealers.


(1) Each distributor and each dealer, other than an independent distributor or dealer, selling new tires to tire purchasers:


(i) shall submit, using paper registration forms or, if authorized by the tire manufacturer, secure electronic means, the information specified in § 574.7(a)(4) to the manufacturer of the tires sold, or to the manufacturer’s designee.


(ii) shall submit the information specified in § 574.7(a)(4) to the tire manufacturer or the manufacturer’s designee, not less often than every 30 days. A distributor or dealer selling fewer than 40 tires of all makes, types and sizes during a 30 day period may wait until a total of 40 new tires is sold. In no event may more than six months elapse before the § 574.7(a)(4) information is forwarded to the respective tire manufacturers or their designees.


(c) Each distributor and each dealer selling new tires to other tire distributors or dealers shall supply to the distributor or dealer a means to record the information specified in § 574.7(a)(4), unless such means has been provided to that distributor or dealer by another person or by a manufacturer.


(d) Each distributor and each dealer shall immediately stop selling any group of tires when so directed by a notification issued pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30118, Notification of defects and noncompliance.


[73 FR 72368, Nov. 28, 2008]


§ 574.9 Requirements for motor vehicle dealers.

(a) Each motor vehicle dealer who sells a used motor vehicle for purposes other than resale, who leases a motor vehicle for more than 60 days, that is equipped with new tires is considered, for purposes of this part, to be a tire dealer and shall meet the requirements specified in § 574.8.


(b) Each person selling a motor vehicle to first purchasers for purposes other than resale, that is equipped with new tires that were not on the motor vehicle when shipped by the vehicle manufacturer is considered a tire dealer for purposes of this part and shall meet the requirements specified in § 574.8.


(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L. 93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C. 1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)

[44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979]


§ 574.10 Requirements for motor vehicle manufacturers.

Each motor vehicle manufacturer, or his designee, shall maintain a record of the new tires on or in each vehicle shipped by him or a motor vehicle distributor or dealer, and shall maintain a record of the name and address of the first purchaser for purposes other than resale of each vehicle equipped with such tires. These records shall be maintained for a period of not less than 5 years from the date of sale of the vehicle to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale.


(Authority: Secs. 103, 108, 112, 119, 201, Pub. L. 89-563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1397, 1401, 1407, 1421); secs. 102, 103, 104, Pub. L. 93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1411-1420); 92 Stat. 2689 (15 U.S.C. 1418); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.51)

[44 FR 7964, Feb. 8, 1979, as amended at 67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]


PART 575 – CONSUMER INFORMATION


Authority:49 U.S.C. 32302, 32304A, 30111, 30115, 30117, 30123, 30166, 30181, 30182, 30183, and 32908, Pub. L. 104-414, 114 Stat. 1800, Pub. L. 109-59, 119 Stat. 1144, Pub. L. 110-140, 121 Stat. 1492, 15 U.S.C. 1232(g); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95.

Subpart A – Regulations Issued Under Section 112(d) of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act; General


Source:35 FR 6867, Apr. 30, 1970, unless otherwise noted.

§ 575.1 Scope.

This part contains National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations relating to consumer information.


[75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010]


§ 575.2 Definitions.

(a) Statutory definitions. (1) All terms used in this part, subject to paragraph (a)(2) of this section, that are defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102, are used as defined therein.


(2) All terms used in Subpart D of this part that are defined in 15 U.S.C. 1231, are used as defined therein.


(b) Motor Vehicle Safety Standard definitions. Unless otherwise indicated, all terms used in this part that are defined in the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, part 571 of this subchapter (hereinafter “the Standards”), are used as defined in the Standards without regard to the applicability of a standard in which a definition is contained.


(c) Definitions used in this part.


Owners manual means the document which contains the manufacturers comprehensive vehicle operating and maintenance instructions, and which is intended to remain with the vehicle for the life of the vehicle.


Skid number means the frictional resistance measured in accordance with ASTM E 274 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3) at 40 miles per hour, omitting water delivery as specified in paragraph 7.1 of ASTM E 274 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


[35 FR 6867, Apr. 30, 1970, as amended at 38 FR 5339, Feb. 28, 1973; 48 FR 44081, Sept. 27, 1983; 54 FR 48749, Nov. 27, 1989; 64 FR 27924, May 24, 1999; 75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010]


§ 575.3 Matter incorporated by reference.

(a) Certain material is incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this section, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) must publish notice of change in the Federal Register and the material must be available to the public. All approved material is available for inspection at the NHTSA Technical Information Services Reading Room (http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/trd/), 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590 (888-327-4236), and at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. All approved material is also available from the sources listed below. If you experience difficulty obtaining the standards referenced below, contact NHTSA’s Office of Rulemaking, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590, phone number: (202) 366-0846.


(b) International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, CP 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland, + 41 22 749 01 11, http://www.iso.org/iso/home.htm. All ISO materials are also available from the U.S. ISO member, American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036-7417, 212-642-4900, http://www.ansi.org/.


(1) International Organization for Standardization (ISO), ISO 28580:2009(E) (“ISO 28580”), “Passenger car, truck and bus tyres – Methods of measuring rolling resistance – Single point test and correlation of measurement results,” First edition (July 1, 2009), IBR approved for § 575.106.


(2) [Reserved]


(c) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959, 610-832-9500, http://www.astm.org/.


(1) ASTM E 501-08 (“ASTM E 501”), “Standard Specification for Standard Rib Tire for Pavement Skid-Resistance Tests” (June 2008), IBR approved for § 575.104 and § 575.106.


(2) ASTM E 1136-93 (Reapproved 2003) (“ASTM E 1136”), “Standard Specification for a Radial Standard Reference Test Tire” (July 1993), IBR approved for § 575.104.


(3) ASTM E 1337-90 (Reapproved 2002) (“ASTM E 1337”), “Standard Test Method for Determining Longitudinal Peak Braking Coefficient of Paved Surfaces Using a Standard Reference Test Tire” (April 1990), IBR approved for § 575.106.


(d) The following standards are not available from the original publisher or a standards reseller. As indicated in paragraph (a) of this section, the standards are available for inspection at the NHTSA Technical Information Services Reading Room (http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/trd/), 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590 (888-327-4236), and at NARA. For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-locations.html. If you experience difficulty obtaining the standards referenced below, contact NHTSA’s Office of Rulemaking, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590, phone number (202) 366-0846.


(1) ASTM E 274-79 (“ASTM E 274”), “Standard Test Method for Skid Resistance of Paved Surfaces Using a Full-Scale Tire” (February 1980), IBR approved for § 575.104.


(2) ASTM F 377-74 (“ASTM F 377”), “Standard Method for Calibration of Braking Force for Testing of Pneumatic Tires” (March 1974), IBR approved for § 575.104.


[75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010, as amended at 76 FR 79121, Dec. 21, 2011]


§ 575.4 Application.

(a) General. Except as provided in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, each section set forth in subpart B of this part applies according to its terms to motor vehicles and tires manufactured after the effective date indicated.


(b) Military vehicles. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires sold directly to the Armed Forces of the United States in conformity with contractual specifications.


(c) Export. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires intended solely for export and so labeled or tagged.


(d) Import. This part does not apply to motor vehicles or tires imported for purposes other than resale.


[39 FR 1039, Jan. 4, 1974]


§ 575.5 Separability.

If any section established in this part or its application to any person or circumstances is held invalid, the remainder of the part and the application of that section to other persons or circumstances is not affected thereby.


§ 575.6 Requirements.

(a)(1) At the time a motor vehicle is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer of that vehicle shall provide the Uniform Tire Quality Grading information required by § 575.104(d)(1)(iii) in the owner’s manual of each vehicle it produces. The vehicle manufacturer shall also provide to the purchaser, in writing and in the English language, the information specified in § 575.103 of this part that is applicable to that vehicle. The information provided with a vehicle may contain more than one table, but the document must either:


(i) Clearly and unconditionally indicate which of the tables apply to the vehicle with which it is provided, or


(ii) Contain a statement on its cover referring the reader to the vehicle certification label for specific information concerning which of the tables apply to that vehicle. If the manufacturer chooses option in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section, the vehicle certification label shall include such specific information.



Example 1.Manufacturer X furnishes a document containing several tables that apply to various groups of vehicles that it produces. The document contains the following notation on its front page: “The information that applies to this vehicle is contained in Table 5.” That notation satisfies the requirement.


Example 2.Manufacturer Y furnishes a document containing several tables as in Example 1, with the following notation on its front page:
“Information applies as follows:

Model P. Regular cab, 135 in. (3,430 mm) wheel base – Table 1.

Model P. Club cab, 142 in. (3,607 mm) wheel base – Table 2.

Model Q – Table 3.”
This notation does not satisfy the requirement, since it is conditioned on the model or the equipment of the vehicle with which the document is furnished, and therefore additional information is required to select the proper table.

(2)(i) At the time a motor vehicle manufactured on or after September 1, 1990 is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point type, the following statement in the owner’s manual, or, if there is no owner’s manual, on a one-page document:



If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying [INSERT NAME OF MANUFACTURER].


If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or [INSERT NAME OF MANUFACTURER].


To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.


(ii) The manufacturer shall specify in the table of contents of the owner’s manual the location of the statement in 575.6(a)(2)(i). The heading in the table of contents shall state “Reporting Safety Defects.”


(3) For vehicles manufactured prior to September 1, 2000, at the time a motor vehicle is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer of that vehicle shall provide the purchaser, in writing and in the English language, the information specified in §§ 575.103 and 575.104 of this part that is applicable to that vehicle and its tires. The document provided with a vehicle may contain more than one table, but the document must either clearly and unconditionally indicate which of the tables apply to the vehicle with which it is provided, or contain a statement on its cover referring the reader to the vehicle certification label for specific information concerning which of the tables apply to that vehicle. If the manufacturer chooses option (a)(2) of this section, the vehicle certification label shall include such specific information.



Example 1.Manufacturer X furnishes a document containing several tables, which apply to various groups of vehicles that it produces. The document contains the following notation on its front page: “The information that applies to this vehicle is contained in Table 5.” The notation satisfies the requirement.


Example 2.Manufacturer Y furnishes a document containing several tables as in Example 1, with the following notation on its front page: Information applies as follows:

Model P, 6-cylinder engine – Table 1.

Model P, 8-cylinder engine – Table 2.

Model Q – Table 3.

This notation does not satisfy the requirement, since it is conditioned on the model or the equipment of the vehicle with which the document is furnished, and therefore additional information is required to select the proper table.


(4) When a motor vehicle that has a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, except a motorcycle or low speed vehicle, and that is manufactured on or after September 1, 2005, is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point type, a discussion of the items specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (v) of this section in the owner’s manual, or, if there is no owner’s manual, in a document:


(i) Tire labeling, including a description and explanation of each marking on the tires provided with the vehicle, and information about the location of the Tire Identification Number (TIN);


(ii) Recommended tire inflation pressure, including a description and explanation of:


(A) Recommended cold tire inflation pressure,


(B) The vehicle placard and tire inflation pressure label specified in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 110 and their location in the vehicle,


(C) Adverse safety consequences of underinflation (including tire failure), and


(D) Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation;


(iii) Glossary of tire terminology, including “cold tire pressure,” “maximum inflation pressure,” and “recommended inflation pressure,” and all non-technical terms defined in S3 of FMVSS Nos. 110 & 139;


(iv) Tire care, including maintenance and safety practices;


(v) Vehicle load limits, including a description and explanation of:


(A) Locating and understanding load limit information, total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity, and cargo capacity,


(B) Calculating total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations including quantitative examples showing/illustrating how the vehicle’s cargo and luggage capacity decreases as the combined number and size of occupants increases,


(C) Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capabilities,


(D) Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires.


(5) When a motor vehicle that has a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, except a motorcycle or low speed vehicle, and that is manufactured on or after September 1, 2005, is delivered to the first purchaser for purposes other than resale, the manufacturer shall provide to the purchaser, in writing in the English language and not less than 10 point type, the following verbatim statement, as applicable, in the owner’s manual, or, if there is no owner’s manual, in a document:


(i) For vehicles except trailers: “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –


(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.


(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.


(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.


(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)


(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.


(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.”


(ii) For trailers: “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –


(1) Locate the statement “The weight of cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.


(2) This figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.”


(3) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity.


(b) At the time a motor vehicle tire is delivered to the first purchaser for a purpose other than resale, the manufacturer of that tire, or in the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the brand name owner, shall provide to that purchaser the information specified in subpart B of this part that is applicable to that tire.


(c) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles, each brand name owner of tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name owner shall provide for examination by prospective purchasers, at each location where its vehicles or tires are offered for sale by a person with whom the manufacturer or brand name owner has a contractual, proprietary, or other legal relationship, or by a person who has such a relationship with a distributor of the manufacturer or brand name owner concerning the vehicle or tire in question, the information specified in subpart B of this part that is applicable to each of the vehicles or tires offered for sale at that location. The information shall be provided without charge and in sufficient quantity to be available for retention by prospective purchasers or sent by mail to a prospective purchaser upon his request. With respect to newly introduced vehicles or tires, the information shall be provided for examination by prospective purchasers not later than the day on which the manufacturer or brand name owner first authorizes those vehicles or tires to be put on general public display and sold to consumers.


(d)(1)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section, in the case of all sections of subpart B other than § 575.104, as they apply to information submitted prior to new model introduction, each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the information specified in subpart B of this part that is applicable to the vehicles offered for sale, at least 90 days before information on such vehicles is first provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.


(ii) Where an unforeseen preintroduction modification in vehicle design or equipment results in a change in vehicle performance for a characteristic included in subpart B of this part, a manufacturer of motor vehicles may revise information previously furnished under paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section by submission to the Administrator of 2 copies of the revised information reflecting the performance changes, at least 30 days before information on such vehicles is first provided to prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.


(2)(i) In the case of § 575.104, each brand name owner of tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name owner shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the information specified in Subpart B of this part that is applicable to the tires offered for sale, at least 30 days before it is first provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.


(ii) In the case of all other sections of Subpart B of this Part as they apply to post-introduction changes in information submitted for the current model year, each manufacturer of motor vehicles, each brand name owner of tires, and each manufacturer of tires for which there is no brand name owner shall submit to the Administrator 2 copies of the information specified in Subpart B of this part that is applicable to the vehicles or tires offered for sale, at least 30 days before it is first provided for examination by prospective purchasers pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.


[39 FR 1039, Jan. 4, 1974, as amended at 41 FR 13923, Apr. 1, 1976; 45 FR 47153, July 14, 1980; 47 FR 7258, Feb. 18, 1982; 52 FR 27810, July 24, 1987; 54 FR 48749, Nov. 27, 1989; 64 FR 27924, May 24, 1999; 67 FR 69631, Nov. 18, 2002; 69 FR 31320, June 3, 2004; 70 FR 35557, June 21, 2005]


§ 575.7 Special vehicles.

A manufacturer who produces vehicles having a configuration not available for purchase by the general public need not make available to ineligible purchasers, pursuant to § 575.6(c), the information for those vehicles specified in subpart B of this part, and shall identify those vehicles when furnishing the information required by § 575.6(d).


[40 FR 11727, Mar. 13, 1975]


Subpart B – Regulations; Consumer Information Items

§§ 575.101-575.102 [Reserved]

§ 575.103 Truck-camper loading.

(a) Scope. This section requires manufacturers of slide-in campers to affix to each camper a label that contains information relating to identification and proper loading of the camper and to provide more detailed loading information in the owner’s manual. This section also requires manufacturers of trucks that would accommodate slide-in campers to specify the cargo weight ratings and the longitudinal limits within which the center of gravity for the cargo weight rating should be located.


(b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to provide information that can be used to reduce overloading and improper load placement in truck-camper combinations and unsafe truck- camper matching in order to prevent accidents resulting from the adverse effects of these conditions on vehicle steering and braking.


(c) Application. This section applies to slide-in campers and to trucks that are capable of accommodating slide- in campers.


(d) Definitions.


Camper means a structure designed to be mounted in the cargo area of a truck, or attached to an incomplete vehicle with motive power, for the purpose of providing shelter for persons.


Cargo Weight Rating means the value specified by the manufacturer as the cargo-carrying capacity, in pounds or kilograms, of a vehicle, exclusive of the weight of occupants in designated seating positions, computed as 68 kilograms or 150 pounds times the number of designated seating positions.


Slide-in Camper means a camper having a roof, floor, and sides, designed to be mounted on and removable from the cargo area of a truck by the user.


(e) Requirements – (1) Slide-in Camper – (i) Labels. Each slide-in camper shall have permanently affixed to it, in such a manner that it cannot be removed without defacing or destroying it, and in a plainly visible location on an exterior rear surface other than the roof, steps, or bumper extension, a label containing the following information in the English language lettered in block capitals and numerals not less than 2.4 millimeters (three thirty-seconds of an inch) high, of a color contrasting with the background, in the order shown below and in the form illustrated in Figure 1.


(A) Name of camper manufacturer. The full corporate or individual name of the actual assembler of the camper shall be spelled out, except that such abbreviations as “Co.” or “Inc.” and their foreign equivalents, and the first and middle initials of individuals may be used. The name of the manufacturer shall be preceded by the words “Manufactured by” or “Mfd by.”


(B) Month and year of manufacture. It may be spelled out, such as “June 1995” or expressed in numerals, such as “695.”


(C) The following statement completed as appropriate:


“Camper weight is ______ kg. (______ lbs.) maximum when it contains standard equipment, ______ liters (______ gal.) of water, ______ kg. (______ lbs.) of bottled gas, and ______ cubic meters (______ cubic ft.) refrigerator (or icebox with ______ kg. (______ lbs.) of ice, as applicable). Consult owner’s manual (or data sheet, as applicable) for weights of additional or optional equipment.”


(D) “Liters (or gal.) of water” refers to the volume of water necessary to fill the camper’s fresh water tanks to capacity. “Kg. (or lbs.) of bottled gas” refers to the amount of gas necessary to fill the camper’s bottled gas tanks to capacity. The statement regarding a “refrigerator” or “icebox” refers to the capacity of the refrigerator with which the vehicle is equipped or the weight of the ice with which the icebox may be filled. Any of these items may be omitted from the statement if the corresponding accessories are not included with the camper, provided that the omission is noted in the camper owner’s manual as required in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section.


(ii) Owner’s manual. Each slide-in camper manufacturer shall provide with each camper a manual or other document containing the information specified in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) (A) through (F) of this section.


(A) The statement and information provided on the label as specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section. Instead of the information required by paragraphs (e)(1)(i)(B) of this section, a manufacturer may use the statements “See camper identification label located (as applicable) for month and year of manufacture.” If water, bottled gas, or refrigerator (icebox) has been omitted from this statement, the manufacturer’s information shall note such omission and advise that the weight of any such item when added to the camper should be added to the maximum camper weight figure used in selecting an appropriate truck.


(B) A list of other additional or optional equipment that the camper is designed to carry, and the maximum weight of each if its weight is more than 9 kg. (20 lbs) when installed.


(C) The statement: “To estimate the total cargo load that will be placed on a truck, add the weight of all passengers in the camper, the weight of supplies, tools, and all other cargo, the weight of installed additional or optional camper equipment, and the manufacturer’s camper weight figure. Select a truck that has a cargo weight rating that is equal to or greater than the total cargo load of the camper and whose manufacturer recommends a cargo center of gravity zone that will contain the camper’s center of gravity when it is installed.”


(D) The statements: “When loading this camper, store heavy gear first, keeping it on or close to the camper floor. Place heavy things far enough forward to keep the loaded camper’s center of gravity within the zone recommended by the truck manufacturer. Store only light objects on high shelves. Distribute weight to obtain even side-to-side balance of the loaded vehicle. Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. The load on an axle should not exceed its gross axle weight rating (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These weight ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is located on the left side of the vehicle, normally on the dash panel, hinge pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the driver on trucks manufactured on or after January 1, 1972. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.”


(E) A picture showing the location of the longitudinal center of gravity of the camper within an accuracy of 5 centimeters (2 inches) under the loaded condition specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i)(D) of this section in the manner illustrated in Figure 2.


(F) A picture showing the proper match of a truck and slide-in camper in the form illustrated in Figure 3.


(2) Trucks. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section, each manufacturer of a truck that is capable of accommodating a slide-in camper shall provide to the purchaser in the owner’s manual or other document delivered with the truck, in writing and in the English language, the information specified in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) (A) through (E) of this section.


(A) A picture showing the manufacturer’s recommended longitudinal center of gravity zone for the cargo weight rating in the form illustrated in Figure 4. The boundaries of the zone shall be such that when a slide-in camper equal in weight to the truck’s cargo weight rating is installed, no GAWR of the truck is exceeded.


(B) The truck’s cargo weight rating.


(C) The statements: “When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity zone when installed.”


(D) A picture showing the proper match of a truck and slide-in camper in the form illustrated in Figure 3.


(E) The statements: “Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is located on the left side of the vehicle, normally the dash, hinge pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the driver. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.”


(ii) If a truck would accommodate a slide-in camper but the manufacturer of the truck recommends that the truck not be used for that purpose, the information specified in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section shall not be provided but instead the manufacturer shall provide a statement that the truck should not be used to carry a slide-in camper.



MFD. BY: (CAMPER MANUFACTURER’S NAME)

(MONTH AND YEAR OF MANUFACTURE)

CAMPER WEIGHT IS ______ KG (______ LB) MAXIMUM WHEN IT CONTAINS STANDARD EQUIPMENT, ______ LITERS (______ GAL) OF WATER, ______ KG (______ LB) OF BOTTLED GAS, AND ______ CUBIC METERS (______ CUBIC FT) REFRIGERATOR (OR ICEBOX WITH ______ KG (______ LB) OF ICE, AS APPLICABLE). CONSULT OWNER’S MANUAL (OR DATA SHEET AS APPLICABLE) FOR WEIGHTS OF ADDITIONAL OR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT.


Figure 1. Label for Camper




[61 FR 36657, July 12, 1996, as amended at 70 FR 39970, July 12, 2005]


§ 575.104 Uniform tire quality grading standards.

(a) Scope. This section requires motor vehicle and tire manufacturers and tire brand name owners to provide information indicating the relative performance of passenger car tires in the areas of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.


(b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of passenger car tires.


(c) Application. (1) This section applies to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, this section does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to limited production tires as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.


(2) “Limited production tire” means a tire meeting all of the following criteria, as applicable:


(i) The annual domestic production or importation into the United States by the tire’s manufacturer of tires of the same design and size as the tire does not exceed 15,000 tires;


(ii) In the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the annual domestic purchase or importation into the United States by a brand name owner of tires of the same design and size as the tire does not exceed 15,000 tires;


(iii) The tire’s size was not listed as a vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire size designation for a new motor vehicle produced in or imported into the United States in quantities greater than 10,000 during the calendar year preceding the year of the tire’s manufacture; and


(iv) The total annual domestic production or importation into the United States by the tire’s manufacturer, and in the case of a tire marketed under a brand name, the total annual domestic purchase or purchase for importation into the United States by the tire’s brand name owner, of tires meeting the criteria of paragraphs (c)(2) (i), (ii), and (iii) of this section, does not exceed 35,000 tires.


Tire design is the combination of general structural characteristics, materials, and tread pattern, but does include cosmetic, identifying or other minor variations among tires.

(d) Requirements – (1) Information. (i) Each manufacturer of tires, or in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, each brand name owner, shall provide grading information for each tire of which he is the manufacturer or brand name owner in the manner set forth in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) (A) and (B) of this section. The grades for each tire shall be only those specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. Each tire shall be able to achieve the level of performance represented by each grade with which it is labeled. An individual tire need not, however, meet further requirements after having been subjected to the test for any one grade.


(A) Except for a tire of a new tire line, manufactured within the first six months of production of the tire line, each tire shall be graded with the words, letters, symbols, and figures specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, permanently molded into or onto the tire sidewall between the tire’s maximum section width and shoulder in accordance with one of the methods described in Figure 1. For purposes of this paragraph, new tire line shall mean a group of tires differing substantially in construction, materials, or design from those previously sold by the manufacturer or brand name owner of the tires. As used in this paragraph, the term “construction” refers to the internal structure of the tire (e.g., cord angles, number and placement of breakers), “materials” refers to the substances used in manufacture of the tire (e.g., belt fiber, rubber compound), and “design” refers to properties or conditions imposed by the tire mold (e.g., aspect ratio, tread pattern).


(B) Each tire manufactured on and after the effective date of these amendments, other than a tire sold as original equipment on a new vehicle, shall have affixed to its tread surface so as not to be easily removable a label or labels containing its grades and other information in the form illustrated in Figure 2, Parts I and II. The treadwear grade attributed to the tire shall be either imprinted or indelibly stamped on the label containing the material in Part I of Figure 2, directly to the right of or below the word “TREADWEAR.” The traction grade attributed to the tire shall be indelibly circled in an array of the potential grade letters AA, A, B, or C, directly to the right of or below the word “TRACTION” in Part I of Figure 2. The temperature resistance grade attributed to the tire shall be indelibly circled in an array of the potential grade letters A, B, or C, directly to the right of or below the word “TEMPERATURE” in Part I of Figure 2. The words “TREADWEAR,” “TRACTION,” AND “TEMPERATURE,” in that order, may be laid out vertically or horizontally. The text of Part II of Figure 2 may be printed in capital letters. The text of Part I and the text of Part II of Figure 2 need not appear on the same label, but the edges of the two texts must be positioned on the tire tread so as to be separated by a distance of no more than one inch. If the text of Part I and the text of Part II of Figure 2 are placed on separate labels, the notation “See EXPLANATION OF DOT QUALITY GRADES” shall be added to the bottom of the Part I text, and the words “EXPLANATION OF DOT QUALITY GRADES” shall appear at the top of the Part II text. The text of Figure 2 shall be oriented on the tire tread surface with lines of type running perpendicular to the tread circumference. If a label bearing a tire size designation is attached to the tire tread surface and the tire size designation is oriented with lines type running perpendicular to the tread circumference, the text of Figure 2 shall read in the same direction as the tire size designation.


(ii) In the case of the information required by § 575.6(c) to be furnished to prospective purchasers of tires, each tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall, as part of that information, list all possible grades for traction and temperature resistance, and restate verbatim the explanation for each performance area specified in Figure 2. The information need not be in the same format as in Figure 2. The information must indicate clearly and unambiguously the grade in each performance area for each tire of that manufacturer or brand name owner offered for sale at the particular location.


(iii) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles equipped with passenger car tires shall include in the owner’s manual of each such vehicle a list of all possible grades for traction and temperature resistance and restate verbatim the explanation for each performance area specified in Figure 2, Part II. The information need not be in the exact format of Figure 2, Part II, but it must contain a statement referring the reader to the tire sidewall for the specific tire grades for the tires with which the vehicle is equipped, as follows:


Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:


Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

(iv) In the case of information required in accordance with § 575.6(a) to be furnished to the first purchaser of a new motor vehicle, each manufacturer of motor vehicles shall, as part of the required information, list all possible grades for traction and temperature resistance and restate verbatim the explanation for each performance area specified in Figure 2 to this section. The information need not be in the format of Figure 2 to this section, but it must contain a statement referring the reader to the tire sidewall for the specific tire grades for the tires with which the vehicle is equipped.


(2) Performance – (i) Treadwear. Each tire shall be graded for treadwear performance with the word “TREADWEAR” followed by a number of two or three digits representing the tire’s grade for treadwear, expressed as a percentage of the NHTSA nominal treadwear value, when tested in accordance with the conditions and procedures specified in paragraph (e) of this section. Treadwear grades shall be expressed in multiples of 20 (for example, 80, 120, 160).


(ii) Traction. Each tire shall be graded for traction performance with the word “TRACTION,” followed by the symbols AA, A, B, or C, when the tire is tested in accordance with the conditions and procedures specified in paragraph (f) of this section.


(A) The tire shall be graded C when the adjusted traction coefficient is either:


(1) 0.38 or less when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, or


(2) 0.26 or less when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section.


(B) The tire may be graded B only when its adjusted traction coefficient is both:


(1) More than 0.38 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, and


(2) More than 0.26 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section.


(C) The tire may be graded A only when its adjusted traction coefficient is both:


(1) More than 0.47 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, and


(2) More than 0.35 when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section.


(D) The tire may be graded AA only when its adjusted traction coefficient is both:


(1) More than 0.54μ when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the asphalt surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section; and


(2) More than 0.38μ when tested in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the concrete surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section.


(iii) Temperature resistance. Each tire shall be graded for temperature resistance performance with the word “TEMPERATURE” followed by the letter A, B, or C, based on its performance when the tire is tested in accordance with the procedures specified in paragraph (g) of this section. A tire shall be considered to have successfully completed a test stage in accordance with this paragraph if, at the end of the test stage, it exhibits no visual evidence of tread, sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, or bead separation, chunking, broken cords, cracking or open splices as defined in § 571.109 of this chapter, and the tire pressure is not less than the pressure specified in paragraph (g)(1) of this section.


(A) The tire shall be graded C if it fails to complete the 500 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.


(B) The tire may be graded B only if it successfully completes the 500 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.


(C) The tire may be graded A only if it successfully completes the 575 rpm test stage specified in paragraph (g)(9) of this section.


(e) Treadwear grading conditions and procedures – (1) Conditions. (i) Tire treadwear performance is evaluated on a specific roadway course approximately 400 miles in length, which is established by the NHTSA both for its own compliance testing and for that of regulated persons. The course is designed to produce treadwear rates that are generally representative of those encountered by tires in public use. The course and driving procedures are described in appendix A of this section.


(ii) Treadwear grades are evaluated by first measuring the performance of a candidate tire on the government test course, and then correcting the projected mileages obtained to account for environmental variations on the basis of the performance of the course monitoring tires run in the same convoy.


(iii) In convoy tests, each vehicle in the same convoy, except for the lead vehicle, is throughout the test within human eye range of the vehicle immediately ahead of it.


(iv) A test convoy consists of two or four passenger cars, light trucks, or MPVs, each with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less.


(v) On each convoy vehicle, all tires are mounted on identical rims of design or measuring rim width specified for tires of that size in accordance with 49 CFR 571.109, S4.4.1 (a) or (b), or a rim having a width within −0 to + 0.50 inches of the width listed.


(2) Treadwear grading procedure. (i) Equip a convoy as follows: Place four course monitoring tires on one vehicle. Place four candidate tires with identical size designations on each other vehicle in the convoy. On each axle, place tires that are identical with respect to manufacturer and line.


(ii) Inflate each candidate and each course monitoring tire to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.


(iii) Load each vehicle so that the load on each course monitoring and candidate tire is 85 percent of the test load specified in § 575.104(h).


(iv) Adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the vehicle manufacturer’s specifications, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment to the manufacturer’s recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is within the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment machine.


(v) Subject candidate and course monitoring tires to “break-in” by running the tires in the convoy for two circuits of the test roadway (800 miles). At the end of the first circuit, rotate each vehicle’s tires by moving each front tire to the same side of the rear axle and each rear tire to the opposite side of the front axle. Visually inspect each tire for any indication of abnormal wear, tread separation, bulging of the sidewall, or any sign of tire failure. Void the grading results from any tire with any of these anomalies, and replace the tire.


(vi) After break-in, allow the air pressure in the tires to fall to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section or for 2 hours, whichever occurs first. Measure, to the nearest 0.001 inch, the tread depth of each candidate and each course monitoring tire, avoiding treadwear indicators, at six equally spaced points in each groove. For each tire compute the average of the measurements. Do not measure those shoulder grooves which are not provided with treadwear indicators.


(vii) Adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the manufacturer’s specifications, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment according to the manufacturer’s recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is within the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment machine.


(viii) Drive the convoy on the test roadway for 6,400 miles.


(A) After each 400 miles, rotate each vehicle’s tires by moving each front tire to the same side of the rear axle and each rear tire to the opposite side of the front axle. Visually inspect each tire for treadwear anomalies.


(B) After each 800 miles, rotate the vehicles in the convoy by moving the last vehicle to the lead position. Do not rotate driver positions within the convoy. In four-car convoys, vehicle one shall become vehicle two, vehicle two shall become vehicle three, vehicle three shall become vehicle four, and vehicle four shall become vehicle one.


(C) After each 800 miles, if necessary, adjust wheel alignment to the midpoint of the vehicle manufacturer’s specification, unless adjustment to the midpoint is not recommended by the manufacturer; in that case, adjust the alignment to the manufacturer’s recommended setting. In all cases, the setting is within the tolerance specified by the manufacturer of the alignment machine.


(D) After each 800 miles, if determining the projected mileage by the 9-point method set forth in (e)(2)(ix)(A)(1), measure the average tread depth of each tire following the procedure set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(vi) of this section.


(E) After each 1,600 miles, move the complete set of four tires to the following vehicle. Move the tires on the last vehicle to the lead vehicle. In moving the tires, rotate them as set forth in (e)(2)(viii)(A) of this section.


(F) At the end of the test, measure the tread depth of each tire pursuant to the procedure set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(vi) of this section.


(ix)(A) Determine the projected mileage for each candidate tire either by the nine-point method of least squares set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section and appendix C to this section, or by the two-point arithmetical method set forth in paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A)(2) of this section. Notify NHTSA about which of the alternative grading methods is being used.


(1) Nine-Point Method of Least Squares. For each course monitoring and candidate tire in the convoy, using the average tread depth measurements obtained in accordance with paragraphs (e)(2)(vi) and (e)(2)(viii)(D) of this section and the corresponding mileages as data points, apply the method of least squares as described in appendix C to this section to determine the estimated regression line of y on x given by the following formula:





Where:

y = average tread depth in mils

x = miles after break-in,

a = y intercept of regression line (reference tread depth) in mils, calculated using the method of least squares; and

b = the slope of the regression line in mils of tread depth per 1,000 miles, calculated using the method of least squares. This slope will be negative in value. The tire’s wear rate is defined as the absolute value of the slope of the regression line.

(2) Two-Point Arithmetical Method. For each course monitoring and candidate tire in the convoy, using the average tread depth measurements obtained in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(vi) and (e)(2)(viii)(F) of this section and the corresponding mileages as data points, determine the slope (m) of the tire’s wear in mils of tread depth per 1,000 miles by the following formula:





Where:

Yo = average tread depth after break-in, mils

Y1 = average tread depth at 6,400 miles, mils

Xo = 0 miles (after break-in).

X1 = 6,400 miles of travel

This slope (m) will be negative in value. The tire’s wear rate is defined as the slope (m) expressed in mils per 1,000 miles.

(B) Average the wear rates of the four course monitoring tires as determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A) of this section.


(C) Determine the course severity adjustment factor by dividing the base course wear rate for the course monitoring tires (see Note to this paragraph) by the average wear rate for the four course monitoring tires.



Note to paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(C):

The base wear rate for the course monitoring tires will be obtained by the government by running the tire specified in ASTM E 1136 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3) course monitoring tires for 6,400 miles over the San Angelo, Texas, UTQGS test route 4 times per year, then using the average wear rate from the last 4 quarterly CMT tests for the base course wear rate calculation. Each new base course wear rate will be published in the Federal Register. The course monitoring tires used in a test convoy must be no more than one year old at the commencement of the test and must be used within two months after removal from storage.


(D) Determine the adjusted wear rate for each candidate tire by multiplying its wear rate determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A) of this section by the course severity adjustment factor determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(C) of this section.


(E) Determine the projected mileage for each candidate tire by applying the appropriate formula set forth below:


(1) If the projected mileage is calculated pursuant to paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section, then:





Where:

a = y intercept of regression line (reference tread depth) for the candidate tire as determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(A)(1) of this section.

b
1 = the adjusted wear rate for the candidate tire as determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(D) of this section.

(2) If the projected mileage is calculated pursuant to (e)(2)(ix)(a)(2) of this section, then:




Where:

Yo = average tread depth after break-in, mils

mc = the adjusted wear rate for the candidate tires as determined in accordance with paragraph (e)(2)(ix)(D) of this section.

(F) Compute the grade (P) of the NHTSA nominal treadwear value for each candidate tire by using the following formula:


P = Projected mileage × base course wear raten/402

Where base course wear raten = new base course wear rate, i.e., average treadwear of the last 4 quarterly course monitoring tire tests conducted by NHTSA.


Round off the percentage to the nearest lower 20-point increment.


(f) Traction grading conditions and procedures – (1) Conditions. (i) Tire traction performance is evaluated on skid pads that are established, and whose severity is monitored, by the NHTSA both for its compliance testing and for that of regulated persons. The test pavements are asphalt and concrete surfaces constructed in accordance with the specifications for pads “C” and “A” in the “Manual for the Construction and Maintenance of Skid Surfaces,” National Technical Information Service No. DOT-HS-800-814. The surfaces have locked wheel traction coefficients when evaluated in accordance with paragraphs (f)(2)(i) through (f)(2)(vii) of this section of 0.50 ±0.10 for the asphalt and 0.35 ±0.10 for the concrete. The location of the skid pads is described in appendix B to this section.


(ii) The standard tire is the tire specified in ASTM E 501 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


(iii) The pavement surface is wetted in accordance with paragraph 4.7, “Pavement Wetting System,” of ASTM E 274 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


(iv) The test apparatus is a test trailer built in conformity with the specifications in paragraph 4, “Apparatus,” of ASTM E 274 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3). The test apparatus is instrumented in accordance with paragraph 4.5 of that method, except that the “wheel load” in paragraph 4.3 and tire and rim specifications in paragraph 4.4 of that method are as specified in the procedures in paragraph (f)(2) of this section for standard and candidate tires.


(v) The test apparatus is calibrated in accordance with ASTM F 377 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3), with the trailer’s tires inflated to 24 psi and loaded to 1,085 pounds.


(vi) Consecutive tests on the same surface are conducted not less than 30 seconds apart.


(vii) A standard tire is discarded in accordance with ASTM E 501 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


(2) Procedure. (i) Prepare two standard tires as follows:


(A) Condition the tires by running them for 200 miles on a pavement surface.


(B) Mount each tire on a rim of design or measuring rim width specified for tires of its size in accordance with 49 CFR 571.109, S4.4.1 (a) or (b), or a rim having a width within −0 to + 0.50 inches of the width listed. Then inflate the tire to 24 psi, or, in the case of a tire with inflation pressure measured in kilopascals, to 180 kPa.


(C) Statically balance each tire-rim combination.


(D) Allow each tire to cool to ambient temperature and readjust its inflation pressure to 24 psi, or, in the case of a tire with inflation pressure measured in kilopascals, to 180 kPa.


(ii) Mount the tires on the test apparatus described in paragraph (f)(1)(iv) of this section and load each tire to 1,085 pounds.


(iii) Tow the trailer on the asphalt test surface specified in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section at a speed of 40 mph, lock one trailer wheel, and record the locked-wheel traction coefficient on the tire associated with that wheel between 0.5 and 1.5 seconds after lockup.


(iv) Repeat the test on the concrete surface, locking the same wheel.


(v) Repeat the tests specified in paragraphs (f)(2) (iii) and (iv) of this section for a total of 10 measurements on each test surface.


(vi) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(2) (iii) through (v) of this section, locking the wheel associated with the other tire.


(vii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the standard tire traction coefficient for the asphalt surface. Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the standard tire traction coefficient for the concrete surface. The standard tire traction coefficient so determined may be used in the computation of adjusted traction coefficients for more than one candidate tire.


(viii) Prepare two candidate tires of the same construction type, manufacturer, line, and size designation in accordance with paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, mount them on the test apparatus, and test one of them according to the procedures of paragraph (f)(2)(ii) through (v) of this section, except load each tire to 85% of the test load specified in § 575.104(h). For CT tires, the test inflation of candidate tires shall be 230 kPa. Candidate tire measurements may be taken either before or after the standard tire measurements used to compute the standard tire traction coefficient. Take all standard tire and candidate tire measurements used in computation of a candidate tire’s adjusted traction coefficient within a single three hour period. Average the 10 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the candidate tire traction coefficient for the asphalt surface. Average the 10 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the candidate tire traction coefficient for the concrete surface.


(ix) Compute a candidate tire’s adjusted traction coefficient for asphalt (μa) by the following formula:


a) = Measured candidate tire coefficient for asphalt + 0.50 − Measured standard tire coefficient for asphalt

(x) Compute a candidate tire’s adjusted traction coefficient for concrete (μc) by the following formula:


μc = Measured candidate tire coefficient for concrete + 0.35μ Measured standard tire coefficient for concrete

(g) Temperature resistance grading. (1) Mount the tire on a rim of design or measuring rim width specified for tires of its size in accordance with § 571.109, paragraph S4.4.1 (a) or (b) and inflate it to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.


(2) Condition the tire-rim assembly to a temperature of 95 °F for at least 3 hours.


(3) Adjust the pressure again to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.


(4) Mount the tire-rim assembly on an axle, and press the tire tread against the surface of a flat-faced steel test wheel that is 67.23 inches in diameter and at least as wide as the section width of the tire.


(5) During the test, including the pressure measurements specified in paragraphs (g) (1) and (3) of this section, maintain the temperature of the ambient air, as measured 12 inches from the edge of the rim flange at any point on the circumference on either side of the tire at 95 °F. Locate the temperature sensor so that its readings are not affected by heat radiation, drafts, variations in the temperature of the surrounding air, or guards or other devices.


(6) Press the tire against the test wheel with a load of 88 percent of the tire’s maximum load rating as marked on the tire sidewall.


(7) Rotate the test wheel at 250 rpm for 2 hours.


(8) Remove the load, allow the tire to cool to 95 °F or for 2 hours, whichever occurs last, and readjust the inflation pressure to the applicable pressure specified in Table 1 of this section.


(9) Reapply the load and without interruption or readjustment of inflation pressure, rotate the test wheel at 375 rpm for 30 minutes, and then at successively higher rates in 25 rpm increments, each for 30 minutes, until the tire has run at 575 rpm for 30 minutes, or to failure, whichever occurs first.


Table I – Test Inflation Pressures

[Maximum permissible inflation pressure for the following test]

Test type
Tires other than CT tires
CT tires
psi
kPa
kPa
32
36
40
60
240
280
300
340
350
290
330
350
390
Treadwear test24283252180220180220180230270230270
Temperature resistant test30343858220260220260220270310270310

(h) Determination of test load. (1) To determine test loads for purposes of paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) and (f)(2)(viii), follow the procedure set forth in paragraphs (h) (2) through (5) of this section.


(2) Determine the tire’s maximum inflation pressure and maximum load rating both as specified on the tire’s sidewall.


(3) Determine the appropriate multiplier corresponding to the tire’s maximum inflation pressure, as set forth in Table 2.


(4) Multiply the tire’s maximum load rating by the multiplier determined in paragraph (h)(3). This is the tire’s calculated load.


(5) Round the product determined in paragraph (h)(4) (the calculated load) to the nearest multiple of ten pounds or, if metric units are used, 5 kilograms. For example, 903 pounds would be rounded to 900 and 533 kilograms would be rounded to 535. This figure is the test load.


Table 2

Maximum inflation pressure
Multiplier to be used for treadwear testing
Multiplier to be used for traction testing
Tires other than CT tires
32 psi.851.851
36 psi.870.797
40 psi.883.753
240 kPa.866.866
280 kPa.887.804
300 kPa.866.866
340 kPa.887.804
350 kPa.866.866
CT tires
290 kPa.866.866
330 kPa.887.804
305 kPa.866.866
390 kPa.887.804

Table 2A

Tire size designation
Temp resistance
Traction
Treadwear
Max pressure
Max pressure
32
36
40
32
36
40
145/70 R13615650685523523553582
155/70 R13705740780599599629663
165/70 R13795835880676676710748
175/70 R13890935980757757795833
185/70 R1399010401090842842884926
195/70 R131100115512109359359821029
155/70 R14740780815629629663693
175/70 R149259751025786786829871
185/70 R14104511001155888888935982
195/70 R1411551220128098298210371088
155/70 R15770810850655655689723
175/70 R1599010401090842842884927
185/70 R151100115512109359359821029
5.60-13725810880616616689748
5.20-14695785855591591667727
165-159151,0151,105779779863939
185/60 R 13845915980719719778833

(i)-(l) [Reserved]




Figure 2 – [Part I] – DOT QUALITY GRADES

TREADWEAR

TRACTION AA A B C

TEMPERATURE A B C

(Part II) All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades


Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.


Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.


Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.


Appendix A – Treadwear Test Course and Driving Procedures

Introduction. The test course consists of three loops of a total of 400 miles in the geographical vicinity of Goodfellow AFB, San Angelo, Tex.


The first loop runs south 143 miles through the cities of Eldorado, Sonora, and Juno, Tex. to the Camp Hudson Historical Marker, and returns by the same route.


The second loop runs east over Farm and Ranch Roads (FM) and returns to its starting point.


The third loop runs northwest to Water Valley, northeast toward Robert Lee and returns via Texas 208 to the vicinity of Goodfellow AFB.


Route. The route is shown in Figure 3. The table identifies key points by number. These numbers are encircled in Figure 3 and in parentheses in the descriptive material that follows.


Southern Loop. The course begins at the intersection (1) of Ft. McKavitt Road and Paint Rock Road (FM388) at the northwest corner of Goodfellow AFB. Drive east via FM 388 to junction with Loop Road 306 (2). Turn right onto Loop Road 306 and proceed south to junction with US277 (3). Turn onto US277 and proceed south through Eldorado and Sonora (4), continuing on US277 to junction with FM189 (5). Turn right onto FM189 and proceed to junction with Texas 163 (6). Turn left onto Texas 163, and at the option of the manufacturer:


(A) Proceed south to Camp Hudson Historical Marker and onto the paved shoulder (7). Reverse route to junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2); or


(B) Proceed south to junction with Frank’s Crossing. Reverse route at Frank’s Crossing and proceed north on Texas 163 to junction with Highway 189; Reverse route at junction with Highway 189; proceed south on Texas 163 to junction with Frank’s Crossing; reverse route at Frank’s Crossing and proceed north to junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2).


Eastern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM388 (2), make right turn onto FM388 and drive east to junction with FM2334 (13). Turn right onto FM2334 and proceed south across FM765 (14) to junction of FM2334 and US87 (15). For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, make U-turn and return to junction of FM388 and Loop Road 306 (2) by the same route. For convoys that do not originate at Goodfellow AFB, upon reaching junction of FM2334 and US87 (15), make U-Turn and continue north on FM2334 past the intersection with FM388 to Veribest Cotton Gin, a distance of 1.8 miles beyond the intersection. Make U-turn and return to junction of FM2334 and FM388. Turn right onto FM388, proceed west to junction FM388 and Loop Road 306.


Northwestern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM388 (2), make right turn onto Loop Road 306. Proceed onto US277, to junction with FM2105 (8). Turn left onto FM2105 and proceed west to junction with US87 (10). Turn right on US87 and proceed northwest to the junction with FM2034 near the town of Water Valley (11). Turn right onto FM2034 and proceed north to Texas 208 (12). Turn right onto Texas 208 and proceed south to junction with FM2105 (9). Turn left onto FM2105 and proceed east to junction with US277 (8). Turn right onto US277 and proceed south onto Loop Road 306 to junction with FM388 (2). For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, turn right onto FM388 and proceed to starting point at junction of Ft. McKavitt Road and FM388 (1). For convoys that do not originate at Goodfellow AFB, do not turn right onto FM388 but continue south on Loop Road 306.


Alternate Route When FM 189 and Texas 163 are Closed. This alternate test course route consists of a Modified Southern Loop, the Eastern Loop and Northwestern Loop described above, and a Modified Northwestern Loop.


Modified Southern Loop. The course begins at the intersection (1) of Ft. McKavitt Road and Paint Rock Road (FM 388) at the northwest corner of Goodfellow AFB. Drive east via FM 388 to junction with Loop Road 306 (2). Turn right onto Loop Road 306 and proceed south to junction with US 277 (3). Turn onto US 277 and proceed south through Eldorado and Sonora (4), continuing on US 277 approximately 5.5 miles (from traffic light at separation of US 277 and Loop 467) to picnic area on right. Reverse route at this location and proceed north to junction of Loop 306 and FM 388 (2).


Eastern Loop and Northwestern Loop. From junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2), complete the Eastern Loop, the Northwestern Loop, and then, from junction of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2), repeat the Eastern Loop.


Modified Northwestern Loop. Proceed north on Northwestern Loop as normal until reaching the intersection of FM 2105 and Texas 208 and turn right onto Texas 208. Proceed on Texas 208 until the intersection with FM 2034. Turn left onto FM 2034 and continue on FM 2034 to the intersection with US 87. Turn left onto US 87. At the intersection of US 87 and FM 2105 turn left onto FM 2105 and proceed to the intersection with US 277. Turn right onto US 277 and proceed to the intersection of Loop Road 306 and FM 388 (2).


Repeat Eastern Loop. Turn left onto FM 388 and repeat the Eastern Loop. For convoys that originate at Goodfellow AFB, continue on FM 388 and proceed to starting point at junction of Ft. McKavitt Road and FM 388 (1). For convoys that do not originate at Goodfellow AFB, turn left onto Loop Road 306.


Driving instructions. The drivers shall run at posted speed limits throughout the course unless an unsafe condition arises. If such condition arises, the speed should be reduced to the maximum safe operating speed.


Braking Procedures at STOP signs. There are a number of intersections at which stops are required. At each of these intersections a series of signs is placed in a fixed order at follows:


Sign Legend

Highway Intersection 1000 (or 2000) Feet

STOP AHEAD

Junction XXX

Direction Sign (Mereta→)

STOP or YIELD

Procedures. 1. Approach each intersection at posted speed limit.


2. When abreast of the STOP AHEAD sign, apply the brakes so that the vehicle decelerates smoothly to 20 mph when abreast of the direction sign.


3. Come to a complete stop at the STOP sign or behind any vehicle already stopped.




Appendix B – Traction Skid Pads

Two skid pads have been laid on an unused runway and taxi strip on Goodfellow AFB. Their location is shown in Figure 4.


The asphalt skid pad is 600 ft. × 60 ft. and is shown in black on the runway in Figure 4. The pad is approached from either end by a 75 ft. ramp followed by 100 ft. of level pavement. This arrangement permits the skid trailers to stabilize before reaching the test area. The approaches are shown on the figure by the hash-marked area.


The concrete pad is 600 ft. × 48 ft. and is on the taxi strip. The approaches to the concrete pad are of the same design as those for the asphalt pads.


A two lane asphalt road has been built to connect the runway and taxi strip. The road is parallel to the northeast-southwest runway at a distance of 100 ft. The curves have super-elevation to permit safe exit from the runway at operating speeds.



Appendix C – Method of Least Squares

The method of least squares is a method of calculation by which it is possible to obtain a reliable estimate of a true physical relationship from a set of data which involve random error. The method may be used to establish a regression line that minimizes the sum of the squares of the deviations of the measured data points from the line. The regression line is consequently described as the line of “best fit” to the data points. It is described in terms of its slope and its “y” intercept.


The graph in Figure 5 depicts a regression line calculated using the least squares method from data collected from a hypothetical treadwear test of 6,400 miles, with tread depth measurements made at every 500 miles.



In this graph, xj,yj (j = 0, 1, . . ;. 8) are the individual data points representing the tread depth measurements (the overall average for the tire with 6 measurements in each tire groove) at the beginning of the test (after break-in) and at the end of each 800-mile segment of the test.


The absolute value of the slope of the regression line is an expression of the mils of tread worn per 1,000 miles, and is calculated by the following formula:




The “y” intercept of the regression line (a) in mils is calculated by the following formula:




Appendix D – User Fees

1. Use of Government Traction Skid Pads: A fee of $125 will be assessed for each hour, or fraction thereof, that the traction skid pads at Goodfellow Air Force Base, San Angelo, Texas are used. This fee is based upon the market price of the use of the traction skid pads.


2. Fee payments shall be by check, draft, money order, or Electronic Funds Transfer System made payable to the Treasurer of the United States.


3. The fee set forth in this Appendix continues in effect until adjusted by the Administrator of NHTSA. The Administrator reviews the fee set forth in this Appendix and, if appropriate, adjusts it by rule at least every 2 years.


[43 FR 30549, July 17, 1978]


Editorial Note:For Federal Register citations affecting § 575.104, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.

§ 575.105 Vehicle rollover.

(a) Purpose and scope. This section requires manufacturers of utility vehicles to alert the drivers of those vehicles that they have a higher possibility of rollover than other vehicle types and to advise them of steps that can be taken to reduce the possibility of rollover and/or to reduce the likelihood of injury in a rollover.


(b) Application. This section applies to utility vehicles.


(c) Definitions.


Utility vehicles means multipurpose passenger vehicles (other than those which are passenger car derivatives) which have a wheelbase of 110 inches or less and special features for occasional off-road operation.


(d) Required information – (1) Rollover Warning Label. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, each vehicle must have a label permanently affixed to either side of the sun visor, at the manufacturer’s option, at the driver’s seating position. The label must conform in content, form and sequence to the label shown in Figure 1 of this section, and must comply with the following requirements:


(A) The heading area must be yellow, with the text and the alert symbol in black.


(B) The message area must be white with black text.


(C) The pictograms must be black with a white background.


(D) The label must be appropriately sized so that it is legible, visible and prominent to the driver.


(ii) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 1999 and before September 1, 2000. When the rollover warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section and the air bag warning label required by paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR 571.208 are affixed to the same side of the driver side sun visor, either:


(A) The rollover warning label must be affixed to the right (as viewed from the driver’s seat) of the air bag warning label and the labels may not be contiguous; or


(B) The pictogram of the air bag warning label must be separated from the pictograms of the rollover warning label by text, and


(1) The labels must be located such that the shortest distance from any of the lettering or graphics on the rollover warning label to any of the lettering or graphics on the air bag warning label is not less than 3 cm, or


(2) If the rollover warning and air bag warning labels are each completely surrounded by a continuous solid-lined border, the shortest distance from the border of the rollover warning label to the border of the air bag warning label is not less than 1 cm.


(iii) The manufacturer must select the option to which a vehicle is certified by the time the manufacturer certifies the vehicle and may not thereafter select a different option for that vehicle. If a manufacturer chooses to certify compliance with more than one compliance option, the vehicle must satisfy the requirements applicable to each of the options selected.


(iv) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 2000. When the rollover warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section and the air bag warning label required by paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR 571.208 are affixed to the same side of the driver side sun visor the pictogram of the air bag warning label must be separated from the pictograms of the rollover warning label by text and:


(A) The labels must be located such that the shortest distance from any of the lettering or graphics on the rollover warning label to any of the lettering or graphics on the air bag warning label is not less than 3 cm, or


(B) If the rollover warning and air bag warning labels are each completely surrounded by a continuous solid-lined border, the shortest distance from the border of the rollover warning label to the border of the air bag warning label must be not less than 1 cm.


(2) Alternate location for warning label. As an alternative to affixing the warning label required by paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section to the driver’s sun visor, a manufacturer may permanently affix the label to the lower rear corner of the forwardmost driver’s side window. The label must be legible, visible and prominent to a person next to the exterior of the driver’s door.


(3) Rollover Alert Label. If the label required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section and affixed to the driver side sun visor is not visible when the sun visor is in the stowed position, an alert label must be permanently affixed to that visor so that the label is visible when the visor is in that position. The alert label must comply with the following requirements:


(i) The label must read:


ROLLOVER WARNING

Flip Visor Over

(ii) The label must be black with yellow text.


(iii) The label must be no less than 20 square cm.


(4) Owner’s Manual. The owner’s manual must include the following statements and discussions:


(i) The statement “Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.”


(ii) A discussion of the vehicle design features which cause this type of vehicles to be more likely to rollover (e.g., higher center of gravity);


(iii) A discussion of the driving practices that can reduce the risk of a rollover (e.g., avoiding sharp turns at excessive speed); and


(iv) The statement: “In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.”


(5) Combined Rollover and Air Bag Alert Warning. If the warnings required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section and paragraph S4.5.1(b) of 49 CFR 571.208 to be affixed to the driver side sun visor are not visible when the sun visor is in the stowed position, a combined rollover and air bag alert label may be permanently affixed to that visor in lieu of the alert labels required by paragraph (d)(3) of this section and paragraph S4.5.1(c)(2) of 49 CFR 571.208. The combined rollover and air bag alert label must be visible when the visor is in the stowed position. The combined rollover and air bag alert warning must conform in content to the label shown in Figure 2 of this section, and must comply with the following requirements:


(i) The label must read:


AIR BAG AND ROLLOVER WARNINGS

Flip Visor Over

(ii) The message area must be black with yellow text. The message area must be no less than 20 square cm.


(iii) The pictogram shall be black with a red circle and slash on a white background. The pictogram must be not less than 20 mm in diameter.


(6) At the option of the manufacturer, the requirements in paragraph (d)(1)(i) for labels that are permanently affixed to specified parts of the vehicle may instead be met by permanent marking and molding of the required information.




[64 FR 11733, Mar. 9, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 47123, Aug. 30, 1999]


§ 575.106 Tire fuel efficiency consumer information program.

(a) Scope. This section requires tire manufacturers, tire brand name owners, and tire retailers to provide information indicating the relative performance of replacement passenger car tires in the areas of fuel efficiency, safety, and durability.


(b) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to aid consumers in making better educated choices in the purchase of passenger car tires.


(c) Application. This section applies to replacement passenger car tires. However, this section does not apply to light truck tires, deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to limited production tires as defined in § 575.104(c)(2). Tire manufacturers may comply with the requirements in this § 575.106 as an alternative to complying with the requirements in § 575.104(d)(1)(i)(A) and (B).


(d) Definitions. (1) All terms used in this section that are defined in Section 32101 of Title 49, United States Code, are used as defined therein.


(2) As used in this section:


Brand name owner means a person, other than a tire manufacturer, who owns or has the right to control the brand name of a tire or a person who licenses another to purchase tires from a tire manufacturer bearing the licensor’s brand name.


CT means a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire.


Dealer means a person selling and distributing new motor vehicles or motor vehicle equipment primarily to purchasers that in good faith purchase the vehicle or equipment other than for resale.


Distributor means a person primarily selling and distributing motor vehicles or motor vehicle equipment for resale.


Lab alignment tires or LATs means the reference tires which the reference lab will test to be used to align other rolling resistance machines with the reference lab in accordance with the machine alignment procedure in ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3), section 10.


Light truck (LT) tire means a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.


Manufacturer means a person manufacturing or assembling motor vehicles or motor vehicle equipment, or importing motor vehicles or motor vehicle equipment for resale. This term includes any parent corporation, any subsidiary or affiliate, and any subsidiary or affiliate of a parent corporation of such a person.


Passenger car tire means a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less.


Reference lab means the laboratory or laboratories that the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration designates and which maintains and operates a rolling resistance test machine to test LATs for rolling resistance so that other testing laboratories may correlate the results from its rolling resistance test machine in accordance with the machine alignment procedure in ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3), section 10.


Replacement passenger car tire means any passenger car tire offered for sale to consumers, other than a passenger car tire sold as original equipment on a new vehicle.


Size designation means the alpha-numeric designation assigned by a manufacturer that identifies a tire’s size. This can include identifications of tire class, nominal width, aspect ratio, tire construction, and wheel diameter.


Stock keeping unit or SKU means the alpha-numeric designation assigned by a manufacturer to uniquely identify a tire product. This term is sometimes referred to as a product code, a product identifier, or a part number.


Tire line means the entire name used by a tire manufacturer to designate a tire product including all prefixes and suffixes as they appear on the sidewall of a tire.


Tire retailer means a dealer or distributor of new replacement passenger car tires sold for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less.


(e) Requirements – (1) Information – (i) Requirements for tire manufacturers. Subject to paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, each manufacturer of tires, or in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, each brand name owner shall provide rating information for each tire of which it is the manufacturer or brand name owner in the manner set forth in paragraphs (e)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this section. The ratings for each tire shall be only those specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this section. For the purposes of this section, each tire of a different SKU is to be rated separately. Each tire shall be able to achieve the level of performance represented by each rating.


(A) Ratings. Each tire shall be rated with the words, letters, symbols, and figures specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.


(B) Tire label. [Reserved]


(C) Reporting requirements. The information collection requirements contained in this section have been approved by the Office of Management and Budget under the provisions of the Paperwork Reduction Act (44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq.) and are awaiting an assigned OMB Control Number.


(1) Subject to paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, manufacturers of tires or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, brand name owners of tires subject to this section shall submit to NHTSA, either directly or through an agent, the following data for each rated replacement passenger car tire:


(i) Manufacturer or Brand name owner.


(ii) Tire line.


(iii) SKU.


(iv) Tire size.


(v) Rolling resistance rating, as determined in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section.


(vi) Wet traction rating, as determined in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section.


(vii) Treadwear rating, as determined in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.


(2) Format of data submitted. The information required under paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) of this section may be submitted to NHTSA by mail, by facsimile, or by email. Submissions by mail must be addressed to the Associate Administrator for Rulemaking, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Attention: Consumer Standards Division (NVS-131), 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE., Washington, DC 20590. Submissions by facsimile must be addressed to the Associate Administrator for Rulemaking and transmitted to (202) 366-7002. Submissions by email must be sent to [email protected]


(3) Exempted tires.


(i) Each manufacturer of tires or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, brand name owner of tires subject to this section shall submit to NHTSA all tire lines, size designations, and stock keeping units for deep tread, winter-type snow tires and limited production tires that it manufactures which are exempt from this section (§ 575.106) under paragraph (c) of this section.


(ii) Where a manufacturer or brand name owner is required to report ratings under this section, the information required in paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3)(i) of this section may be submitted with the ratings information reported in accordance with paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) of this section.


(iii) Where a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, brand name owner only manufactures tires that are exempt from this section under paragraph (c) of this section, that manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit a statement listing the information specified in paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3)(i) of this section and certifying that none of the tires it manufactures are required to be rated under this section.


(4) New ratings information.


(i) Whenever a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, a brand name owner introduces a new tire for sale, the tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit either the information required under paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) of this section or the information required under paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3) of this section for the tire to NHTSA on or before the date 30 calendar days before the tire is first introduced for sale.


(ii) Whenever a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, a brand name owner makes a design change to a tire that would result in new or different information required under either paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) or paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3) of this section for the tire, the tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit the new or different information to NHTSA on or before the date 30 calendar days before the redesigned tire is first introduced for sale.


(iii) Whenever a tire manufacturer or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, a brand name owner receives information that would determine new or different information required under either paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(1) or paragraph (e)(1)(i)(C)(3) of this section for a tire, the tire manufacturer or brand name owner shall submit the new or different information to NHTSA on or before the date 120 calendar days after the receipt of the new information by the tire 26manufacturer or brand name owner.


(5) Voluntary submission of data. Manufacturers of tires or, in the case of tires marketed under a brand name, brand name owners of tires not subject to this section may submit to NHTSA data meeting the requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section for any tire they wish to have included in the database of information available to consumers on NHTSA’s Web site.


(ii) Requirements for tire retailers. Subject to paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section, each tire retailer shall provide rating information for each passenger car tire offered for sale in the manner set forth in this section.


(iii) Date for compliance. The requirements of paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (e)(1)(ii) of this section will be implemented as indicated in a forthcoming final rule. These dates will be announced in the Federal Register.


(2) Performance – (i) Fuel efficiency. [Reserved]


(ii) Traction. [Reserved]


(iii) Treadwear. [Reserved]


(f) Fuel efficiency rating conditions and procedures – (1) Conditions. (i) Measurement of rolling resistance force under the test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be made using either the force or the torque method.


(ii) The test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be carried out on an 80-grit roadwheel surface.


(iii) The machine alignment procedure specified in section 10 of the test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section shall be conducted using pairs of the LATs specified in paragraph (f)(1)(iv) of this section, and tested by the reference lab.


(iv) Lab alignment tires. The LATs to be used in the machine alignment procedure in section 10 of the test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section will be specified in this section in a forthcoming final rule.


(v) Break-in procedure for bias ply tires. Before starting the rolling resistance testing under the test procedure specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section on a bias ply replacement passenger car tire, the tire shall be broken in by running it for one (1) hour with the speed, loading, and inflation pressure as specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(v)(A), (f)(1)(v)(B), and (f)(1)(v)(C) of this section. After the one hour break-in, allow the tire to cool for two (2) hours and re-adjust to the required ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3) test inflation pressure, and verify 10 minutes after the adjustment is made. After break-in, the bias ply tire should follow the 30 minute warm-up procedure of ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


(A) Speed. The speed shall be 80 kilometer per hour (kph).


(B) Loading. The tire loading shall be 80 percent of the maximum tire load capacity.


(C) Inflation pressure. The inflation pressure shall be 210 kilopascals (kPa) for standard load tires, or 250 kPA for reinforced or extra load tires.


(2) Procedure. The test procedure shall be as specified in ISO 28580 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3), except that the conditions specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this section shall be used.


(g) Traction rating conditions and procedures. (1) Conditions. Test conditions are as specified in § 575.104(f)(1), subject to the changes in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (g)(1)(iii) of this section to additionally measure the peak coefficient of friction.


(i) The sampling rate of the data acquisition is to be no less than 100 Hertz in accordance with Section 6.6.1.8 of ASTM E 1337 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


(ii) The rate of brake application shall be sufficient to control the time interval between initial brake application and peak longitudinal force to be between 0.3 and 0.5 seconds, and shall be determined in accordance with Section 6.3.2 of ASTM E 1337 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3).


(iii) The peak coefficient of friction (or peak braking coefficient) shall be determined in accordance with Section 12 of ASTM E 1337 (incorporated by reference, see § 575.3) for each dataset.


(iv) The slide coefficient of friction will be determined in accordance with § 575.104(f)(2)(iii).


(2) Procedure. (i) Prepare two standard tires as specified in § 575.104(f)(2)(i).


(ii) Mount the tires on the test apparatus described in § 575.104(f)(1)(iv) and load each tire to 1,085 pounds.


(iii) Tow the trailer on the asphalt test surface specified in § 575.104(f)(1)(i) at a speed of 40 mph, lock one trailer wheel, and record the slide and peak coefficient of friction on the tire associated with that wheel.


(iv) Repeat the test on the concrete surface, locking the same wheel.


(v) Repeat the tests specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(iii) and (iv) of this section for a total of 10 measurements on each test surface.


(vi) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(iii) through (v) of this section, locking the wheel associated with the other standard tire.


(vii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the standard tire average peak coefficient of friction for the asphalt surface. Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the standard tire average peak coefficient of friction for the concrete surface. The standard tire average peak coefficient of friction so determined may be used in the computation of adjusted peak coefficients of friction for more than one candidate tire.


(viii) Average the 20 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the standard tire average slide coefficient of friction for the asphalt surface. Average the 20 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the standard tire average slide coefficient of friction for the concrete surface. The standard tire average slide coefficient of friction so determined may be used in the computation of adjusted slide coefficients of friction for more than one candidate tire.


(ix) Prepare two candidate tires of the same SKU in accordance with paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section, mount them on the test apparatus, and test one of them according to the procedures of paragraphs (g)(2)(ii) through (v) of this section, except load each tire to 85 percent of the test load specified in § 575.104(h). For CT tires, the test inflation of candidate tires shall be 230 kPa. Candidate tire measurements may be taken either before or after the standard tire measurements used to compute the standard tire traction coefficient. Take all standard tire and candidate tire measurements used in computation of a candidate tire’s adjusted peak coefficient and adjusted slide coefficient of friction within a single three-hour period. Average the 10 measurements taken on the asphalt surface to find the candidate tire average peak coefficient and average slide coefficient of friction for the asphalt surface. Average the 10 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the candidate tire average peak coefficient of friction for the concrete surface. Average the 10 measurements taken on the concrete surface to find the candidate tire average slide coefficient of friction for the concrete surface.


(x) Repeat the procedures specified in paragraph (g)(2)(viii) of this section, using the second candidate tire as the tire being tested.


(h) Treadwear rating conditions and procedures – (1) Conditions. Test conditions are as specified in § 575.104(e)(1).


(2) Procedure. Test procedure is as specified in § 575.104(e)(2).


[75 FR 15944, Mar. 30, 2010, as amended at 76 FR 79121, Dec. 21, 2011]


Subpart C – Transportation Recall Enhancement, Accountability, and Documentation Act; Consumer Information

§ 575.201 Child restraint performance.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has established a program for rating the performance of child restraints. The agency makes the information developed under this rating program available through a variety of means, including postings on its Web site, http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov.


[67 FR 67494, Nov. 5, 2002]


Subpart D – Safe, Accountable, Flexible, Efficient Transportation Equity Act: A Legacy for Users (SAFETEA-LU); Consumer Information


Source:71 FR 53585, Sept. 12, 2006, unless otherwise noted.

§ 575.301 Vehicle labeling of safety rating information (applicable unless a vehicle is subject to § 575.302).

(a) Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this section is to aid potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger motor vehicles by providing them with safety rating information developed by NHTSA in its New Car Assessment Program (NCAP) testing. Manufacturers of passenger motor vehicles described in paragraph (b) of this section are required to include this information on the Monroney label. Although NHTSA also makes the information available through means such as postings at http://www.safercar.gov and http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov, the additional Monroney label information is intended to provide consumers with relevant information at the point of sale.


(b) Application. This section applies to automobiles with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, manufactured on or after September 1, 2007, that are required by the Automobile Information Disclosure Act, 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233, to have price sticker labels (Monroney labels), e.g., passenger vehicles, station wagons, passenger vans, and sport utility vehicles, except for vehicles that are subject to § 575.302. Model Year 2012 or later vehicles manufactured prior to January 31, 2012 may be labeled according to the provisions of § 575.302 instead of this section provided the ratings placed on the safety rating label are derived from vehicle testing conducted by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration under the enhanced NCAP testing and rating program.


(c) Definitions. (1) Monroney label means the label placed on new automobiles with the manufacturer’s suggested retail price and other consumer information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233.


(2) Safety rating label means the label with NCAP safety rating information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1232(g). The safety rating label is part of the Monroney label.


(d) Required Label. (1) Except as specified in paragraph (f) of this section, each vehicle must have a safety rating label that is part of its Monroney label, meets the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of this section, and conforms in content, format and sequence to the sample label depicted in Figure 1 of this section. If NHTSA has not provided a safety rating for any category of vehicle performance for a vehicle, the manufacturer may use the smaller label specified in paragraph (f) of this section.


(2) The label must depict the star ratings for that vehicle as reported to the vehicle manufacturer by NHTSA.


(3) Whenever NHTSA informs a manufacturer in writing of a new safety rating for a specified vehicle or the continued applicability of an existing safety rating for a new model year, including any safety concerns, the manufacturer shall include the new or continued safety rating on vehicles manufactured on or after the date 30 calendar days after receipt by the manufacturer of the information.


(4) If, for a vehicle that has an existing safety rating for a category, NHTSA informs the manufacturer in writing that it has approved an optional NCAP test that will cover that category, the manufacturer may depict vehicles manufactured on or after the date of receipt of the information as “Not Rated” or “To Be Rated” for that category.


(5) The text “Frontal Crash,” “Side Crash,” “Rollover,” “Driver,” “Passenger,” “Front Seat,” “Rear Seat” and where applicable, “Not Rated” or “To Be Rated,” the star graphic indicating each rating, as well as any text in the header and footer areas of the label, must have a minimum font size of 12 point. All remaining text and symbols on the label (including the star graphic specified in paragraph (e)(8)(i)(A) of this section, must have a minimum font size of 8 point.


(e) Required Information and Format – (1) Safety Rating Label Border. The safety rating label must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a minimum of 3 points in width.


(2) Safety Rating Label Size and Legibility. The safety rating label must be presented in a legible, visible, and prominent fashion that covers at least 8 percent of the total area of the Monroney label (i.e., including the safety rating label) or an area with a minimum of 4
1/2 inches in length and 3
1/2 inches in height on the Monroney label, whichever is larger.


(3) Heading Area. The words “Government Safety Ratings” must be in boldface, capital letters that are light in color and centered. The background must be dark.


(4) Frontal Crash Area. (i) The frontal crash area must be placed immediately below the heading area and must have dark text and a light background. Both the driver and the right front passenger frontal crash test ratings must be displayed with the maximum star ratings achieved.


(ii) The words “Frontal Crash” must be in boldface, cover two lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label.


(iii) The word “Driver” must be on the same line as the word “Frontal” in “Frontal Crash,” and be left justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned at the top of the label. The achieved star rating for “Driver” must be on the same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the “Driver” position, the text “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Driver”, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(v) The word “Passenger” must be on the same line as the word “Crash” in “Frontal Crash,” below the word “Driver,” and be left justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned at the top of the label. The achieved star rating for “Passenger” must be on the same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for “Passenger,” the words “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Passenger”, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(vii) The words “Star ratings based on the risk of injury in a frontal impact.”, followed (on the next line) by the statement “Frontal ratings should ONLY be compared to other vehicles of similar size and weight.” must be placed at the bottom of the frontal crash area.


(5) Side Crash Area. (i) The side crash area must be immediately below the frontal crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. Both the driver and the rear seat passenger side crash test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.


(ii) The words “Side Crash” must cover two lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label in boldface.


(iii) The words “Front seat” must be on the same line as the word “Side” in “Side Crash” and be left justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned in the middle of the label. The achieved star rating for “Front seat” must be on the same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for “Front Seat,” the words “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Front seat”, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(v) The words “Rear seat” must be on the same line as the word “Crash” in “Side Crash,” below the word “Front seat,” and be left justified, horizontally centered and vertically aligned in the middle of the label. The achieved star rating for “Rear seat” must be on the same line, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for “Rear Seat,” the text “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the text “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Rear seat”, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(vii) The words: “Star ratings based on the risk of injury in a side impact.” must be placed at the bottom of the side crash area.


(6) Rollover Area. (i) The rollover area must be immediately below the side crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. The rollover test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.


(ii) The word “Rollover” must be aligned to the left side of the label in boldface. The achieved star rating must be on the same line, aligned to the right side of the label.


(iii) If NHTSA has not tested the vehicle, the words “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Rollover”, left justified, and aligned to the right side of the label.


(iv) The words: “Star ratings based on the risk of rollover in a single vehicle crash.” must be placed at the bottom of the rollover area.


(7) Graphics. The star graphic is depicted in Figure 3 and the safety concern graphic is depicted in Figure 4.


(8) General Information Area. (i) The general information area must be immediately below the rollover area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark and the background must be light. The text must state the following, in the specified order, on separate lines:


(A) “ Star ratings range from 1 to 5 stars (★★★★★), with 5 being the highest.” and


(B) “Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)”


(9) Footer Area. The text “www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236” must be provided in boldface letters that are light in color, and be centered. The background must be dark.


(10) Safety Concern. For vehicle tests for which NHTSA reports a safety concern as part of the star rating, the label must:


(i) Depict, as a superscript to the star rating, the related symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, at
2/3 the font size of the base star, and


(ii) Include at the bottom of the relevant area (i.e., frontal crash area, side crash area, rollover area), as the last line of that area, the related symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, as a superscript of the rest of the line, and the text “Safety Concern: Visit www.safercar.gov or call 1-888-327-4236 for more details.”


(11) No additional information may be provided in the safety rating label area. The specified information provided in a language other than English is not considered to be additional information.


(f) Smaller Safety Rating Label for Vehicles with No Ratings. (1) If NHTSA has not released a safety rating for any category for a vehicle, the manufacturer may use a smaller safety rating label that meets paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(5) of this section. A sample label is depicted in Figure 2.


(2) The label must be at least 4
1/2 inches in width and 1
1/2 inches in height, and must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a minimum of 3 points in width.


(3) Heading Area. The text must read “Government Safety Ratings” and be in 14-point boldface, capital letters that are light in color, and be centered. The background must be dark.


(4) General Information. The general information area must be below the header area. The text must be dark and the background must be light. The text must state the following, in at least 12-point font, be left-justified, and aligned to the left side of the label, in the specified order:


(i) “This vehicle has not been rated by the government for frontal crash, side crash, or rollover risk.”


(ii) “Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA).”


(5) Footer Area. The text “www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236” must be provided in 14-point boldface letters that are light in color, and be centered.The background must be dark.


(6) No additional information may be provided in the smaller safety rating label area. The specified information provided in a language other than English is not considered to be additional information.


(g) Labels for alterers. (1) If, pursuant to 49 CFR 567.7, a person is required to affix a certification label to a vehicle, and the vehicle has a safety rating label with one or more safety ratings, the alterer must also place another label on that vehicle as specified in this paragraph.


(2) The additional label (which does not replace the one required by 49 CFR 567.7) must read: “This vehicle has been altered. The stated star ratings on the safety rating label may no longer be applicable.”


(3) The label must be placed adjacent to the Monroney label or as close to it as physically possible.





[71 FR 53585, Sept. 12, 2006, as amended at 72 FR 45176, Aug. 13, 2007; 76 FR 45466, July 29, 2011]


§ 575.302 Vehicle labeling of safety rating information (compliance required for model year 2012 and later vehicles manufactured on or after January 31, 2012).

(a) Purpose and scope. The purpose of this section is to aid potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger motor vehicles by providing them with safety rating information developed by NHTSA in its New Car Assessment Program (NCAP) testing. Manufacturers of passenger motor vehicles described in paragraph (b) of this section are required to include this information on the Monroney label. Although NHTSA also makes the information available through means such as postings at http://www.safercar.gov and http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov, the additional Monroney label information is intended to provide consumers with relevant information at the point of sale.


(b) Application. This section applies to automobiles with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, manufactured on or after January 31, 2012 that have vehicle identification numbers that identify the vehicles to be model year 2012 or later and that are required by the Automobile Information Disclosure Act, 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233, to have price sticker labels (Monroney labels), (e.g., passenger vehicles, station wagons, passenger vans, and sport utility vehicles). Model Year 2012 or later vehicles manufactured prior to January 31, 2012, at the manufacturer’s option, may be labeled according to the provisions of this § 575.302 provided the ratings placed on the safety rating label are derived from vehicle testing conducted by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration under the enhanced NCAP testing and rating program.


(c) Definitions.


(1) Monroney label means the label placed on new automobiles with the manufacturer’s suggested retail price and other consumer information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233.


(2) Safety rating label means the label with NCAP safety rating information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1232(g). The safety rating label is part of the Monroney label.


(d) Required label.


(1) Except as specified in paragraph (f) of this section, each vehicle must have a safety rating label that is part of its Monroney label, meets the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of this section, and conforms in content, format and sequence to the sample label depicted in Figure 1 of this section. If NHTSA has not provided a safety rating for any category of vehicle performance for a vehicle, the manufacturer may use the smaller label specified in paragraph (f) of this section.


(2) The label must depict the star ratings for that vehicle as reported to the vehicle manufacturer by NHTSA.


(3) Whenever NHTSA informs a manufacturer in writing of a new safety rating for a specified vehicle or the continued applicability of an existing safety rating for a new model year, including any safety concerns, the manufacturer shall include the new or continued safety rating on vehicles manufactured on or after the date 30 calendar days after receipt by the manufacturer of the information.


(4) If, for a vehicle that has an existing safety rating for a category, NHTSA informs the manufacturer in writing that it has approved an optional NCAP test that will cover that category, the manufacturer may depict vehicles manufactured on or after the date of receipt of the information as “Not Rated” or “To Be Rated” for that category.


(5) The text “Overall Vehicle Score,” “Frontal Crash,” “Side Crash,” “Rollover,” “Driver,” “Passenger,” “Front Seat,” “Rear Seat” and where applicable, “Not Rated” or “To Be Rated,” the star graphic indicating each rating, as well as any text in the header and footer areas of the label, must have a minimum font size of 12 point. All remaining text and symbols on the label (including the star graphic specified in paragraph (e)(9)(i) of this section), must have a minimum font size of 8 point.


(e) Required information and format.


(1) Safety rating label border. The safety rating label must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a minimum of 3 points in width.


(2) Safety rating label size and legibility. The safety rating label must be presented in a legible, visible, and prominent fashion that covers at least 8 percent of the total area of the Monroney label (i.e., including the safety rating label) or an area with a minimum of 4
1/2 inches in length and 3
1/2 inches in height on the Monroney label, whichever is larger.


(3) Heading area. The words “Government 5-Star Safety Ratings” must be in boldface, capital letters that are light in color and centered. The background must be dark.


(4) Overall vehicle score area.


(i) The overall vehicle score area must be placed immediately below the heading area and must have dark text and a light background. The overall vehicle score rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.


(ii) The words “Overall Vehicle Score” must be in boldface aligned to the left side of the label. The achieved star rating must be on the same line and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(iii) The words “Based on the combined ratings of frontal, side and rollover” followed by the statement “Should ONLY be compared to other vehicles of similar size and weight” (on the following line) must be placed at the bottom of the overall vehicle score area and left justified.


(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the “Frontal Crash,” “Side Crash,” or “Rollover” area, the text “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for the NCAP frontal, side, and/or rollover testing such that there will be ratings in all three areas.


(5) Frontal crash area.


(i) The frontal crash area must be placed immediately below the overall vehicle score area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. Both the driver and the right front seat passenger frontal crash test ratings must be displayed with the maximum star ratings achieved.


(ii) The words “Frontal Crash” must be in boldface, cover two lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label.


(iii) The word “Driver” must be on the same line as the word “Frontal” in “Frontal Crash,” and be horizontally centered, left justified and vertically aligned to the top of the frontal crash area. The achieved star rating for “Driver” must be on the same line and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for the “Driver” position, the text “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Driver” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(v) The word “Passenger” must be on the same line as the word “Crash” in “Frontal Crash,” below the word “Driver,” and be horizontally centered, left justified and vertically aligned to the top of the frontal crash area. The achieved star rating for “Passenger” must be on the same line and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for “Passenger,” the words “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Passenger” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(vii) The words “Based on the risk of injury in a frontal impact.” followed (on the next line) by the statement “Should ONLY be compared to other vehicles of similar size and weight.” must be placed at the bottom of the frontal crash area and left justified.


(6) Side crash area.


(i) The side crash area must be immediately below the frontal crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. Both the driver and the rear seat passenger side crash test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.


(ii) The words “Side Crash” must cover two lines, and be aligned to the left side of the label in boldface.


(iii) The words “Front seat” must be on the same line as the word “Side” in “Side Crash” and be horizontally centered, left justified and vertically aligned to the top of the side crash area. The achieved star rating for “Front seat” must be on the same line as the words “Front seat” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(iv) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for “Front Seat,” the words “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Front seat” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(v) The words “Rear seat” must be on the same line as the word “Crash” in “Side Crash,” below the word “Front seat,” and be horizontally centered, left justified and vertically aligned to the top of the side crash area. The achieved star rating for “Rear seat” must be on the same line as the text “Rear seat” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(vi) If NHTSA has not released the star rating for “Rear Seat,” the text “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the text “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Rear seat” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(vii) The words “Based on the risk of injury in a side impact.” must be placed at the bottom of the side crash area and left justified.


(7) Rollover area.


(i) The rollover area must be immediately below the side crash area, separated by a dark line that is a minimum of three points in width. The text must be dark against a light background. The rollover test rating must be displayed with the maximum star rating achieved.


(ii) The word “Rollover” must be aligned to the left side of the label in boldface. The achieved star rating must be on the same line and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(iii) If NHTSA has not tested the vehicle, the words “Not Rated” must be used in boldface. However, as an alternative, the words “To Be Rated” (in boldface) may be used if the manufacturer has received written notification from NHTSA that the vehicle has been chosen for NCAP testing. Both texts must be on the same line as the text “Rollover” and be aligned to the right side of the label and left justified.


(iv) The words “Based on the risk of rollover in a single-vehicle crash.” must be placed at the bottom of the rollover area and left justified.


(8) Graphics. The star graphic is depicted in Figure 3 and the safety concern graphic is depicted in Figure 4.


(9) Footer area. The footer area must be placed at the bottom of the label; the text must be in boldface letters that are light in color and centered. The background must be dark. The text must state the following, in the specified order, on separate lines:


(i) “Star ratings range from 1 to 5 stars (★ ★ ★ ★ ★) with 5 being the highest.”


(ii) “Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA).”


(iii) “www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236.”


(10) Safety concern. For vehicle tests for which NHTSA reports a safety concern as part of the safety rating, and for overall vehicle scores that are derived from vehicle tests for at least one of which NHTSA reports a safety concern as part of the safety rating, the label must:


(i) In both the rating area in which the safety concern was identified and in the overall vehicle score area, depict, as a superscript to the star rating, the safety concern symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, at
2/3 the font size of the base star, and


(ii) Include at the bottom of the overall vehicle score area only as the last line of that area, in no smaller than 8 point type, the related symbol, as depicted in Figure 4 of this section, as a superscript of the rest of the line, and the text “Safety Concern: Visit www.safercar.gov or call 1-888-327-4236 for more details.”


(11) No additional information may be provided in the safety rating label area. The specified information provided in a language other than English is not considered to be additional information.


(f) Smaller safety rating label for vehicles with no ratings.


(1) If NHTSA has not released a safety rating for any category for a vehicle, the manufacturer may use a smaller safety rating label that meets paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(5) of this section. A sample label is depicted in Figure 2.


(2) The label must be at least 4
1/2 inches in width and 1
1/2 inches in height, and must be surrounded by a solid dark line that is a minimum of 3 points in width.


(3) Heading area. The text must read “Government 5-Star Safety Ratings” and be at least in 14-point boldface, capital letters that are light in color, and be centered. The background must be dark.


(4) General information. The general information area must be below the header area. The text must be dark and the background must be light. The text must state the following, in at least 12-point font and be left justified: “This vehicle has not been rated by the government for overall vehicle score, frontal crash, side crash, or rollover risk.”


(5) Footer area. The footer area must be placed at the bottom of the label; the text must be at least in 12-point boldface letters that are light in color, and centered. The background must be dark. The text must state the following, in the specified order, on separate lines:


(i) “Source: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)” and


(ii) “www.safercar.gov or 1-888-327-4236”.


(6) No additional information may be provided in the smaller safety rating label area. The specified information provided in a language other than English is not considered to be additional information.


(g) Labels for alterers.


(1) If, pursuant to 49 CFR 567.7, a person is required to affix a certification label to a vehicle, and the vehicle has a safety rating label with one or more safety ratings, the alterer must also place another label on that vehicle as specified in this paragraph.


(2) The additional label (which does not replace the one required by 49 CFR 567.7) must read: “This vehicle has been altered. The stated star ratings on the safety rating label may no longer be applicable.”


(3) The label must be placed adjacent to the Monroney label or as close to it as physically possible.





[76 FR 45466, July 29, 2011, as amended at 76 FR 74724, Dec. 1, 2011]


Subpart E – Energy Independence and Security Act; Consumer Information


Source:76 FR 39577, July 6, 2011, unless otherwise noted.

§ 575.401 Vehicle labeling of fuel economy, greenhouse gas, and other pollutant emissions information.

(a) Purpose and scope. The purpose of this section is to aid potential purchasers in the selection of new passenger cars and light trucks by providing them with information about vehicles’ performance in terms of fuel economy, greenhouse gas (GHG), and other air pollutant emissions. Manufacturers of passenger cars and light trucks are required to include this information on the label described in this section. Although this information will also be available through means such as postings at http://www.fueleconomy.gov, the additional label information is intended to provide consumers with this information at the point of sale, and to help them compare between vehicles.


(b) Application. This section applies to passenger cars and light trucks manufactured in model year 2013 and later. Manufacturers may optionally comply with this section during model year 2012.


(c) Definitions.


(1) Data element means a piece of information required or permitted to be included on the fuel economy and environment label.


(2) Fuel economy and environment label means the label with information about automobile performance in terms of fuel economy, greenhouse gases, and other emissions and with rating systems for fuel economy, greenhouse gases, and other emissions that also indicate the automobile(s) with the highest fuel economy and lowest greenhouse gas emissions, as specified at 49 U.S.C. 32908(g).


(3) Miles per gasoline gallon equivalent (MPGe) is a measure of distance traveled per unit of energy consumed, and functions as a recognizable equivalent to, e.g., kilowatt-hours per mile (kW-hr/mile).


(4) Monroney label means the label placed on new automobiles with the manufacturer’s suggested retail price and other consumer information, as specified at 15 U.S.C. 1231-1233 (also known as the “Automobile Information Disclosure Act label”).


(5) Other air pollutants or other emissions means those tailpipe emissions, other than carbon dioxide (CO2), for which manufacturers must provide EPA with emissions rates for all new light duty vehicles each model year under EPA’s Tier 2 light duty vehicle emissions standards requirements (40 CFR Part 86, Subpart S) or the parallel requirements for those vehicles certified instead to the California emissions standards. These air pollutants include non-methane organic gases (NMOG), nitrogen oxides (NOX), particulate matter (PM), carbon monoxide (CO), and formaldehyde (HCHO).


(6) Slider bar means a horizontal rating scale with a minimum value at one end and a maximum value at the other end that can accommodate a designation of a specific value between those values with a box or arrow. The actual rating value would be printed (displayed) at the proper position on the scale representing the vehicle’s actual rating value relative to the two end values.


(d) Required label. Prior to being offered for sale, each manufacturer must affix or cause to be affixed and each dealer must maintain or cause to be maintained on each passenger car or light truck a label that meets the requirements specified in this section, and conforms in content, format, and sequence to the sample labels depicted in the appendix to this section. The manufacturer must have the fuel economy label affixed in such a manner that appearance and legibility are maintained until after the vehicle is delivered to the ultimate consumer.


(e) Required label information and format – general provisions – (1) Location. It is preferable that the fuel economy and environment label information be incorporated into the Monroney label, provided that the prominence and legibility of the fuel economy and environment label is maintained. If the fuel economy and environment label is incorporated into the Monroney label, it must be placed on a separate section in the Monroney label and must not be intermixed with that label information, except for vehicle descriptions as noted in 40 CFR 600.302-08(d)(1). If the fuel economy and environment label is not incorporated into the Monroney label, it must be located on a side window, and as close as possible to the Monroney label. If the window is not large enough to accommodate both the Monroney label and the fuel economy and environment label, the latter must be located on another window as close as physically possible to the Monroney label.


(2) Size and legibility. The fuel economy and environment label must be readily visible from the exterior of the vehicle and presented in a legible and prominent fashion. The label must be rectangular in shape with a minimum height of 4.5 inches (114 mm) and a minimum length of 7.0 inches (177 mm) as specified in the appendix to this section.


(3) Basic appearance. Fuel economy and environment labels must be printed on white or very light paper with the color specified in this section; any label markings for which a color is not specified here must be in black and white. The label can be divided into three separate fields outlined by a continuous border, as described in the appendix to this section. Manufacturers must make a good faith effort to conform to the formats illustrated in the appendix to this section. Label templates are available for download at http://www.nhtsa.gov/fuel-economy/.


(4) Border. Create a continuous black border to outline the label and separate the three information fields. Include the following information in the upper and lower portions of the border:


(i) Upper border, label name. (A) In the left portion of the upper border, the words “EPA” and “DOT” must be in boldface, capital letters that are light in color and left-justified, with a horizontal line in between them as shown in the appendix to this section.


(B) Immediately to the right of the agency names, the heading “Fuel Economy and Environment” must be in boldface letters that are light in color.


(ii) Upper border, vehicle fuel type. In the right portion of the upper border, identify the vehicle’s fuel type in black font on a blue-colored field as follows:


(A) For vehicles designed to operate on a single fuel, identify the appropriate fuel. For example, identify the vehicle with the words “Gasoline Vehicle,” “Diesel Vehicle,” “Compressed Natural Gas Vehicle,” “Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicle,” etc. This includes hybrid electric vehicles that do not have plug-in capability. Include a logo corresponding to the fuel to the left of this designation as follows:


(1) For gasoline, include a fuel pump logo.


(2) For diesel fuel, include a fuel pump logo with a “D” inscribed in the base of the fuel pump.


(3) For natural gas, include the established CNG logo.


(4) For hydrogen fuel cells, include the expression “H2.”


(B) Identify dual-fueled (“flexible-fueled”) vehicles with the words “Flexible-Fuel Vehicle Gasoline-Ethanol (E85),” “Flexible-Fuel Vehicle Diesel-Natural Gas,” etc. Include a fuel pump logo or a combination of logos to the left of this designation as appropriate. For example, for vehicles that operate on gasoline or ethanol, include a fuel pump logo and the designation “E85,” as shown in the appendix to this section.


(C) Identify plug-in hybrid electric vehicles with the words “Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Electricity-Gasoline” or “Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle Electricity-Diesel.” Include a fuel pump logo to the lower left of this designation and an electric plug logo to the upper left of this designation.


(D) Identify electric vehicles with the words “Electric Vehicle.” Include an electric plug logo to the left of this designation.


(iii) Lower border, left side: (A) In the upper left portion of the lower border, include the statement “Actual results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per gallon. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change and smog.” For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of d, insert the estimated cost per gallon established by EPA for gasoline or diesel fuel, as appropriate. See paragraphs (f) through (j) below for alternate statements that apply for vehicles that use a fuel other than gasoline or diesel fuel.


(B) In the lower left portion of the lower border, include the Web site reference, “fueleconomy.gov,” and include the following statement: “Calculate personalized estimates and compare vehicles” beneath it.


(iv) Lower border, right side: Include a field in the right-most portion of the lower border to allow for accessing interactive information with mobile electronic devices as set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(b)(6).


(v) Lower border, center: Along the lower edge of the lower border, to the left of the field described in paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this section, include the logos for the Environmental Protection Agency, the Department of Transportation, and the Department of Energy as shown in the appendix to this section.


(5) Fuel economy performance and fuel cost values. To the left side in the white field at the top of the label, include the following elements for vehicles that run on gasoline or diesel fuel with no plug-in capability:


(i) The heading “Fuel Economy” near the top left corner of the field.


(ii) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(iii) A fuel pump logo to the left of the combined fuel economy value (for diesel fuel, include a fuel pump logo with a “D” inscribed in the base of the fuel pump).


(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(A) Include the word “MPG” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(a) and (b) to the right of the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word “MPG.” Include the expression “city” in smaller font below the city fuel economy value, and the expression “highway” in smaller font below the highway fuel economy value.


(v) Below the fuel economy performance values set forth in paragraphs (e)(5)(ii) and (iv) of this section, include the value for the fuel consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(1).


(vi) To the right of the word “MPG” described in paragraph (e)(5)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2) and below that information, include the expression “The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.”


(6) Comparative five-year fuel costs/savings. To the right side in the white field at the top of the label, include the information required by EPA at 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(3).


(7) Annual fuel cost value. In the field in the lower left portion of the label, include the information on annual fuel cost as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(d).


(8) Fuel economy and environment slider bar ratings. In the field in the lower right portion of the label,


(i) Include the heading “Fuel Economy & Greenhouse Gas Rating (tailpipe only)” in the top left corner of the field.


(ii) Include a slider bar in the left portion of the field as shown in the appendix to this section to characterize the vehicle’s fuel economy and CO2 emission rating relative to the range of fuel economy and CO2 emission rates for all vehicles. Position a black box with a downward-pointing wedge above the slider bar positioned to show where that vehicle’s fuel economy and CO2 emission rating falls relative to the total range. Include the vehicle’s fuel economy and CO2 emission rating determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(d) inside the box in white text. If the fuel economy and CO2 emission ratings are different, the black box with a downward-pointing wedge above the slider bar must contain the fuel economy rating, with a second upward-pointing wedge below the slider bar containing the CO2 emission rating. Include the number “1” in white text in the black border at the left end of the slider bar, and include the number “10” in white text in the black border at the right end of the slider bar, with the expression “Best” in black text under the slider bar directly below the “10.” Add color to the slider bar such that it is blue at the left end of the range, white at the right end of the range, and shaded continuously across the range.


(iii) Include the heading “Smog Rating (tailpipe only)” in the top right corner of the field.


(iv) Include a slider bar in the right portion of the field to characterize the vehicle’s level of emission control for other air pollutants relative to that of all vehicles. Position a black box with a downward-pointing wedge above the slider bar positioned to show where that vehicle’s emission rating falls relative to the total range. Include the vehicle’s emission rating determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(g) inside the box in white text. Include the number “1” in white text in the black border at the left end of the slider bar, and include the number “10” in white text in the black border at the right end of the slider bar, with the expression “Best” in black text under the slider bar directly below the “10.” Add color to the slider bar such that it is blue at the left end of the range, white at the right end of the range, and shaded continuously across the range.


(v) Below the slider bars described in paragraphs (e)(8)(ii) and (e)(8)(iv) to this section, include the statement, “This vehicle emits e grams CO2 per mile. The best emits 0 grams per mile (tailpipe only). Producing and distributing fuel also creates emissions; learn more at fueleconomy.gov.” For the value of e, insert the vehicle’s specific tailpipe CO2 emission rating determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(d).


(9) Rounding. Round all numerical values identified in this section to the nearest whole number unless otherwise specified.


(10) Other label information required by EPA. Manufacturers must include any additional labeling information required by EPA at 40 CFR 600.302-12 on the fuel economy and environment label.


(f) Required label information and format – flexible-fuel vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for flexible-fuel vehicles must meet the specifications described in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and additional specifications described in this paragraph (f). This section describes how to label vehicles with gasoline engines. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, all the references to “gas” or “gasoline” in this section are understood to refer to “diesel” or “diesel fuel,” respectively.


(2) For qualifying vehicles, include the following additional expression in the statement identified in paragraph (e)(iv)(3)(A) of this section as shown in the appendix to this section: “This is a dual fueled automobile.”


(3) Include the following elements instead of the information identified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:


(i) The heading “Fuel Economy” near the top left corner of the field.


(ii) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(iii) A fuel pump logo and other logos as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value.


(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(A) Include the word “MPG” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(a) and (b) to the right of the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word “MPG.” Include the expression “city” in smaller font below the city fuel economy value, and the expression “highway” in smaller font below the highway fuel economy value.


(v) Below the fuel economy performance value set forth in paragraph (f)(iii)(2) of this section, include the value for the fuel consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(1).


(vi) To the right of the word “MPG” described in paragraph (e)(5)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2), and below that information, include the expression “The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe. Values are based on gasoline and do not reflect performance and ratings based on E85.” Adjust this statement as appropriate for vehicles designed to operate on different fuels.


(vii) Below the combined fuel economy value, the manufacturer may include information on the vehicle’s driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, with the sub-heading “Driving Range,” and with range bars below this sub-heading as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.303-12(b)(6).


(g) Required label information and format – special requirements for hydrogen fuel cell vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for hydrogen fuel cell vehicles must meet the specifications set forth in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and additional specifications described in this paragraph (g).


(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the lower border instead of the statement specified in paragraph (e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: “Actual results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per kilogram of hydrogen. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change and smog.” For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of d, insert the estimated cost per kilogram established by EPA for hydrogen.


(3) Include the following elements instead of the information identified above in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:


(i) The heading “Fuel Economy” near the top left corner of the field.


(ii) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(iii) The “H2” logo as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value.


(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(A) Include the word “MPGe” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(a) and (b) to the right of the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word “MPG.” Include the expression “city” in smaller font below the city fuel economy value, and the expression “highway” in smaller font below the highway fuel economy value.


(v) To the right of the fuel economy performance values set forth in paragraph (iv)(B) of this section, include the value for the fuel consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(1).


(vi) To the right of the word “MPGe” described in paragraph (g)(3)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2) and below that information, include the expression “The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.”


(vii) Below the combined fuel economy value, include information on the vehicle’s driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.304-12(b)(6)


(h) Required label information and format – special requirements for compressed natural gas vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for compressed natural gas vehicles must meet the specifications described in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and additional specifications described in this paragraph (h).


(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the lower border instead of the statement specified in paragraph (e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: “Actual results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per gasoline gallon equivalent. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change and smog.” For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of d, insert the estimated cost per gasoline gallon equivalent established by EPA for natural gas.


(3) Include the following elements instead of the information identified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:


(i) The heading “Fuel Economy” near the top left corner of the field.


(ii) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(iii) The compressed natural gas logo as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value.


(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(A) Include the word “MPGe” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(a) and (b) to the right of the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word “MPGe.” Include the expression “city” in smaller font below the city fuel economy value, and the expression “highway” in smaller font below the highway fuel economy value.


(v) To the right of the fuel economy performance values described in paragraph (h)(3)(iv)(B) of this section, include the value for the fuel consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(1).


(vi) To the right of the word “MPGe” described in paragraph (g)(3)(iv)(A) of this section, include the information about the range of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2), and below that information, include the expression “The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.”


(vii) Below the combined fuel economy value, include information on the vehicle’s driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.306-12(b)(6).


(i) Required label information and format – special requirements for plug-in hybrid electric vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for plug-in hybrid electric vehicles must meet the specifications described in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and additional specifications described in this paragraph (i). This paragraph (i) describes how to label vehicles equipped with gasoline engines. If a vehicle has a diesel engine, all the references to “gas” or “gasoline” in this section are understood to refer to “diesel” or “diesel fuel,” respectively.


(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the lower border instead of the statement specified in paragraph (e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: “Actual results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $d per gallon and $e per kW-hr. This is a dual fueled automobile. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change and smog.” For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of d, insert the estimated cost per gallon established by EPA for gasoline. For the value of e, insert the estimated cost per kW-hr of electricity established by EPA.


(3) Include the following elements instead of the information identified above in paragraph (e)(5):


(i) The heading “Fuel Economy” near the top left corner of the field.


(ii) An outlined box below the heading with the following information:


(A) The sub-heading “Electricity” if the vehicle’s engine starts only after the battery is fully discharged, or the sub-heading “Electricity + Gasoline” if the vehicle uses combined power from the battery and the engine before the battery is fully discharged.


(B) The expression “Charge Time: x hours (240 V),” as required by EPA and as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(2)(ii).


(C) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(D) An electric plug logo as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value. For vehicles that use combined power from the battery and the engine before the battery is fully discharged, also include the fuel pump logo as shown in the appendix to this section.


(E) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(1) Include the word “MPGe” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(2) If the vehicle’s engine starts only after the battery is fully discharged, identify the vehicle’s electricity consumption rate as required by EPA and determined as set forth in set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(2)(v).


(3) If the vehicle uses combined power from the battery and the engine before the battery is fully discharged, identify the vehicle’s gasoline and electricity consumption rates as required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(2)(v).


(iii) A second outlined box to the right of the box described in paragraph (i)(3)(ii) of this section with the following information:


(A) The sub-heading “Gasoline Only.”


(B) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(C) A fuel pump logo to the left of the combined fuel economy value.


(D) The units identifier and consumption values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(1) Include the word “MPGe” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(2) Identify the vehicle’s gasoline consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(3).


(iv) Below the boxes specified in paragraphs (i)(3)(ii) and (iii) of this section, include information on the vehicle’s driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as required by EPA and as set forth in 40 CFR 600.308-12(b)(4).


(v) To the right of the heading “Fuel Economy” described in paragraph (i)(3)(i) of this section, include the information about the range of fuel economy of comparable vehicles as required by EPA and set forth in 40 CFR 600.302-12(c)(2) and to the right of that information, include the expression “The best vehicle rates 99 MPGe.”


(4) Include the following statement instead of the statement identified in paragraph (e)(8)(v) of this section: “This vehicle emits f grams CO2 per mile. The best emits 0 grams per mile (tailpipe only). Producing and distributing fuel & electricity also creates emissions; learn more at fueleconomy.gov.” For the value of f, insert the vehicle’s specific tailpipe CO2 emission rating determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(d).


(j) Required label information and format – special requirements for electric vehicles. (1) Fuel economy and environment labels for electric vehicles must meet the specifications described in paragraph (e) of this section, with the exceptions and additional specifications described in this section.


(2) Include the following statement in the upper left portion of the lower border instead of the statement specified above in paragraph (e)(4)(iii)(A) of this section: “Actual results will vary for many reasons, including driving conditions and how you drive and maintain your vehicle. The average new vehicle gets a MPG and costs $b to fuel over 5 years. Cost estimates are based on c miles per year at $e per kW-hr. MPGe is miles per gasoline gallon equivalent. Vehicle emissions are a significant cause of climate change and smog.” For the value of a, insert the average new vehicle combined MPG value for that model year established by EPA. For the value of b, insert the estimated five year fuel cost value established by EPA for the average new vehicle in that model year. For the value of c, insert the annual mileage rate established by EPA. For the value of e, insert the estimated cost per kW-hr of electricity established by EPA.


(3) Include the following elements instead of the information identified in paragraph (e)(5) of this section:


(i) The heading “Fuel Economy” near the top left corner of the field.


(ii) The vehicle’s combined fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.210-12(c) in large font, with the words “combined city/hwy” below the number in smaller font.


(iii) The electric plug logo as specified in paragraph (e)(4)(ii)(A) of this section to the left of the combined fuel economy value.


(iv) The units identifier and specific fuel economy values to the right of the combined fuel economy value as follows:


(A) Include the word “MPGe” to the upper right of the combined fuel economy value.


(B) Include the value for the city and highway fuel economy determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.311-12(a) and (b) to the right of the combined fuel economy value in smaller font, and below the word “MPGe.” Include the expression “city” in smaller font below the city fuel economy value, and the expression “highway” in smaller font below the highway fuel economy value.


(v) To the right of the fuel economy performance values described in paragraph (iv)(B) of this section, include the value for the fuel consumption rate required by EPA and determined as set forth in 40 CFR 600.310-12(b)(5).


(vi) Below the combined fuel economy value, include information on the vehicle’s driving range as shown in the appendix to this section, as required by EPA and as set forth in 40 CFR 600.310-12(b)(6).


(vii) Below the driving range information and left-justified, include information on the vehicle’s charge time, as required by EPA and as set forth in 40 CFR 600.310-12(b)(7).


(4) Include the following statement instead of the statement identified in paragraph (e)(8)(v) of this section: “This vehicle emits 0 grams CO2 per mile. The best emits 0 grams per mile (tailpipe only). Does not include emissions from generating electricity; learn more at fueleconomy.gov.”



Appendix to § 575.401











PART 576 – RECORD RETENTION


Authority:49 U.S.C. 322(a), 30117, 30120(g), 30141-30147; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50.


Source:39 FR 30045, Aug. 20, 1974, unless otherwise noted.


Editorial Note:For an interpretation document regarding part 576, see 40 FR 3296, Jan. 21, 1975.

§ 576.1 Scope.

This part establishes requirements for the retention by manufacturers of motor vehicles and of motor vehicle equipment, of claims, complaints, reports, and other records concerning alleged and proven motor vehicle or motor vehicle equipment defects and malfunctions that may be related to motor vehicle safety.


[67 FR 45872, July 10, 2002]


§ 576.2 Purpose.

The purpose of this part is to preserve records that are needed for the proper investigation, and adjudication or other disposition, of possible defects related to motor vehicle safety and instances of nonconformity to the motor vehicle safety standards and associated regulations.


§ 576.3 Application.

This part applies to all manufacturers of motor vehicles, with respect to all records generated or acquired on or after August 16, 1969, and to all manufacturers of motor vehicle equipment, with respect to all records in their possession, generated or acquired on or after August 9, 2002.


[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]


§ 576.4 Definitions.

All terms in this part that are defined in 49 U.S.C. 30102 and part 579 of this chapter are used as defined therein.


[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]


§ 576.5 Basic requirements.

(a) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles, child restraint systems, and tires shall retain, as specified in § 576.7 of this part, all records described in § 576.6 of this part for a period of five calendar years from the date on which they were generated or acquired by the manufacturer.


(b) Each manufacturer of motor vehicles and motor vehicle equipment shall retain, as specified in § 576.7 of this part, all the underlying records on which the information reported under part 579 of this chapter is based, for a period of five calendar years from the date on which they were generated or acquired by the manufacturer, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.


(c) Manufacturers need not retain copies of documents transmitted to NHTSA pursuant to parts 573, 577, and 579 of this chapter.


[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]


§ 576.6 Records.

Records to be maintained by manufacturers under this part include all documentary materials, films, tapes, and other information-storing media that contain information concerning malfunctions that may be related to motor vehicle safety. Such records include, but are not limited to, reports and other documents, including material generated or communicated by computer, telefax or other electronic means, that are related to work performed under warranties; and any lists, compilations, analyses, or discussions of such malfunctions contained in internal or external correspondence of the manufacturer, including communications transmitted electronically.


[67 FR 45873, July 10, 2002]


§ 576.7 Retention.

Duplicate copies need not be retained. Information may be reproduced or transferred from one storage medium to another (e.g., from paper files to microfilm) as long as no information is lost in the reproduction or transfer, and when so reproduced or transferred the original form may be treated as a duplicate.


§ 576.8 Malfunctions covered.

For purposes of this part, “malfunctions that may be related to motor vehicle safety” shall include, with respect to a motor vehicle or item of motor vehicle equipment, any failure or malfunction beyond normal deterioration in use, or any failure of performance, or any flaw or unintended deviation from design specifications, that could in any reasonably foreseeable manner be a causative factor in, or aggravate, an accident or an injury to a person.


PART 577 – DEFECT AND NONCOMPLIANCE NOTIFICATION


Authority:49 U.S.C. 30102, 30103, 30116-121, 30166; delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.95 and 49 CFR 501.8.


Source:41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, unless otherwise noted.

§ 577.1 Scope.

This part sets forth requirements for manufacturer notification to owners, dealers, and distributors of motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment about a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety or a noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard.


[69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]


§ 577.2 Purpose.

The purpose of this part is to ensure that notifications of defects or noncompliances adequately inform and effectively motivate owners of potentially defective or noncomplying motor vehicles or items of replacement equipment to have such vehicles or equipment inspected and, where necessary, remedied as quickly as possible. It is also to ensure that dealers and distributors of motor vehicles and items of replacement equipment are made aware of the existence of defects and noncompliances and of their rights and responsibilities with regard thereto.


[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 69 FR 34959, June 23, 2004]


§ 577.3 Application.

This part applies to manufacturers of complete motor vehicles, incomplete motor vehicles, and replacement equipment. In the case of vehicles manufactured in two or more stages, compliance by either the manufacturer of the incomplete vehicle, any subsequent manufacturer, or the manufacturer of affected replacement equipment, shall be considered compliance by each of those manufacturers.


§ 577.4 Definitions.

For the purposes of this part:


Act means 49 U.S.C. Chapter 30101-30169.


Administrator means the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration or his delegate.


First purchaser means the first purchaser in good faith for a purpose other than resale.


Leased motor vehicle means any motor vehicle that is leased to a person for a term of at least four months by a lessor who has leased five or more vehicles in the twelve months preceding the date of notification by the vehicle manufacturer of the existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in the motor vehicle.


Lessee means a person who is the lessee of a leased motor vehicle as defined in this section.


Lessor means a person or entity that is the owner, as reflected on the vehicle’s title, of any five or more leased vehicles (as defined in this section), as of the date of notification by the manufacturer of the existence of a safety-related defect or noncompliance with a Federal motor vehicle safety standard in one or more of the leased motor vehicles.


Owners includes purchaser.


[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17270, Apr. 5, 1995]


§ 577.5 Notification pursuant to a manufacturer’s decision.

(a) When a manufacturer of motor vehicles or replacement equipment determines that any motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment produced by the manufacturer contains a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety, or fails to conform to an applicable Federal motor vehicle safety standard, or the manufacturer files a defect or noncompliance information report under 49 CFR part 573, the manufacturer shall provide notification in accordance with § 577.7(a), unless the manufacturer is exempted by the Administrator (pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30118(d) or 30120(h)) from giving such notification. The notification shall contain the information specified in this section. The information required by paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section shall be presented in the form and order specified. The information required by paragraphs (d) through (h) of this section may be presented in any order. Except as authorized by the Administrator, the manufacturer shall submit a copy of its proposed owner notification letter, including any provisions or attachments related to reimbursement, to NHTSA’s Recall Management Division (NVS-215) no fewer than five (5) Federal Government business days before it intends to begin mailing it to owners. The manufacturer shall mark the outside of each envelope in which it sends an owner notification letter with a notation that includes the phrase “SAFETY RECALL NOTICE,” all in capital letters and in a type that is larger than that used in the address section, and is also distinguishable from the other type in a manner other than size. It shall also imprint on the outside of this envelope a label in accordance with § 577.14. Except where the format of the envelope has been previously approved by NHTSA’s Recall Management Division (NVS-215), each manufacturer must submit the envelope format it intends to use to that division at least five (5) Federal Government business days before mailing the notification to owners. Submission of envelopes and proposed owner notification letters shall be made by the means identified in 49 CFR 573.9. Notification sent to an owner whose address is in the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico shall be written in both English and Spanish.


(b) At the top of the notification, there must be the statement “IMPORTANT SAFETY RECALL,” in all capital letters and in a type size that is larger than that used in the remainder of the letter. Then immediately below, for vehicle recalls, there must be the statement “This notice applies to your vehicle, (manufacturer to insert VIN for the particular vehicle).” If VIN placement is not possible in this location, the VIN must then be placed in another conspicuous location within the notification. Immediately below the foregoing, there must be the opening statement: “This notice is sent to you in accordance with the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act.”


(c) Whichever of the following statements is appropriate:


(1) “(Manufacturer’s name or division) has decided that a defect which relates to motor vehicle safety exists in (identified motor vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of notification sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer);” or


(2) “(Manufacturer’s name or division) has decided that (identified motor vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of notification sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer) fail to conform to Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. (number and title of standard).”


(d) When the manufacturer determines that the defect or noncompliance may not exist in each such vehicle or item of replacement equipment, he may include an additional statement to that effect.


(e) A clear description of the defect or noncompliance, which shall include –


(1) An identification of the vehicle system or particular item(s) of motor vehicle equipment affected.


(2) A description of the malfunction that may occur as a result of the defect or noncompliance. The description of a noncompliance with an applicable standard shall include, in general terms, the difference between the performance of the noncomplying vehicle or item of replacement equipment and the performance specified by the standard;


(3) A statement of any operating or other conditions that may cause the malfunction to occur; and


(4) A statement of the precautions, if any, that the owners should take to reduce the chance that the malfunction will occur before the defect or noncompliance is remedied.


(f) An evaluation of the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably related to the defect or noncompliance.


(1) When vehicle crash is a potential occurrence, the evaluation shall include whichever of the following is appropriate:


(i) A statement that the defect or noncompliance can cause vehicle crash without prior warning; or


(ii) A description of whatever prior warning may occur, and a statement that if this warning is not heeded, vehicle crash can occur.


(2) When vehicle crash is not the potential occurrence, the evaluation must include a statement indicating the general type of injury to occupants of the vehicle, or to persons outside the vehicle, that can result from the defect or noncompliance, and a description of whatever prior warning may occur.


(g) A statement of measures to be taken to remedy the defect or noncompliance, in accordance with paragraph (g)(1) or (g)(2) of this section, whichever is appropriate.


(1) When the manufacturer is required by the Act to remedy the defect or noncompliance without charge, or when he will voluntarily so remedy in full conformity with the Act, he shall include –


(i) A statement that he will cause such defect to be remedied without charge, and whether such remedy will be by repair, replacement, or refund of the purchase price (in the case of remedy of a vehicle, less depreciation).


(ii) The earliest date on which the defect or noncompliance will be remedied without charge. In the case of remedy by repair, this date shall be the earliest date on which the manufacturer reasonably expects that dealers or other service facilities will receive necessary parts and instructions. The manufacturer shall specify the last date, if any, on which he will remedy tires without charge.


(iii) In the case of remedy by repair through the manufacturer’s dealers or other service facilities:


(A) A general description of the work involved in repairing the defect or noncompliance; and


(B) The manufacturer’s estimate of the time reasonably necessary to perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance.


(iv) In the case of remedy by repair through service facilities other than those of the manufacturer or its dealers:


(A) The name and part number of each part must be added, replaced, or modified;


(B) A description of any modifications that must be made to existing parts, which shall also be identified by name and part number;


(C) Information as to where needed parts will be available;


(D) A detailed description (including appropriate illustrations) of each step required to correct the defect or noncompliance;


(E) The manufacturer’s estimate of the time reasonably necessary to perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance; and


(F) The manufacturer’s recommendations of service facilities where the owner should have the repairs performed.


(v) In the case of remedy by replacement, a description of the motor vehicle or item of replacement equipment that the manufacturer will provide as a replacement for the defective or noncomplying vehicle or equipment.


(vi) In the case of a remedy of a vehicle by refund of purchase price, the method or basis for the manufacturer’s assessment of depreciation.


(vii) A statement informing the owner that he or she may submit a complaint to the Administrator, National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, DC 20590; or call the toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov, if the owner believes that:


(A) The manufacturer, distributor, or dealer has failed or is unable to remedy the defect or noncompliance without charge.


(B) The manufacturer has failed or is unable to remedy the defect or noncompliance without charge –


(1) (In the case of motor vehicles or items of replacement equipment, other than tires) within a reasonable time, which is not longer than 60 days in the case of repair after the owner’s first tender to obtain repair following the earliest repair date specified in the notification, unless the period is extended by Administrator.


(2) (In the case of tires) after the date specified in the notification on which replacement tires will be available.


(2) When the manufacturer is not required to remedy the defect or noncompliance without charge and he will not voluntarily so remedy, the statement shall include –


(i) A statement that the manufacturer is not required by the Act to remedy without charge.


(ii) A statement of the extent to which the manufacturer will voluntarily remedy, including the method of remedy and any limitations and conditions imposed by the manufacturer on such remedy.


(iii) The manufacturer’s opinion whether the defect or noncompliance can be remedied by repair. If the manufacturer believes that repair is possible, the statement shall include the information specified in paragraph (g)(1)(iv) of this section, except that;


(A) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(A) of this section shall also indicate the suggested list price of each part.


(B) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(C) of this section shall also indicate the manufacturer’s estimate of the date on which the parts will be generally available.


(h) Any lessor who receives a notification of a determination of a safety-related defect or noncompliance pertaining to any leased motor vehicle shall send a copy of such notice to the lessee as prescribed by § 577.7(a)(2)(iv). This requirement applies to both initial and follow-up notifications, but does not apply where the manufacturer has notified a lessor’s lessees directly.


(Authority: Secs. 108, 112, and 119, Pub. L. 89-563; 80 Stat. 718; secs. 102, 103, and 104, Pub. L. 93-492, 88 Stat. 1470 (15 U.S.C. 1397, 1401, 1408, and 1411-1420); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50)

[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 46 FR 6971, Jan. 22, 1981; 46 FR 28657, May 28, 1981; 60 FR 17270, Apr. 5, 1995; 61 FR 279, Jan. 4, 1996; 68 FR 18142, Apr. 15, 2003; 70 FR 35557, June 21, 2005; 72 FR 32016, June 11, 2007; 78 FR 51422, Aug. 20, 2013; 79 FR 43678, July 28, 2014; 80 FR 55037, Sept. 14, 2015]


§ 577.6 Notification pursuant to Administrator’s decision.

(a) Agency-ordered notification. When a manufacturer is ordered pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 30118(b) to provide notification of a defect or noncompliance, he shall provide such notification in accordance with §§ 577.5 and 577.7, except that the statement required by paragraph (c) of § 577.5 shall indicate that the decision has been made by the Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.


(b) Provisional notification. When a manufacturer does not provide notification as required by paragraph (a) of this section, and an action concerning the Administrator’s order to provide such notification has been filed in a United States District Court, the manufacturer shall, upon the Administrator’s further order, provide in accordance with paragraph (b) of § 577.7 a provisional notification containing the information specified in this paragraph, in the order and, where specified, the form of paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(12) of this section.


(1) An opening statement: “This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act.”


(2) Whichever of the following statements is appropriate:


(i) “The Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has decided that a defect which relates to motor vehicle safety exists in (identified motor vehicles, in the case of notification sent by a manufacturer of motor vehicles; identified replacement equipment, in the case of notification sent by a manufacturer of replacement equipment);” or


(ii) “The Administrator of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has decided that (identified motor vehicles in the case of notification sent by a motor vehicle manufacturer; identified replacement equipment, in the case of notification sent by a manufacturer of replacement equipment) fail to conform to federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. (number and title of standard).”


(3) When the Administrator decides that the defect or noncompliance may not exist in each such vehicle or item of replacement equipment, the manufacturer may include an additional statement to that effect.


(4) The statement: “(Manufacturer’s name or division) is contesting this determination in a proceeding in the Federal courts and has been required to issue this notice pending the outcome of the court proceeding.”


(5) A clear description of the Administrator’s stated basis for his decision, as provided in his order, including a brief summary of the evidence and reasoning that the Administrator relied upon in making his decision.


(6) A clear description of the Administrator’ stated evaluation as provided in his order of the risk to motor vehicle safety reasonably related to the defect or noncompliance.


(7) Any measures that the Administrator has stated in his order should be taken by the owner to avoid an unreasonable hazard resulting from the defect or noncompliance.


(8) A brief summary of the evidence and reasoning upon which the manufacturer relies in contesting the Administrator’s determination.


(9) A statement regarding the availability of remedy and reimbursement in accordance with paragraph (b)(9)(i) or (9)(ii) of this section, whichever is appropriate.


(i) When the purchase date of the vehicle or item of equipment is such that the manufacturer is required by the Act to remedy without charge or to reimburse the owner for reasonable and necessary repair expenses, he shall include –


(A) A statement that the remedy will be provided without charge to the owner if the Court upholds the Administrator’s decision;


(B) A statement of the method of remedy. If the manufacturer has not yet determined the method of remedy, he will select either repair, replacement with an equivalent vehicle or item of replacement equipment, or refund of the purchase price (in the case of remedy of a vehicle, less depreciation); and


(C) A statement that, if the Court upholds the Administrator’s decision, he will reimburse the owner for any reasonable and necessary expenses that the owner incurs (not in excess of any amount specified by the Administrator) in repairing the defect or noncompliance following a date, specified by the manufacturer, which shall not be later than the date of the Administrator’s order to issue this notification.


(ii) When the manufacturer is not required either to remedy without charge or to reimburse, he shall include –


(A) A statement that he is not required to remedy or reimburse, or


(B) A statement of the extent to which he will voluntarily remedy or reimburse, including the method of remedy, if then known, and any limitations and conditions on such remedy or reimbursement.


(10) A statement indicating whether, in the manufacturer’s opinion, the defect or noncompliance can be remedied by repair. When the manufacturer believes that such remedy is feasible, the statement shall include:


(i) A general description of the work and the manufacturer’s estimate of the costs involved in repairing the defect or noncompliance;


(ii) Information on where needed parts and instructions for repairing the defect or noncompliance will be available, including the manufacturer’s estimate of the day on which they will be generally available;


(iii) The manufacturer’s estimate of the time reasonably necessary to perform the labor required to correct the defect or noncompliance; and


(iv) The manufacturer’s recommendations of service facilities where the owner could have the repairs performed, including (in the case of a manufacturer required to reimburse if the Administrator’s decision is upheld in the court proceeding) at least one service facility for whose charges the owner will be fully reimbursed if the Administrator’s decision is upheld.


(11) A statement that further notice will be mailed by the manufacturer to the owner if the Administrator’s decision is upheld in the court proceeding.


(12) An address of the manufacturer where the owner may write to obtain additional information regarding the notification and remedy.


(c) Post-litigation notification. When a manufacturer does not provide notification as required in paragraph (a) of this section and the Administrator prevails in an action commenced with respect to such notification, the manufacturer shall, upon the Administrator’s further order, provide notification in accordance with paragraph (b) of § 577.7 containing the information specified in paragraph (a) of this section, except that –


(1) The statement required by paragraph (c) of § 577.5 shall indicate that the decision has been made by the Administrator and that his decision has been upheld in a proceeding in the Federal courts; and


(2) When a provisional notification was issued regarding the defect or noncompliance and the manufacturer is required under the Act to reimburse –


(i) The manufacturer shall state that he will reimburse the owner for any reasonable and necessary expenses that the owner incurred (not in excess of any amount specified by the Administrator) for repair of the defect or noncompliance of the vehicle or item of equipment on or after the date on which provisional notification was ordered to be issued and on or before a date not sooner than the date on which this notification is received by the owner. The manufacturer shall determine and specify both dates.


(ii) The statement required by paragraph (g)(1)(vii) of § 577.5 shall also inform the owner that he may submit a complaint to the Administrator if the owner believes that the manufacturer has failed to reimburse adequately.


(3) If the manufacturer is not required under the Act to reimburse, he shall include –


(i) A statement that he is not required to reimburse, or


(ii) When he will voluntarily reimburse, a statement of the extent to which he will do so, including any limitations and conditions on such reimbursement.


[41 FR 56816, Dec. 30, 1976, as amended at 60 FR 17271, Apr. 5, 1995; 80 FR 55037, Sept. 14, 2015]


§ 577.7 Time and manner of notification.

(a) The notification required by § 577.5 shall –


(1) Be furnished no later than 60 days from the date the manufacturer files its defect or noncompliance information report under part 573. In the event that the remedy for the defect or noncompliance is not available at the time of notification, the manufacturer shall issue a second notification within a reasonable time and in accordance with the requirements of this part once that remedy is available. The Administrator may order a manufacturer to send the notification to owners on a specific date where the Administrator finds, after consideration of available information and the views of the manufacturer, that such notification is in the public interest. The factors that the Administrator may consider include, but are not limited to, the severity of the safety risk; the likelihood of occurrence of the defect or noncompliance; whether there is something that an owner can do to reduce either the likelihood of occurrence of the defect or noncompliance or the severity of the consequences; whether there will be a delay in the availability of the remedy from the manufacturer; and the anticipated length of any such delay.


(2) Be accomplished –


(i) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a motor vehicle manufacturer, by first class mail to each person who is registered under State law as the owner of the vehicle and whose name and address are reasonably ascertainable by the manufacturer through State records or other sources available to him. If the owner cannot be reasonably ascertained, the manufacturer shall notify the most recent purchaser known to the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall also provide notification to each lessee of a leased motor vehicle that is covered by an agreement between the manufacturer and a lessor under which the manufacturer is to notify lessees directly of safety-related defects and noncompliances.


(ii) In the case of a notification required to be sent by a replacement equipment manufacturer –


(A) By first class mail to the most recent purchaser known to the manufacturer, and


(B) (Except in the case of a tire) if decided by the Administrator to be required for motor vehicle safety, by public notice in such manner as the Administrator may require after consultation with the manufacturer.


(iii) In the case of a manufacturer required to provide notification concerning any defective or noncomplying tire, by first class or certified mail.


(iv) In the case of a notification to be sent by a lessor to a lessee of a leased motor vehicle, by first-class mail to the most recent lessee known to the lessor. Such notification shall be mailed within ten days of the lessor’s receipt of the notification from the vehicle manufacturer.


(b) The notification required by any paragraph of § 577.6 shall be provided:


(1) Within 60 days after the manufacturer’s receipt of the Administrator’s order to provide the notification, except that the notification shall be furnished within a shorter or longer period if the Administrator incorporates in his order a finding that such period is in the public interest; and


(2) In the manner and to the recipient specified in paragraph (a) of this section.


(c) The notification required by § 577.13 shall –


(1) Be furnished within a reasonable time after the manufacturer decides that a defect that relates to motor vehicle safety or a noncompliance exists. In